Home

SMG-700 User's Guide V1.00 (Nov 2004)

1. M r 205 2M T DSGP ONO IOW Loue reden E PUER Piu D MED IM REM Pin 205 29 2 DSCP Setup SGEE ew m 205 29 3 Lae Bd ceti a i T 206 Chapter 30 E 3 rS 207 30 1 Transparent LAN Service TLS Overview usseeeeeeeeenene een 207 30 T1 TLS Network Emp Las orbe E a e RERUM Ges LR Ras 207 30 2 TES PVC BORSE onnaa nia PORA REN ERUER EINUUREERRDNIAR SEEKRH CUR ERER DRE RR ER PE 208 Chapter 31 AC 211 31 1 Access Control Logic ACL Overview 1 rsen reden beri sateen parasdacsavanseaie 211 yD Ve Le Prolile Rules sre css cet au eaa aN aE EEAS epe obiil dde 211 2T L2 AUL Pronto ACIONS irsinin annenin qeeiiwerteansinabecdnmneedesdanieesconieuseavesie 212 14 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide TZAL Sep SRO iana a 212 ACL PIT Sep SOGE sissivatsaerstnaaseinesnnatsan E nE EEE aiandi LEGE A AAAS EAN 214 Ji AL AGL Pronie Map SOFBEIT 125 corri Sr kantin EEEE AAEE EA ELA EE EE 216 Chapter 32 Downstream Broadcast asraon THU NAME MIS N SIM UND RAMIS NN AESA 217 32 1 Downstream BIOBGESIBE Lise ebrio b bet pp AREE EE REEL OM KiS COO d 4S EDU Kod 217 32 2 Downstream Broadcast Screen usc csetera ei d eh ERRE I A FER ERNA 217 Chapter 33 Sy SIGS iniuieiiden ce RE UHR ie HR Ra dern OI He HMM Pe Pd is 219 za i 219 cx Bree ET oRRe Ne 219 Chapter 34 Access elit
2. Rule Select which type of rule to use Note The lower the number 1 14 the higher the priority the rule has Provide additional information required for the selected rule Additional rules consist of one or more of the following criteria ethernet type Enter the 16 bit EtherType value between 0 and 65535 vlan Enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 Source mac Enter the source MAC address dest mac Enter the destination MAC address priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority protocol Select the IP protocol used protocol type Enter the IP protocol number between 0 and 255 used Source ip Enter the source IP address and subnet mask in dotted decimal notation dest ip Enter the source IP address and subnet mask in dotted decimal notation tos Enter the start and end Type of Service between 0 and 255 Source port Enter the source port or range of source ports dest port Enter the destination port or range of destination ports Action Select which action s the AAM1212 should follow when the criteria are satisfied rate Enter the maximum bandwidth this traffic is allowed to have replaced vlan Enter the VLAN ID that this traffic should use replaced priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority that this traffic should have deny Select this if you want the AAM1212 to reject this kind of traffic ACL Profile List Index This field displays a sequential val
3. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click this to enable DSCP on the selected ports Inactive Click this to disable DSCP on the selected ports All Click this to select all entries in the table None Click this to un select all entries in the table 29 3 DSCP Map Screen Use this screen to convert DSCP priority to IEEE 802 1p priority To open this screen click Advanced Application DSCP DSCP Map Figure 107 DSCP Map MHUAGNENNNED DSCP Setu Source DSCP 802 1P Priority 0 n b qn 2 n 5 CA m mo mr DP thn sth SC mr TL 7 0 7 7 0 7 E 0 7 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 DSCP Map LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Map Click DSCP Setup to open the screen where you can activate or deactivate DSCP on each port see Section 29 2 on page 205 Source DSCP This field displays each DSCP value 802 1P Priority Enter the IEEE 802 1p priority to which you would like to map this DSCP value Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 206 Chapter 29 DSCP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 30 TLS PVC This chapter shows you how to set up Transparent LAN Service VLAN stacking Q in Q o
4. Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh MVLAN ID Select the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN for which you want to look at or remove the multicast IP addresses currently added to it Name This field displays the name of this multicast VLAN State This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Enable or inactive Disable Entry Index This field displays the index number of each multicast VLAN group the range of multicast IP addresses configured for this multicast VLAN Start Multicast IP This field displays the beginning of this range of multicast IP addresses End Multicast IP This field displays the end of this range of multicast IP addresses Select Select this and click Delete to remove the multicast VLAN group Delete Click this to remove the selected multicast VLAN groups Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN 165 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 166 Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Filtering This chapter describes how to configure the Packet Filter screen 20 1 Pack
5. Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 131 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 132 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 15 xDSL Line Data 15 4 xDSL Line Rate Info Screen This screen displays an ADSL port s line operating values Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Figure 63 xDSL Line Rate Info OF PES iGo Line Performance Line Data Refresh Pot v Port Name Rate Down up Stream Rate kbps 9087 511 Down up Stream Noise Margin db 31 0 25 1 Down up Stream ttenuation db 24 0 2 5 Down up Stream Attainable Rate kbps 28092 1252 Service Mode adsl2 Trellis Encoding On Down Stream Interleave Delay 3 ms Up Stream Interleave Delay 3 ms Down Stream utput power 2 5 dbm Up Stream Output power 11 5 dbm Atur vendor id b5004244434d00000000000000000000 Atur version number 41327042303139610000000000000000 Atur serial number 00000000000000000000000000000000 bOO000000000000000000000000000000 vendor id 30304235303035300000000000000000 version number 66323333303030300000000000000000 serial number 30323030313430336539303030360000 Doo000000000000000000000000000000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 xDSL
6. 53 5 PPVC Member Delete Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc member delete portlist vpi vci member vpi member vci Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 387 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt member vpi gt lt member vci gt The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PPVC The VCI of the PPVC The VPI of the individual PVC that you are removing from the PPVC The VCI of the individual PVC that you are removing from the PPVC This command removes a PVC from a PPVC The following example removes a PVC that uses VPI 8 and VCI 36 from a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 Figure 267 PPVC Member Delete Command Example ras adsl ppvc member delete 5 8 35 8 36 53 6 PPVC Member Show Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc member show lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt member vpi gt lt member vci gt The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PPVC The VCI of the PPVC The VPI of the individual PVC that you are displaying The V
7. LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address This is the multicast MAC address 1 12 These fields display the static multicast group membership status of the DSL ports V displays for members and displays for non members Click a DSL port s status to change it clicking a V changes it to and vise versa Join All Click Join All to make all of the DSL ports members of the static multicast group Leave All Click Leave All to remove all of the DSL ports from the static multicast group Delete Click Delete to remove a static multicast group Adding new entry Add Type a multicast MAC address in the field and click the Add button to create a new static multicast entry Multicast MAC addresses must be 01 00 5E xx xx xx where x is a don t care value For example 01 00 5E 10 10 10 is a valid multicast MAC address Clicking Add saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 160 Chapter 18 Static Multicast AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Multicast VLAN This chapter describes the Multicast VLAN screens 19 1 Multicast VLAN Overview Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utiliz
8. Advanced Application VLAN Use these screens for viewing and configuring the VLAN settings IGMP Use these screens to view IGMP status information and configure IGMP settings and IGMP filters You can also use these screens to set up bandwidth requirements by multicast group or port and to set up limits on the number of multicast groups to which a port can subscribe Static Multicast Use this screen to configure static multicast entries Multicast VLAN Use these screens to set up multicast VLANs that can be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Filtering Use this screen to configure packet filtering MAC Filter Use this screen to configure MAC filtering for each port Spanning Tree Protocol Use these screens to display Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP information and configure RSTP settings Port Authentication Use these screens to configure RADIUS and IEEE 802 1x security settings Port Security Use this screen to limit the number of MAC address that can be learned on a port DHCP Relay Use this screen to configure the DHCP relay settings DHCP Snoop Use these screens to drop traffic from IP addresses not assigned by the DHCP server and to look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port 2684 Routed Mode Use this screen to configure the AAM1212 to handle 2684 routed mode traffic PPPoA to PPPoE Use this screen to enable PPPoA to PPPoE con
9. sse 305 46 3 MAC Count CONT abd 25a cdd nait a aeo ebd Pvt AERAR 306 46 3 1 MAC Count Show COTRA aca redca set aet x ndi Fe ienai ada 306 46 3 2 MAC Count Enable Command 1 eri rr center mikarani Rakina 307 40 3 3 MAC Count Disable COfTWBAd iioii aeiccid conrterbe stone cock d ida Er awz 307 45 3 4 MAG Count Set Command s ctia dad ud Kira data RES a Rd aada 308 Chapter 47 IGNME C oi mis EC son is Da ix EE EROUR NU DUM TUR KRUU e In NO UENERUEL ERN NU DD RE Feu ule i 309 27 Mullissst CSI suiit pRen Ima sa E ERG Ebo CORN ERR IRR OR EATER KREIS 309 272 IGMP S0000 EOmmalitis iori rte bp S eR iA 309 412 1 IGMP Snoop Show Command 5 there pe p PPu S Ia E FERI e dd ne Riesa a 309 18 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 27 2 2 IGMP Snoop Enable Command ior enrian 309 47 2 3 IGMP Snoop Disable Command 125155 nara haa proa Er y atta FER Pha o Phan 310 EACH IGMP Hiter COMIN AES RTT E D LU 310 47 3 1 IGMP Filter Show Command 1 eie d xe be dean 310 47 3 2 IGMP Filler Set Command 1 ouest coti no EE ere EE EAE 311 47 3 3 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command 1 ace sesicecaeiceietbr etus e tbi tue E esie 311 47 3 4 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 412 47 3 5 IGMP Filter Profile Show Command rre n etta hoenin 312 47 4 IGMP Bandwidth Commands Jioc aset a eis be t pati bona n 313 47 4 1 IGMP Bandwidth Default Command eeeeeeeeene 313 47 4 2 IG
10. 422 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide APPENDIX A Default Settings This section lists the default configuration of the AAMI212 Table 112 Default Settings VLAN Default Settings One VLAN is created this is also the management VLAN VID 1 Registration Fixed for the Ethernet and DSL ports Tagging Untagged for all ports ADSL Default Settings Enable Disable State Enabled Operational Mode auto DSL Port Profile Default Settings Name DEFVAL Profile Status Active Latency Mode Interleave Upstream ADSL Settings Downstream ADSL Settings Max Rate 512 Kbps 2048 Kbps Min Rate 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Latency Delay 4 ms 4 ms Max SNR 31 db 31 db Min SNR 0 db 0 db Target SNR 6 db 6 db Up Shift Margin 9 db 9 db Down Shift Margin 3 db 3 db Name DEFVAL MAX Factory Default Profile Status Active Latency Mode Interleave Upstream ADSL Settings Downstream ADSL Settings Max Rate 512 Kbps 9088 Kbps Min Rate 32 Kbps 32 Kbps Latency Delay 4 ms 4 ms Max Margin 31 db 31 db Min Margin 0 db 0 db 423 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 112 Default Settings continued Target Margin 6 db 6 db Up Shift Margin 9 db 9 db Down Shift Margin 3 db 3 db Virtual Channel Default Settings Super channel Enab
11. Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to display settings Chapter 32 Downstream Broadcast 217 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 71 Downstream Broadcast continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the number of the downstream broadcast blocking entry Port This is the number of a DSL port through which you will block downstream broadcast traffic on a specific VLAN VLAN This field displays the number of a VLAN to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic on the entry s port Select Select an entry s Select check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Select All Click AII to mark all of the check boxes Select None Click None to un mark all of the check boxes 218 Chapter 32 Downstream Broadcast AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 33 Syslog This chapter explains how to set the syslog parameters 33 1 Syslog The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server 33 2 SysLog Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application SysLog Figure 114 SysLog OES aD Enable UNIX Syslog SysLog Server IP 0 0 0 0 Ap
12. Up Shift SNR The downstream up shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes above this number the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate Configure the downstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Down Shift SNR The downstream down shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes below this number the device shifts to a lower transfer rate Configure the downstream down shift signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the target downstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 14 2 ATM QoS ATM Quality of Service QoS mechanisms provide the best service on a per flow guarantee ATM network infrastructure was designed to provide QoS It uses fixed cell sizes and built in traffic management see Section 14 3 on page 122 This allows you to fine tune the levels of services on the priority of the
13. 154 Chapter 17 IGMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 IGMP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 150 Filter Setup Click Filter Setup to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 17 6 on page 155 IGMP Mode Select Proxy to have the device use IGMP proxy Select Snooping to have the device passively learn multicast groups Select Disable to have the device not use either IGMP proxy or snooping Apply Click Apply to save your IGMP mode settings Clicking Apply saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 17 6 IGMP Filter Setup Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Filter Setup This screen is discussed in Section 14 8 on page 129 17 7 IGMP Count Screen Use this screen to limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription IGMP count is us
14. 1 4094 C 2 ethernet type 0 0 665535 source mel TM C 3 ethernet type 0 0 65535 dest mac C 4 vanjo 1 4094 source mac C vlan O a 4094 destmac FIT C B source mac ac C 7 vlan O p 1 4094 priority o C 8 ethernet type 0 0 65535 Cavian o 1 4094 C40soucemac S LL Caitaestme L E 12 priority 0 C 43 protocol tcp orprotocottype p 0 255 C 44 I source ip fo 0 0 0 mask 0 0 0 0 F destip fo 0 0 0 mask o 0 0 0 F tos starttos 0 0 255 endtos 0 255 source port start poto 0 65535 end port 0 65535 dest port start pot o 0 665535 end port o 065535 rate 1 65535 Kbps I replaced vlan 1 4094 replaced priority o deny Apply Cancel ACL Profile List Index ACL Profile Select Delete Select An None 214 Chapter 31 ACL AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 ACL Profile Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION ACL Setup Click ACL Setup to open the screen where you can assign ACL profiles to PVCs see Section 31 2 on page 212 ACL Profile Map Click ACL Profile Map to open the screen where you can look at which ACL profiles are assigned to which PVCs see Section 31 4 on page 216 Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the ACL profile The name can be 1 31 printable ASCII characters long Spaces are not allowed
15. The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 17 all ports lt gt a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt you can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt lt F lt T U gt The lt F gt stands for a fixed registrar administration control flag and registers a lt port gt to the static VLAN table with lt vid gt For a fixed port you also have to specify lt T U gt the tag control flag lt T gt has the device add an IEEE 802 1Q tag to frames going out through this port s lt U gt has the device send frames out through this port s without an IEEE 802 1Q tag X gt This is the registrar administration control flag lt X gt stands for forbidden and blocks a lt port gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vid gt name A name to identify the SVLAN entry This command creates a multicast VLAN and sets the allowed blocked port member s This command is similar to the command to create a regular VLAN See Section 45 4 4 on page 297 for examples and more information 47 8 2 Multicast VLAN Delete Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan delete vlanlist where lt vlanlist gt You can specify a single VLAN lt 1 gt all VLAN lt gt a list of VLAN lt 1 3 gt you can also include a range of VLAN lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command removes the specified multicast VLAN configuration s 47 8 3 Multicast VLAN Disable Command
16. The following example removes the historic minor level alarms for all alarm categories and all conditions Figure 145 Alarm History Clear Command Example ras alarm history clear minor 43 10 Alarm XEdit Command Syntax ras alarm xedit lt alarm gt all lt cond gt lt condcode gt severity fac lt target gt lt target gt clearable where cond all condition This is the text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Use the alarm tablelist to find alarm conditions lt condcode gt The condition code is the number of a specific alarm message Use the alarm tablelist to find alarm condition codes lt severity gt Specify an alarm severity level critical major minor or info for this alarm Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe fac The log facility 1o0ca11 10ca17 has the device log the syslog messages to a particular file in the syslog server Set this if this entry 1s for sending alarms to a syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details target snmpisyslogiall The type of alarm messages that the device is to send SNMP syslog or all You can specify more than one separated by commas clearable clearable unclearable This sets whether or not the alarm clear command removes the alarm from the system
17. This field displays the lowest temperature limit at this sensor Threshold Hi This field displays the highest temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Over for those above Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that can detect and report the voltage Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Average This field displays the average voltage measured at this sensor Threshold Low This field displays the lowest voltage limit at this sensor Threshold Hi This field displays the highest voltage limit at this sensor Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Abnormal is displayed Use this section of the screen to configure the hardware monitor threshold settings New threshold Configure new threshold settings in the fields below and click Apply to use Apply them Temperature Hi Use these fields to configure the highest temperature limit at each sensor Chapter 7 System Information AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 11 System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Temperature Lo Use these fields to configure the lowest temperature limit at eac
18. where index The number of the trap server 1 4 ip The IP address of the trap server lt port gt The port number upon which the trap server listens for SNMP traps The AAM1212 uses the default of 162 if you do not specify a trap port Use this command specify the IP address and port number of a trap server to which the AAM1212 sends SNMP traps If you leave the trap destination set to 0 0 0 0 default the AAM1212 will not send any SNMP traps 51 1 6 Show SNMP Settings Command Syntax ras gt sys snmp show 342 Chapter 51 SNMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command displays the current SNMP get community set community trap community trusted hosts and trap destination settings Chapter 51 SNMP 343 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 344 Chapter 51 SNMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 52 ADSL Commands This chapter describes some of the commands that allow you to configure and monitor the DSL ports 52 1 DSL Port Commands Use these commands to configure the DSL ports See Chapter 13 on page 101 for background information on DSL and ADSL 52 1 1 DSL Port Show Command Syntax ras adsl show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the activation status operational mode max
19. where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays line performance statistics for the current and previous 24 hours An example is shown next Figure 248 1Day Performance Command Example ras gt statistics adsl ldayperf 1 Port 1 current 1 day elapsed time 81985 sec Link Down Current 1 Day Perf ATUC ATUR lofs 0 loss lols lprs es init ses uas ooooloaono oOo Wy Cc LI e Port 1 previous 1 day elapsed time 0 sec Previous 1 Day Perf ATUC ATUR lofs 0 loss 0 0 lols 0 lprs 0 es 0 0 init 0 ses 0 0 uas 0 0 See Table 95 on page 366 for details about these counters 52 2 7 Line Diagnostics Set Command Syntax ras adsl linediag setld port number Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 367 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command has the AAM1212 perform line diagnostics on the specified port The DSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 operational mode and have a connection It takes about one minute for the line diagnostics to finish The following example performs line diagnostics on DSL port 1 The screen displays a message confirming upon which DSL port line diagnostics will be performed Figure 249 Line Diagnostics Set Command Example ras adsl linediag setld 1 Line 1 set to Line Diagnostic Mode 52 2 8
20. 11c o s fa Encap o vcl fh 1 4094 Priority Add Modify Cancel VPI VCI Encap PVID Priority O 32 llc 0 D34 vc 1 O 36 llc 2 vc 0 Members Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 PPVC Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION xDSL Port Setup Click xDSL Port Setup to go to the screen where you can configure DSL port settings see Section 13 7 on page 103 VC Setup Click VC Setup to open the VC Setup screen where you can configure VC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 9 on page 110 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings Encap Select the encapsulation type llc or vc for this PPVC VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this PPVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this PPVC The AAM1212 uses this PVC channel internally This PVC is not needed on the subscriber s device This PVC cannot overlap with any existing PVCs on this port PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this PPVC Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 115 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 23 PPVC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Add Modify Click Add Modify t
21. 398 Figure 284 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example 399 Figure 285 PAE PYG Sel Command Example etie b pet otra Ee aiani 400 Figure 286 PAE PVC Show Command Example eese 401 Figure 287 PAE PVC Session Command Exemple 2s cce nte ccn 402 Figure 288 PAE PYC Counter Command EXemple 5eoecicsenec eontra etii ta 402 Figure 289 TLS PVG Set Command Example 5er eth ek etai inrer nra adn 404 Figure 290 TLS PVC Show Command EXTIpl 22er etit ee ttis 405 Figure 291 ACL Profile Set Command Exearaple 5 iccst sensa ict coii s 2a 409 Figure 292 ACL Profile Show Map Command Example sss 409 Figure 293 ACL Profile Show Command Example 2 reete pe eot eth erts aaa 410 Figure 294 ACL Assignment Set Command Example sse 411 Figure 295 ACL Assignment Show Command Example esses 411 Figure 206 Testing Irn house WWI uucccsiaecccci tocco ccr taper cetr ntt tt iseia 416 List of Figures 31 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 297 Resetting the Switch Via Command eese 420 Figure 295 Example Xmoderm DIBIGBl 1 ccce reti E enda hear CER UEE EY Id Eni nad 421 Figure 299 Example Xmodem Upload iussis erii vasis o d ed eto eL ira IER Pru ttbi ea Race 422 Figure 300 Telco 50 Pin Assignments usce oriri er ee eR rera ni e eaa 429 Figure 301 Console Cable RJ 11 Male Connector c ccccesccccceeeccereee
22. 4 Type y at the question Do you want to restore default ROM file y n 5 The AAM1212 restarts Figure 297 Resetting the Switch Via Command ras config restore System will reboot automatically after restoring default configuration Do you want to proceed y n restoring configuration Saving configuration to flash The AAMI212 is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default user name of admin and the default password of 1234 Uploading the Default Configuration File If you forget your password or cannot access the AAM1212 you will need to reload the factory default configuration file Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 Note Uploading the factory default configuration file erases the AAM1212 s entire configuration Obtain the default configuration file unzip it and save it in a folder Use a console cable to connect a computer with terminal emulation software to the AAM1212 s console port Turn the AAMI212 off and then on to begin a session When you turn on the AAMI212 again you will see
23. End Multicast IP 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Bandwidth 512 1 100 000 Kbps Index Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP Bandwidth Kbps Select Delete Select A Nore 152 Chapter 17 IGMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 IGMP Bandwidth LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click Port Setup to open the Bandwidth Port Setup screen where you can set up multicast bandwidth requirements on specified ports see Section 17 4 1 on page 153 Default Bandwidth Enter the default bandwidth for multicast channels for which you have not configured bandwidth requirements Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index Select a unique number for this setting If you select a number that is already used the new setting overwrites the old one when you click Apply Start Multicast IP Enter the beginning of the multicast range End Multicast IP Enter the end of the multicast range For one multicast address enter the start of the multicast range again Bandwidth Enter the bandwidth requirement for the specified multicast range Apply Click Apply to save the filter settings The s
24. Syntax ras switch isolation show This command displays the current setting of the subscriber isolation feature An example is shown next Figure 137 Isolation Show Example ras switch isolation show System isolation enabled 42 4 2 Isolation Enable Command Syntax ras switch isolation enable This command turns on the subscriber isolation feature 42 4 3 Isolation Disable Command Syntax ras switch isolation disable This command turns off the subscriber isolation feature 42 5 Statistics Monitor Command Syntax ras statistics monitor This command shows the current hardware status voltage and temperature Chapter 42 Command Examples 275 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide An example is shown next Figure 138 Statistics Monitor Command Example ras gt statistics monitor Hardware monitor status enabled nominal limit hi limit 10 current min max avg status vi v 1 200 1 344 1 056 1 152 1 139 1 152 1 148 Normal v2 v 1 800 1 944 1 656 1 820 1 820 1 820 1 820 Normal v3 v 3 300 3 564 3 036 3 200 3 200 3 200 3 200 Normal v4 v 18 000 19 440 16 560 18 175 18 175 18 175 18 175 Normal limit hi limit lo current min max avg status t1 c 97 000 55 000 43 000 40 000 52 000 43 000 Normal t2 c 97 000 55 000 46 000 41 000 59 000 46 000 Normal t3 c 97 000 55 000 47 000 42 000 58 000 47 000 Normal 42 6 Statistics Port Command Syntax ras gt statistics port lt po
25. eee nnan nnns 411 54 2 3 ACL Assignment SHOW Command sii cccccctsese courses soosesess tentare tetra 411 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting i asccicsncssicncaseinasncrenveriarsriatincsaroatsssnntavensaxadiansancassataoxarievseiatnerm annie 413 55 1 The SYS LED Does Not TUM O circinata a aili anaiak aa 413 55 2 The ALM LED 1 DI siniestra spa ir aa a n EAN 413 55 2 LAN Port LEDs Do Not Tutt OR iussis o prt d an eaa 414 55A LAN Port Data Transmission penisine ain E E E EEE 414 50 2 DSL Date silet uou cdi npe via ebur td aniden ebi niai o du PE eR 415 55 6 There Is No Voice on a DSL Connection esseseseesss eene tena 415 Bo DasH VES adpusgssetilsiisibeietqdis pn ocn bn e etr Na ea 415 vas Cocal EOE e 417 go TIO FNS sia scia co AN E Rin eO REUS OA P LES Haa t ELP Pa EUN E Mesa E ER EITI 418 V MIessietioEetups S 418 B3 HH PSSSWON Loo Pree eet Dad e Roe dta Hn Led Lo ended 418 Bo 12 ovS LOEO Ssetelsdes t acess DEEP RE bx Ref Ure vba CR c vbt tls en Po FA 418 Bids ed ANNIE e a as 419 Bode Tell aaria anaa Eae enw ENDUE OU asunder Muah tee b aad 419 03 19 Resetting he Delais mm 419 55 15 1 Resetting the Defaults Via Command eese 420 55 15 2 Uploading the Default Configuration File ssesssess 420 55 16 Recovering he PFITIWEEG cccccicccusccevereuurcetnrseureressrauserteseanuuetranrseuarreneruaeveuind 421 Appendix A Default
26. esses eeeeeeeseeeeeeeuee 55 4 1 Web Conigurator COVOPVEQUC 1 cen ec t en ext da edis Based n Des or eR 55 4 2 Screen Privilege Levels iunis equas pha rp Loiret rei OT oca DA T ra LE ananena Pape diua 58 4 3 Accessing the Web Coniigurator ee 55 ke NVGO FONG a 57 Ao CHANGIN Nro ol N 59 6 5 Saving YOU Configurator 24 oor rabud eive opm di peur etapa d eae e viera a did VM EET de 60 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator 00 ccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeens 60 Chapter 5 Initial Configuratio 55 22 3 2 eias aaaeaii 63 51 Initial Configuration OVeIVIGW ceskkovtas d rax cid vr EH EP posse e kh a ER UAd ia i 63 cap Connora On Meee Pere eens m 63 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics ScreOMnS cccccccciccisisesssscssessssesscsecscusesnoveaccviensovestevessanvesney 69 p Homes SESS Ree aiia eei ere ee le ce Re er ere 69 6 1 1 Ethemet Port Statistics SOISBIT 1 s eve det peret has danda vad pore d easi Ltd eea adn 70 6 1 2 DSL Port Statistics Sereen used srera FR ak adn x cr d dean tea pagi T3 6 1 3 RMON Statistics SOFGOE 12s eese cs eveet sat et aeu rese k arn esrb d Eri rkP deinet roniv 75 514 RMON Hislon SCR SI sonsaina HIR pe td ae etta aba Eee isa T4 6 1 5 RMON History Delall OSEE issicdeisbesenbaseker Eee pir E RE EE RU IN ERE UT M En EIDEUNIE 78 Chapter 7 system IHTOFWSIEON ii iieri OU a deno ive dac ta Ua oe ese Rob icis Insq easi p La uS Da RE iaa 81 Chapter 8 Cie OT EL STINGS osscyodacdixiadi p A ed ek dA QUA E
27. portlist vci lt vpi gt Display priority PVC settings M L ppve set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt encap gt lt pvid gt lt priority gt Set priority PVC H H ppvc member show portlist vci lt vpi gt Display PPVC member settings M L ppvc member set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt member vpi gt lt member vci gt lt DS vcprofile US vcprofile level Set PPVC member H H ppvc member delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt member vpi gt lt member vci gt Remove PPVC member H H ppvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Remove Priority PVC H H rpvc gateway set lt gateway ip gt lt vlan id gt lt priority gt Set gateway for RPVC H H rpvc gateway delet lt gateway ip gt Delete gateway for RPVC H H rpvc gateway show Display gateway for RPVC M L rpvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt DS vcprofile US vcprofile ip netmask gateway ip Set RPVC on a port H H rpvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Delete RPVC on a port H H rpvc show lt portlist gt Display RPVC on a port M L rpvc route set lt port number gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt ip gt lt netmask gt Set RPVC routing subnet on a port H H rpvc route delete lt port num
28. user show Displays the authentication mode RADIUS server settings and user info M L user auth local radius land r Set authentication method H H user server lt ip gt port secret high middle low d eny Set remote authentication server IP address and secret H H adsl 254 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P show portlist Displays the ADSL settings L L enable lt portlist gt Turns on the specified ADSL M H ports disable lt portlist gt Turns off the specified ADSL M H ports profile show profile Displays profile contents L L profile set profile fast Creates an adsl line profile H H interleave lt up delay gt lt down delay gt gt lt up max rate gt lt down max rate gt lt up target margin gt lt up min margin gt lt up max margin gt lt up min rate gt lt down target margin gt lt down min margin gt lt down max margin gt lt down min rate gt lt up down shift margin gt lt up up shift margin gt lt down down shift margin gt lt down up shift margin gt profile delete lt profile gt Removes an ADSL profile H H profile map lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Assigns a specific H H lt profile gt profile to a port s and sets the lt glite gdm
29. vci profile where lt portlist gt The port number of the PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PVC lt profile gt The name of the ACL profile This command allows you to remove an ACL profile from the specified PVC 54 2 3 ACL Assignment Show Command Syntax ras gt switch acl show lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PVC This command displays the current ACL profiles applied to the specified PVC s The following figure shows an example Figure 295 ACL Assignment Show Command Example ras gt switch acl show port vpi vci type profile 1 0 33 PVC test Chapter 54 ACL Commands 411 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 412 Chapter 54 ACL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 55 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies After each problem description some steps are provided to help you to diagnose and solve the problem 55 1 The SYS LED Does Not Turn On The
30. 14 3 2 2 Sustained Cell Rate SCR a ecc oeta tha tna akt td hh p kn khai 123 14 3 23 Maximum Burst Size MBS 1 eus deti tensor 123 14 3 2 4 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT seeeeeeee 123 143 2 9 Burst Tolerance BT rencr nnan NA 124 14 3 2 6 Theoretical Arrival Time TAT ceci 124 144 Upeiream Polci iuis icsricen tas dedere COUR Ey EBROER n RP CK QU ndr EAS E ER BI ERR ANEA 124 TIO VE PEG SEO i pap d UEHRUNEd ao be pF TrTpm Er EU ERM M UH RM NN TE ND Mbudqde 125 TG AT Prono Sree isos ero d od oet tenu dedu Dac b s ER xq 127 RENE i e MET E 129 74 8 IGMP Filter Profile SOEN uiiscciseciisesi esee iere oii eva abs kx e plas 12d pu ion LEHRER pud E 129 Chapter 15 XDSL Line Data rse aas ua OK EROR EK KR AE 133 15 1 XDSL Line Rate Info Screen 1 eed adviendiins Lo nra dish ER naa GEB Le Ep a cese n ERR ek pne 133 195 2 XDSL Porfomance SOIT saurare Pap Pen AER bE PO ea Ee ne RT e PU RH dA 135 T5058 OSL Line Data STOGI soispricit ts pepe tX FEE It e rt cda d be b E ePi Lupa adn 137 Chapter 16 DUE 141 19 1 introduction 10 ibi uet 141 16 2 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAN 1 tree erret eite 141 16 2 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames sess 142 16 3 VLAN Status SOIN cosa Genders aia AEE 142 164 Slate VLAN Selig SERIBI qox tis rta etai anise Ao M R 144 16 5 VLAN Port Setting Screen 52 s
31. 248 Chapter 39 MAC Table AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 40 ARP Table This chapter describes the ARP Table 40 1 Introduction to ARP Table Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 40 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device the device s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the device puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for fut
32. Figure 162 VLAN Show Command Example ras gt switch vlan show vid name F fixed X forbidden N normal U untag T tag 1 DEFAULT enabled 123456789012 12 FREEPOPE EEE E RR UUUUUUUUUUUU UU 302 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 46 MAC Commands This chapter describes how to configure the AAMI212 s MAC commands 46 1 MAC Commands Overview Use the MAC commands to configure MAC filtering or limit the MAC count 46 2 MAC Filter Commands Use the MAC filter to control from which MAC Media Access Control addresses frames can or cannot come in through a port 46 2 1 MAC Filter Show Command Syntax ras switch mac filter show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the MAC filtering status V for enabled for disabled and the fixed source MAC addresses on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example displays the MAC filtering mode status and the fixed source MAC addresses on DSL port 5 Figure 163 MAC Filter Show Command Example ras gt sw mac filter show 5 status V enable mac filter function status disable mac filter function port mode status mac 5 accept i 005a0 05 12 34 56 Chapter 46 MAC Co
33. LABEL DESCRIPTION Return Click Return to go back to the previous screen Get Community Enter the get community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trap Community Enter the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Trap Destination 1 4 Enter the IP address of a station to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the station listens for SNMP traps Trusted Host A trusted host is a computer that is allowed to use SNMP with the AAM1212 0 0 0 0 allows any computer to use SNMP to access the AAM1212 Specify an IP address to allow only the computer with that IP address to use SNMP to access the AAM 1212 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 34 5 Service Access Control Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Service Access Control Chapter 34 Access Control 225 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Fig
34. Microsoft Internet Explorer E x 2 Restore default configurations and reboot the system Click OK to begin resetting all device configurations to the factory defaults and then wait for the device to restart This takes up to two minutes If you want to access the web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 Figure 129 Restore Factory Default Settings Reboot Microsoft Internet Explorer E x AN rebooting please close this session then reconnect later 37 6 Reboot System Use this function to restart the device without physically turning the power off Chapter 37 Maintenance 241 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide To open this screen click Management Maintenance Click here Reboot System Figure 130 Reboot System Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system 4 Cancel Click OK You then see the screen as shown in Figure 129 on page 241 Click OK again and wait for the device to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the device s configuration 37 7 Command Line FTP See Chapter 50 on page 335 for how to upload or download files to or from the device using FTP commands 242 Chapter 37 Maintenance AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 38 Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screens 38 1 Diagnos
35. The AAM1212 routes DHCP requests to the primary and secondary server for each VLAN regardless of which one is active Enable Option82 Sub option1 Enable DHCP relay info to have the AAM1212 add the originating port numbers to DHCP requests regardless of whether the DHCP relay is on or off Sub option1 Circuit ID Use this field to specify up to 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the AAM1212 to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the chassis number of the AAM1212 or the ISP s name Enable Option82 Enable DHCP relay info to have the AAM1212 add the sub option 2 Remote ID Sub option2 to DHCP requests regardless of whether the DHCP relay is on or off Sub option2 Use this field to specify up to 23 ASCII characters of additional information for Remote ID the AAM1212 to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN ID Enter the ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP relay s Enter 0 to set up the IP address es of the default DHCP relay s Primary Server IP Enter
36. The following figure shows the number of IGMP packets for port 1 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 319 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 188 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command Example ras statistics igmpsnoop port info 1 port group cnt query cnt join cnt leave cnt 47 7 4 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command Syntax ras statistics igmpsnoop port group lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the IGMP groups a port joins The following figure shows an example for port 1 Figure 189 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command Example ras gt statistics igmpsnoop port group 1 port vid mcast_ip source ip 47 8 Multicast VLAN Commands Use these commands to configure VLAN multicast settings and set multicast port members Multicast VLAN allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management 47 8 1 Multicast VLAN Set Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan set vid lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X gt lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt xX gt name 320 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where vid
37. if the alarm clear command does not remove the alarm from the system 43 8 Alarm History Show Command Syntax ras alarm history show lt severity gt all alarm all condition all lt sdate gt all edate all for rev detail where lt sdate gt The start date in yyyy mm dd format lt edate gt The end date in yyyy mm dd format for rev The displaying order Use for to display in chronological order starting from the oldest alarm Use rev to display in reverse chronological order starting from the most recent alarm detail Display in depth alarm information This command displays historic alarms by severity alarm category alarm condition and or dates The following example displays the historic critical level alarms for all alarm categories and all conditions Figure 144 Alarm History Show Command Example ras gt alarm history show major all all all all rev detail no alarm condition severity timestamp source 1 enet down major 01 01 00 00 12 enet 1 NTENET1 GbE interface is down 2 enet down major 01 01 00 00 10 enet 1 NTENET1 GbE interface is down Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 283 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 43 9 Alarm History Clear Command Syntax ras alarm history clear alarm all condition all severity This command removes historic alarm entries by alarm category alarm condition or severity
38. switch acl profile show lt name gt Chapter 54 ACL Commands 409 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt name gt The name of the ACL profile This command lists the names of every ACL profile or displays the detailed settings of the specified ACL profile Figure 293 ACL Profile Show Command Example ras gt switch acl profile show test profile test rule vian 10 priority 2 action rpri en rate 1000 54 2 ACL Assignment Commands Use these commands to apply ACL profiles to PVCs 54 2 1 ACL Assignment Set Command Syntax ras gt switch acl set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt profile gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PVC lt profile gt The name of the ACL profile This command allows you to apply an ACL profile to the specified port s You can apply up to eight profiles to a subscriber port The following example applies the ACL profile test to a PVC 410 Chapter 54 ACL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 294 ACL Assignment Set Command Example ras switch acl set 1 0 33 test 54 2 2 ACL Assignment Delete Command Syntax ras switch acl delete lt portlist gt vpi
39. volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 10 Switch Setup 95 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 96 Chapter 10 Switch Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 11 IP Setup The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a device IP address subnet mask and DNS domain name server for management purposes To open this screen click Basic Setting IP Setup Figure 46 IP Setup 152 168 1 1 IP mask 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Cancel Default Gateway 132 168 1 254 Apply Gateway setting Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Enter the IP address of your AAM1212 in dotted decimal notation for example 1 2 3 4 IP Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your AAM1212 in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Click Apply IP setting to save your changes to the device s IP address and or subnet mask to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Apply Gateway Click Ap
40. 0 0 loss 0 0 lols 0 lprs 0 es 0 0 init 0 ses 0 0 uas 0 0 The following table explains these counters Table 95 15 Minute Performance Counters LABEL DESCRIPTION atuc Upstream These statistics are for the connection or traffic coming from the subscriber s device to the AAM1212 atur Downstream These statistics are for the connection or traffic going from the AAM1212 to the subscriber s device lofs The number of Loss Of Frame seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period loss The number of Loss Of Signal seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period lols The number of Loss Of Link seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period lprs The number of Loss of Power seconds on the ATUR that have occurred within the 15 minute period es The number of Errored Seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period init The number of link ups and link downs that have occurred within the 15 minute period ses The number of Severely Errored Seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period uas The number of UnAvailable Seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute period These counters are also used in the alarm profiles see Section 52 2 9 on page 370 366 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 2 6 1 Day Performance Command Syntax ras statistics adsl ldayperf lt portlist gt
41. 174094 o 0 7 default 0 Add Priority Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 2684 Routed Gateway LABEL DESCRIPTION Routed PVC Click Routed PVC to go to the screen where you can configure routed PVC settings see Section 27 2 on page 192 Routed Domain Click Routed Domain to open this screen where you can configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic see Section 27 3 on page 194 RPVC ARP Proxy Click RPVC ARP Proxy to go to the screen where you can view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them see Section 27 4 on page 195 Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the System receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation VID Specify a VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes to this gateway Priority Select the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that you send to this gateway Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index This field displays the number of the gateway entry Gateway IP This field displ
42. Alarm Profile Click Alarm Profile to open the Alarm Profile screen where you can configure limits that trigger an alarm when exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 127 Index This is the number of the IGMP filter profile Click a profile s index number to edit the profile You cannot edit the DEFVAL profile Name This name identifies the IGMP filter profile Delete Select the Delete check box and click Delete to remove an IGMP filter profile You cannot delete the DEFVAL profile Name Type a name to identify the IGMP filter profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Start IP Enter the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access 130 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 28 IGMP Filter Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End IP Enter the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses to which you want this IGMP filter profile to allow access If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start IP and End IP fields Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
43. First the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test The results Passed or Failed display in the multi line text box LDM Test Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Set LDM Port to have the AAM1212 perform line diagnostics on the specified port The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 ADSL operational mode and have a connection It takes about one minute for the line diagnostics to finish The screen displays a message confirming upon which ADSL port line diagnostics will be performed Click Get LDM Data to display the line diagnostics results after using the Set LDM Port button on an ADSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical ADSL line Click Get LDM Data raw to display the unformatted line diagnostics results Click Get LDM Data 992 3 to display the line diagnostics results in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard Note Wait at least one minute after using Set LDM Port before using Get LDM Data SELT Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Set SELT Port to perform a Single End Loop Test SELT on the specified port This test checks the distance to the subscriber s location Note The port must have an open loop There cannot be a DSL device phone fax machine or
44. The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the AAM1212 are Speed Auto Duplex Auto 3 1 4 LAN Port Ethernet Connection Connect the LAN port of your AAMI212 to an Ethernet WAN switch using a straight through Category 5 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable with RJ 45 connectors You may stack multiple IES 1000 units up to the number of ports available on the Ethernet switch as shown next 44 Chapter 3 Front Panel AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure8 Stacking Multiple IES 1000 Units 3 1 5 Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames An MDF is usually installed between end users equipment and the telephone company CO in a basement or telephone room The MDF is the point of termination for the outside telephone company lines coming into a building and the telephone lines in the building Chapter 3 Front Panel 45 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 9 MDF Wiring lowerports Connect wiring from end user equipment to the lower ports of an MDF using a telephone wire Connect wiring from the telephone company to the upper ports of an MDF see the previous figure Some MDFs have surge protection circuitry built in between the two banks thus do not connect telephone wires from the telephone company directly to the AAMI212 Usea punch down tool to seat telephon
45. This field shows the customer telephone number provided for this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Profile This field shows which profile is assigned to this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Mode This field shows which ADSL operational mode the port is set to use This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Channels This field displays the number of PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits that are configured for this port This is configured in the VC Setup screen see Section 13 9 on page 110 13 7 1 xDSL Port Setting Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup and then click a port s index number Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 105 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 50 xDSL Port Setting General Setup Active Customer Info Customer Tel Profile Mode Alarm Profile IGMP Filter Profile ADSL 2 2 feature Annex L Annex M Annex PMM SRA DEFVAL bd auto had DEFVAL DEFVAL disable disable disable US INP 0 0 gt DMT Symbol DS INP 0 0 DMT Symbol Max US TX PSD bp 400 40 0 1 dBm Hz Max DS TX PSD fo 400 40 0 1 dBm Hz LO Time 200 10 55535 sec defauit300 L2 Time 50 10 65535 sec default 30 L2 ATPR hc 0 15 dB default 1 L2 ATPRT e 0 15 dB default 6 Max L2 Rate J
46. This field shows the number of frames received that were bigger than 1518 non VLAN or 1522 VLAN octets and contained a valid FCS Rx undersize This field shows the number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS Rx discard This field shows the number of frames dropped based on packet filtering Tx bytes This field shows the number of bytes that have been transmitted on this port This includes collisions but not jam signal or preamble SFD Start of Frame Delimiter bytes Tx packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on this port Tx multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames transmitted on this port not including broadcast frames Tx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast frames transmitted on this port not including multicast frames Tx mac pause This field shows the number of valid IEEE 802 3x Pause frames transmitted on this port Tx fragments This field shows the number of transmitted frames that were less than 64 octets long and with an incorrect FCS value Tx frames This field shows the number of complete good frames transmitted on this port Tx error underrun This field shows the number of outgoing frames that were less than 64 octets long Tx undersize This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained a valid FCS Tx j
47. You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the line performance counters of a DSL port An example is shown next Figure 246 Lineperf Command Example ras statistics adsl lineperf 1 port 1 Perf since boot up nfebe I nfebe ni P 46 0 Far End CRC ncrc I ncrc ni 7 5 0 Near End CRC nfecc I nfecc ni 0 0 Far End Corrected FEC nfec I nfec ni n 28 0 Near End Corrected FEC init atuc init atur 23 es atuc es atur 27 92 ses atuc ses atur 26 60 uas atuc uas atur 1515 1515 lpr atuc lpr atur 2 364 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started In the list above the definitions of near end far end will always be relative to the ATU C ADSL Termination Unit Central Office Downstream ds refers to data from the ATU C and upstream us refers to data from the ATU R T stands for interleaved and ni stands for non interleaved fast mode A block is a set of consecutive bits associated with the path each bit belongs to one and only one block Consecutive bits may not be contiguous in time Table 94 Line Performance Counters LABEL DESCRIPTION nfebe The Number of Far End Block Errors Cyclic Redundancy Check nere Near end Cyclic Redundancy Check errors nfecc The Far End blocks
48. You can also set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold 36 2 Alarm Status Screen This screen displays the alarms that are currently in the system To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Status Figure 121 Alarm Status Xu Alarm Event Setup Alarm Port Setup Alarm Type A11 Refresh Clear No Alarm Condition Severity Timestamp Source 1 dsl line down minor 01 04 16 46 48 1 Page 1of 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Alarm Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Event Setup Click Alarm Event Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 36 4 on page 233 Alarm Port Setup Click Alarm Port Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s See Section 36 5 on page 236 Alarm Type Select which type of alarms to display by Severity or select All to look at all the alarms Chapter 36 Alarm 231 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 80 Alarm Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to update this screen Clear Click this button to erase the clearable alarm entries No This fiel
49. a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field identifies the Ethernet port Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned accor
50. ct pet tet fet fet fet fet fet fet fet fet fet e jeje FOTO NIT OD up AR TWIT Ne e ej pojolujojulsljol mj NT 7O i dil E EE M edil odi ou Slee tee iea cad kal ba a l sz pb t 2 vL v9 v PHoOOGPSSQHOEGOaGHOOQOCECOCSEC E Cl CI CJ Ey Ch Ch Cl Ck Ch CEN Cl Eh e ky ED EZ EE cy t ED ve UD CIcIC S SISISISISISISISIS SIg Islels u oiIojroJ u l loeljolo o ol o o o o o o9 el8l8l 8 8 8I 8 8 8l8 ojojolivivivivivivivivic OFOTO DU Di Di Vi Vi vViviviv 3ilalaloelololololololo o 3lalzalolololololololo o rar ier a bea ea PS at PS Pier bs 15 es Pea abet a1 3131313153 ara reg Fas kaa kad Fags im mm foods Lad Lat Lad ee ETS ee ee Ead Ead ee ee iui oe Lai Nj Jofo oinaan AL winnie m o vo ojw o o 5 o m ec m e a ba r a a a 02741715 rda road lr ewok ae Ee ee This table lists the ports and matching pin numbers for the hardware Telco 50 connector Table 115 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Port and Pin Numbers PORT NUMBER PIN NUMBER USER 14 39 USER 15 40 USER 16 41 USER 17 42 CO 4 29 USER 18 43 CO 5 30 CO 1 26 USER 19 44 CO 6 31 CO 2 27 CO 3 28 USER 20 45 CO 7 32 USER 21 46 CO 8 33 USER 22 47 CO 9 34 0 USER 23 48 CO 10 35 doijol ojo amp oj nm 429 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 115 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Port and Pin
51. downstream noise margin ADSL port Link WARN An ADSL portlost its connection Down SN lt seq no gt port port number lt seq no gt sequence number of the connection ADSL port Link Loss WARN The subscriber device connected to an ADSL port experienced a loss of of Power Dying Gasp power Dying Gasp Event port port number Change time server to INFO The time server setting was changed to none none Change time server to INFO The time server protocol setting was changed to TIME The time server s IP TIME IP ip address and time zone are displayed Timezone time zone Change time server to INFO The time server protocol setting was changed to DAYTIME The time DAYTIME IP ip server s IP address and time zone are displayed Change time server to INFO The time server protocol setting was changed to NTP The time server s IP NTP IP ip address and time zone are displayed Timezone time zone Ether port Link WARN An Ethernet link is down Down SN N lt port gt 1 is ENET1 2 is ENET2 SN an internal sequencer number Ether N Link Up SN N INFO An Ethernet link is up lt speed gt lt port gt 1 is ENET1 2 is ENET2 SN an internal sequencer number lt speed gt Ethernet connection speed for example 1000M or 100M Incorrect Password WARN Someone attempted to use the wrong password to start a console telnet or FTP session see the process field for the type of sess
52. for up to 60 seconds Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 86 Chapter 8 General Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 9 User Account The User Account screens allows you to set up and configure system administrator accounts for the AAMI212 You can also configure the authentication policy for AAMI212 administrators This is different than port authentication in Chapter 23 on page 177 See Chapter 23 on page 177 for background information on authentication 9 1
53. lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt profile gt The name of an alarm profile Sets the AAM1212 to use an already configured alarm profile with the specified DSL ports The following example sets the AAM1212 to use the SESalarm alarm profile with DSL port 3 Figure 258 Alarm Profile Map Command Example ras adsl alarmprofile map SESalarm 5 52 3 5 Alarm Profile Showmap Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile showmap profile 378 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where profile The name of an alarm profile Displays which alarm profiles the AAM1212 is set to use for specific or all DSL ports The following example displays which alarm profile the AAM1212 is set to use for DSL port 2 Figure 259 Alarm Profile Showmap Command Example ras adsl alarmprofile showmap 5 ADSL alarm profile mapping Port 5 Alarm Profile DEFVAL Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 379 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 380 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 53 Virtual Channel Management This chapter shows you how to use commands to configure virtual channels 53 1 Virtual Channel Management Overview See Chapter 13 on page 101 for background information on virtual channels and ATM QoS 53 2 Virtual Channel Profile Commands Use the following comm
54. lt vid gt smac mac vlan lt vid gt dmac mac smac lt mac gt dmac lt mac gt vlan lt vid gt priority lt priority gt etype lt etype gt vlan lt vid gt smac lt mac gt dmac lt mac gt priority lt priority gt protocol lt protocol gt srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt tos lt tos gt srcport lt sport gt lt eport gt dstport sport lt eport gt where type lt etype gt Ethernet type 0 65535 vlan vid VLAN ID 1 4094 smac mac Source MAC address dmac lt mac gt Destination MAC address priority priority Priority 0 7 protocol lt protocol gt Protocol type tcp udp ospf igmp ip gre icmp or user specified IP protocol number 0 2557 srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt Source IP address and subnet mask 0 32 dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt Destination IP address and subnet mask 0 32 tos stos etos Sets the ToS Type of Service range between 0 and 255 srcport sport lt eport gt Source port range 0 65535 dstport sport lt eport gt Destination port range 0 65535 The following guidelines apply to classifiers You can apply one classifier for a protocol on a port s PVC You cannot create a classifier that contains matching criteria for layer 2 and layer 3 fields For example switch acl profile set test protocol tcp vlan 15 deny is not allowed as protocol type and VLAN do not belong to t
55. policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile lt pvid gt 1 4094 the second VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes using this PVC lt priority gt Set the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that uses this PVC This command sets the second VLAN tag to add to the packets from the PVC The following example adds VLAN tag 100 to traffic using the DEFVAL ATM profile on PVC 1 33 on port 2 Figure 289 TLS PVC Set Command Example ras adsl tlspvc set 2 1 33 DEFVAL 100 0 53 9 3 TLS PVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl tlspvc show lt portlist gt vpi vci 404 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt The port number of the TLS PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the TLS PVC vci The VCI of the TLS PVC This command displays the TLS settings for the specified port s or PVC s The following example shows the TLS settings on port 2 Figure 290 TLS PVC Show Command Example ras adsl tlspvc show 2 port vpi vci pvid pri DS US vcprofile Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 405 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 406 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAP
56. reauthentication dotlx port peroid lt portlist gt period Set port reauth period H H dotix radius show Display radius server settings M L dotlx radius ip ip Set Radius server IP H H dotlx radius port port Set Radius server port H H dotlx radius secret secret Set Radius server secret H H dotix profile show Display accounts for profile mode M L dotlx profile set lt name gt lt password gt Set account and password for H H profile mode dotix profile name Remove account for profile mode H H delete enet show Displays the Ethernet port M L settings enet speed lt portlist gt Sets the Ethernet port s H H lt 10copper 100coppe connection speed r auto enet name lt portlist gt lt name gt Sets the Ethernet port s name H H enet enable lt portlist gt Turns on the specified Ethernet H H port s enet disable lt portlist gt Turns off the specified Ethernet H H port s enet reset lt portlist gt Reset the ENET interface H H enet length show Manually set the ENET cable M length this is used for very rare cases when connect to some ENET PHY in most cases should set to auto system default net length set lt portlist gt Display the ENET cable length H auto lt length gt setting lt length gt 0 15 in units of 10m smcast show Display all MAC addresses joined M L to ADSL ports smcast set adsl port mac _ Use join leave to add remove H H lt join leave gt multicast MAC addresses on s
57. reboot If a reboot has been scheduled use this command to prevent a reboot snmp show Displays SNMP settings M L snmp getcommunity lt community gt Sets the SNMP GetRequest H H community snmp setcommunity lt community gt Sets the SNMP SetRequest H H community snmp trapcommunity lt community gt Sets the SNMP Trap community H H snmp trusthost lt ip gt Sets the SNMP trusted host Set H H 0 0 0 0 to trust all hosts 252 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P snmp trapdst set index ip Sets the SNMP trap server and H H lt port gt listening port Set 0 0 0 0 to not send any SNMP traps snmp trapdst del lt index gt Deletes the SNMP trap server H H server show Displays the device s service M L status and port numbers server enable telnet ftp web ic Turns on a service H H mp gt server disable telnet ftp web ic Turns off a service H H mp gt server port telnet ftp web ic Sets a port for a service H H mp gt lt port gt client show Displays the device s secured M L client settings client enable lt index gt Turns on a secure client H H client disable lt index gt Turns off a secure client H H client set index start ip Sets a secured client set a range H H end ip telnet ofIP addresses from whic
58. tlspvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Create modify a TLS PVC M H lt vci gt DS lt profile gt veprofile US vid s tag VLAN id vcprofile lt pvid gt Sorionti es prionty forsta prioritys priority gt priority tag tlspvc show portlist detail Display TLS PVC setting by port L L queuemap show Displays the xDSL priority level to M L physical queue mapping queuemap set priority queue Setthe xDSL priority level to H H physical queue mapping linediag setld lt port number Sets the specified port to line H H diagnostic mode linediag getld port number Displays the specified port line L L diagnostics linediag getld992 3 port number Displays the specified port line L L diagnostics linediag setselt port number Sets the specified port to line H H SELT linediag getselt port number Displays the specified port line L L SELT Chapter 41 Commands 257 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P linediag toneDiag lt port number gt Displays the specified port line L L diagnostics alarmprofile show profile Displays alarm profiles and their L L settings alarmprofile set lt profile gt lt atuc Configures an alarm profile H H lofs atur lofs gt lt atuc loss atur loss atuc olls gt atuc lprs atur lprs atuc ess atur ess atuc
59. 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 ol 00 oo 00 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 0l oo 00 oo 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 number of bits oo 00 00 00 00 08 09 09 09 09 Line Rate per symbol tone 00 00 oo 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 ol 00100 00100 00100 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03103 03102 02102 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 01 01 oo 00 0l 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 oo 00 0l 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 oo oo 00 oo 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 oo per symbol tone 00 02103 05 05 06 09 09 09 09 08 08 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 xDSL Line Data Line Performance Refresh LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Rate Click Line Rate to display an ADSL port s line operating values see Section 15 1 on page 133 Line Pe
60. 1 255 ms Max SNR 31 0 31 dB 31 0 31 aB Min SNR o 0 31 aB fo 31 dB Target SNR 6 0 31 aB 6 0 31 dB Up Shift SNR 2 0 31 aB 2 0 31 aB Down Shift SNR s 0 31 dB 5 0 31 dB The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Port Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION VC Profile Click VC Profile to open the VC Profile screen where you can configure virtual channel profiles see Section 14 5 on page 125 Alarm Profile Click Alarm Profile to open the Alarm Profile screen where you can configure limits that trigger an alarm when exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 127 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 119 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 25 Port Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Filter Profile Click IGMP Filter Profile to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 129 Index This is the port profile index number Name These are the names of individual profiles The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Latency Mode This is the ADSL latency mode Fast or Interleave for the ports that belong to this profile Down Up Stream Rate kbps These are the maximum downstream and upstream transfer rates for the ports that belong to this profil
61. 18 9 10511112 ENEDMENET2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 IGMP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Setup Click Bandwidth Setup to open the IGMP Bandwidth screen where you can set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels see Section 17 4 on page 152 You can also open the Bandwidth Port Setup screen to set up multicast bandwidth requirements for selected ports see Section 17 4 1 on page 153 IGMP Setup Click IGMP Setup to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can configure IGMP settings see Section 17 5 on page 154 Filter Setup Click Filter Setup to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 17 6 on page 155 Count Setup Click Count Setup to open the IGMP Count screen where you can limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join see Section 17 7 on page 155 IGMP Port Info Click IGMP Port Info to open the IGMP Port Info screen where you can look at the current number of IGMP related packets received on each port see Section 17 8 on page 156 IGMP Port Group Click IGMP Port Group to open the IGMP Port Group screen where you can look at the current list of multicast groups each port has joined see Section 17 9 on page 157 Clear Click Clear to delete the information the AAM1212 has learned about multicast groups This resets every counter in this screen Query
62. 304 to 307 for ADSL2 port 5 Figure 233 DSL Port Downstream Carrier1 Command Example 2 ras adsl dscarrierl 5 0 0000f000 000000 The following example displays the results Figure 234 DSL Port Downstream Carrier1 Command Display Example ras gt adsl dscarrierl 5 ds carrier port mo m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 sues jessicxes Sass jesse esee es ssec esses 5 00000000 000F0000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tone m0 256 287 m1 288 319 m2 320 351 m3 352 383 m4 384 415 m5 416 447 m6 448 479 m7 480 511 PMM Parameters Command Syntax ras adsl pmm param portlist lO0time lt l2time gt lt l2atpr gt lt l2atprt gt max l2rate min l2rate 10tol2 rate 356 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt lt l0time gt lt 12time gt lt l2atpr gt lt l2atprt gt max l2rate min l2rate 10tol2 rate You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt Set the minimum time in seconds 10 65535 that the DSL line must stay in LO power mode before changing to the L2 power mode Set minimum time in seconds 10 65535 that the DSL line must stay in the L2 power mode before reducing the power again in the L2 power mode Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduct
63. 438 Alum History Show Command 552552 a sep ert rh Lt nn HIM Pot EES RR RRRCASE AER MEL YA 283 23 9 Alarm History Clear Command 4 sicco rrr pde E ERIS ERE P EpETE EUER PER nn 284 ASAU Alarm XE COMME cmn 284 253 11 Alam Cutoff Command sdraiu retraxit rh rA Ee ve bun Fere Eb Fe Et MR a Ra EAE RR pna 285 43 12 Alamim Clear Command T oom T 285 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands i ciem criticises aeaea 287 4401 DACP Relay Commands usi ressort ba xr reps OR Rea Ord AA 287 24 11 4 So POTIS iscuecolsc siete Pesca tel edeo m prid be Dn RP EER Vea v VO RM t EP 287 24 1 2 Enable Command cocco ro or imet ra teh rats a eh var adora ex a sa eve TD 287 d4 To Disable Command er m 288 44 14 Saver Set COMMING sonsaina E 288 44 1 5 Server Delete Command sniscsernicaiiiiiiarniin iiin ud ad aiaiai 288 44 1 6 Server Active Command 1 ient deeem en rna th ihn da xen Saa Rina 289 44 1 7 RelayMmode COMMA uiascccci sasecocor cose tuc tta ruo t ura redde zc ce eta acce tops rccrE d 289 44 2 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 1 Circuit ID 289 44 2 1 Option 82 Sub option 1 Enable Command sssssssss 290 44 2 2 Option 82 Sub option 1 Disable Command sss 290 44 2 3 Option 82 Sub option 1 Set Command sss 290 44 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 2 Remote ID 290 44 3 1 Option 82 Sub option 2 Enable Command ssssssss 290
64. 44 3 2 Option 82 Sub option 2 Disable Command sssssssss 291 44 3 3 Option 82 Sub option 2 Set Command sess 291 444 DHCP Snoop Commanda iei aede ved reise do tap Er de tero o EO s 291 44 4 1 DHCP Snoop Enable Command 1 rera tin tot eh rnee i 291 24 4 2 DHCP Snoop Disable Comman sicicisicsscesavsscusecscinances Secr bi tn E cte pE vere 292 24 4 3 DHCP Snoop Flush GMINA 1 ect ra reta k erp ted i uak dinana 292 44 4 4 DHCP Snoop Show Command 2 ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeeeess 293 44 4 5 DHCP Counter Statistics Command ssssssssss 293 44 4 6 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command sss 294 Table of Contents 17 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennee 295 45 1 lntroduetion t6 VLANS Lise esa adde epa debi ead Fac de Rheni e pata n Sienna 295 45 2 IEEE 802 10 laging TYPOS sesser tesc ccu be riae nep epht totae acne ae Eeee 295 25 2 Elke BIASES oridi asinn RECTE REP XN I can P EN EAER EA ESAE 295 25 2 1 Static Entries SYLAN Tablo 22 irren qi rnpI a EEPEDUN CHIPRE PEDE EE RHE DUREE RARUS 295 45 4 IEEE VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands sss 296 45 4 1 VLAN Port Show Command 1 esee ied eap a a paa Rn waa a DAR Du raa dS 296 2542 VLAN PYID COMMEN iiic usui ass tru tat UE PERO EQUI o SEI MEA De Eb obEUEE PR
65. 51 53 Series User s Guide 44 4 4 DHCP Snoop Show Command Syntax ras switch dhcpsnoop show lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet enet2 gt Use this command to display the current DHCP snooping settings of the specified port s The following example displays the settings of ports 1 5 Figure 149 DHCP Snoop Show Command Example ras gt switch dhcpsnoop show 1 5 port enable 44 4 5 DHCP Counter Statistics Command Syntax ras statistics dhcp counter lt portlist gt clear where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt Use this command to display a summary of DHCP packets on the specified port s The following example displays the settings of port 1 Figure 150 DHCP Counter Statistics Command Example ras gt statistics dhcp counter 1 port discover offer request ack overflow Chapter 44 DHCP Commands 293 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Each field is described in the following table port discover offer 7 request ack overflow The selected DSL port number s The number of DHCP Discover packets on this port The number of DHCP Offer packets on this port
66. 53 Series User s Guide Note Traffic shaping must also be enabled on the subscriber s device in order to use upstream policing Note that since the AAMI212 uses ATM QoS if the subscriber device s upstream shaping rate is larger than the AAM1212 s upstream policing rate some ATM cells will be discarded In the worst case none of the Ethernet packets from the CPE will be able to be reassembled from AALS so no packets from the subscriber s device can be received by the AAMI212 The upstream policing feature can be enabled disabled per PVC No matter which ATM traffic class is used for the PVC s upstream traffic CBR VBR or UBR the AAMI212 will drop any upstream traffic that violates the specified ATM VC profile 14 5 VC Profile Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup VC Profile Figure 60 VC Profile VC Profile J Port Profile Alarm Profile IGMP Filter Profile Index Name Encap AAL Class PCR CDVT SCR Select 1 DEFVAL lic aal5 ubr 300000 0 e 2 DEFVAL VC vc aal5 ubr 300000 0 C m vc B ur s q50300000xelisec 8 15527 kbyte sec 0255 q50300000xel sec 8 15527 kbyte sec 0259 Ada Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 VC Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Profile Click Port Profile to configure port profiles and assign them to individual ports see Section 14 1 on page 119 Alarm Prof
67. 900 the AAMI212 drops the packets because they do not match 31 2 ACL Setup Screen Use this screen to assign ACL profiles to each PVC To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL 212 Chapter 31 ACL AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 110 ACL Setup ACL Profile Setup ACL Profile Map E ACL Profile Apply Cancel Show Port fail Index Port VPI VCI ACL Profile Select Delete Select AU None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 ACL Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION ACL Profile Setup Click ACL Profile Setup to open the screen where you can set up ACL profiles see Section 31 3 on page 214 ACL Profile Map Click ACL Profile Map to open the screen where you can look at which ACL profiles are assigned to which PVCs see Section 31 4 on page 216 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port to which you wish to assign an ACL profile This field is read only once you click on a port number below VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port ACL Profile B s drop down list box to select the ACL profile you want to assign to this Apply Click this to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non
68. ARP Show Command 53 7 14 Syntax ras adsl rpvc arp show This command displays how long the device stores the IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways in the Address Resolution Protocol table The following is an example Figure 284 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc arp show gateway ip vid mac 192 168 10 102 1 00 0d 9d d9 43 3b RPVC ARP Flush Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc arp flush This command clears the IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways from the Address Resolution Protocol table 53 8 PPPoA to PPPoE PAE Commands You can use these commands to create PVCs for PAE translation 53 8 1 PAE PVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc delete lt portlist gt vpi vci where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC vci The VCI of the PAE PVC This command removes a PAE PVC Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 399 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 8 2 PAE PVC Set Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc set portlist lt vpi gt vci DS vcprofile US vcprofile gt Xpvid priority acname acname srvcname srvcname hellotim lt hellotime gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You c
69. All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 5 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 49 Select Ports 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E 0 rg T ooo select an None Apply Cancel Active Select this check box to copy this port s active setting This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Customer Info Select this check box to copy this port s subscriber information This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Customer Tel Select this check box to copy this port s subscriber s telephone number This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 2 Features Select this check box to copy this port s ADSL2 feature settings These are configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Profile amp Mode Select this check box to copy this port s port profile settings and ADSL operational mode The port profile settings are configured in the xDSL Port Profile Setup screens see Chapter 14 on page 119 The ADSL operational mode is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 IGMP Filter Select this check box to copy this port s IGMP filter settings These are configured in the IGMP Filter Profile screen see Section 14 8 on page 129 Security Select this check box to copy this port s security settings This is configured in the Po
70. CPE is connected to DSL port 1 on the AAMI212 and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 The routed domain is the LAN IP addresses behind the CPE device The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and the LAN computer s IP address is 10 10 10 1 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode 191 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 98 2684 Routed Mode Example X mS IP 192 168 10 102 m VLAN 1 IP 192 168 20 101 PVC 8 35 WAN IP 192 168 10 200 LAN IP 10 10 10 10 m m s IP 10 10 10 1 Note the following The CPE device s WAN IP 192 168 10 200 in this example must be in the same subnet as the gateway s IP address 192 168 10 102 in this example The AAM1212 s management IP address can be any IP address it doesn t have any relationship to the WAN IP address or routed gateway IP address The AAMI212 s management IP address should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the WAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device It is suggested that you set the netmask of the subscriber s WAN IP address to 32 to avoid this problem The AAMI212 s management IP address should not be in the same subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain It will make the AAMI212 confused if the AAMI212 receives a packet with this IP as destina
71. Command Example ras adsl profile show DEFVAL 01 DEFVAL latency mode interleave up stream down stream max rate kbps 51 2 2048 min rate kbps 32 32 latency delay ms 4 4 max margin db 31 31 min margin db 0 0 target margin db 6 6 up shift margin db 9 9 down shift margin db 3 3 52 1 5 DSL Port Profile Set Command Syntax ras adsl profile set profile fast interleave up delay gt lt down delay gt gt up max rate down max rate lt up target margin up min margin up max margin up min rate down target margin down min margin down max margin down min rate up down shift margin up up shift margin down down shift margin down up shift margin gt where profile fast interleav e up delay gt lt down delay gt gt lt up max rate gt lt down max rate gt lt up target margin gt lt up min margin gt lt up max margin gt lt up min rate gt lt down target margin gt The descriptive name for the profile The latency mode With interleave you must also define the upstream and downstream delay 1 255 ms It is recommended that you configure the same delay for both upstream and downstream The maximum DSL upstream transmission rate 64 4096 Kbps The maximum DSL downstream transmission rate 64 32000 Kbps The target DSL upstream signal noise margin 0 31db The minimum acceptable DS
72. Command Example ras switch igmpfilter show 5 port profile 47 3 2 IGMP Filter Set Command Syntax ras switch igmpfilter set lt port gt lt name gt where lt port gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt or all DSL ports lt gt lt name gt The name of an IGMP filter profile This command sets a DSL port s to use an IGMP filter profile The following example sets DSL port 5 to use the voice IGMP filter profile Figure 177 IGMP Filter Set Command Example ras gt switch igmpfilter set 5 voice 47 3 3 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpfilter profile set lt name gt lt index gt lt startip gt lt endip gt where lt name gt Specify a name to identify the IGMP filter profile you cannot change the name of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed lt index gt The number 1 16 to identify a multicast IP address range lt startip gt Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 311 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide lt endip gt Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start IP and End IP fields This command configures
73. DEANA SESER AGEE AAE i 165 Table 45 Paglst FINO scarna PP DIRE INN LE Pr pP UI MERE MEME 167 Table 47 MAG FIOT aucun iei o Red nod et eva bn Rv ii br 169 od pho PP NEM NE 171 THONG AS RSITP Porn SIAS d 172 Table 50 Spanning Tree Protocol Status 1 rrr ttr tn a rrr a appear E Ed 174 Table 51 Spanning Tree Protocol 2seepper idee Ep isse pepe ERA ERR eT R rbr Is Ig e EE PUEP COS S PHbUIS 175 TOGO RADIUS apache iei Faux don DU Eaux adeunt Ex hein e DV AER EE Ded o UE 178 TOES O D TE MIC Ix 179 ARN duc SUIS a ee mee 181 Toole 35 DHOF ISI sonreir da eH Y RUE UES SUR Gd SM ORA SH at 185 Table 35 DACP SADON aaisan EA EU UO pir AR pRa EUR CEU Pad tun E AA OESR AE 187 Table 5X DHCP Snoop SIUS iincuoxei xe vt bip EHE n ina exi RI a ER EE VER HII 188 Tables DHCFR Cae 1 isis ton ef o bo dro eot toe oo RR Ra tdeo 189 Tahle 59 2604 Roud PYG daussdeuppv aae oaaae ERP NM RUE RV EE NA 193 E 60 2064 Routed Br c 195 D ou RPE AD FIO qM HE 196 Table 62 2684 Routed GalowWay caiussetexuepdieisee iv ierbesv tid be ori eA E Hd ERR I PM brpaqEs 197 Table 03 PPPOA to PPPOE 422 nu ato veni iaa bare da rer En rta eR dude 200 Table 64 PPPOA ta PPPOE Status 1 oosaiesceceier rare etra euh Lebe YR Eee ERR DER eR pk 202 TWANG 6S DOOP OED c 205 Table BG DSC PMD uasxiuxxiiqiuxidd pU Y MATE E REIHEN AHEDA FEUERE S AA RE ERR S inane 206 HE AE IT 209 TADIG GS BOL Ue 213 Table 69 ACL Profile Setup sisaan n
74. DHCP snooping on each port see Section 26 2 on page 187 DHCP Counter Click DHCP Counter to open the screen where you can look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port see Section 26 4 on page 189 Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field displays the selected DSL port number s Overflow The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit IP This field displays the IP address assigned to a client on this port MAC This field displays the MAC address of a client on this port to which the DHCP server assigned an IP address Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the DHCP snooping table for the selected port s 188 Chapter 26 DHCP Snoop AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 26 4 DHCP Counter Screen Use this screen to look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop DHCP Counter Figure 97 DHCP Counter DHCP Counter J DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status Show Port ll Port Discover Offer Request Ack 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 DHCP Counter LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Snoop Click DHCP Snoop to open the screen where you can activate or deactivate DHCP snooping on each port see Section 26 2 on p
75. Errored Seconds SES 136 shared secret 89 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP Single End Loop Test See SELT SNMP 221 commands 222 Get 222 GetNext 222 manager 222 MIBs 223 supported versions 221 Trap 223 traps 223 SNMP screen 225 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP specifications 425 static multicast filter 159 static route 229 metric 230 Static VLAN See SVLAN statistics DSL port 73 Ethernet port 71 statistics adsl commands 361 statistics dhcp commands 293 statistics igmpsnoop commands 318 statistics ip commands 332 statistics monitor command 275 statistics port command 276 STP 171 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDU 172 designated bridge 171 hello time 172 max age 172 path cost 171 port path cost 176 port priority 176 port states 172 root bridge 171 root port 171 super channel 109 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 123 SVLAN 295 Switch acl commands 410 Switch acl profile commands 407 Switch dhcprelay commands 287 Switch dhcpsnoop commands 291 switch igmpfilter commands 310 switch igmpsnoop bandwidth commands 313 Switch igmpsnoop commands 309 Switch igmpsnoop igmpcount commands 316 switch igmpsnoop mvlan commands 320 Switch isolation commands 275 Switch mac count commands 306 Switch mac filter commands 303 Switch pktfilter commands 325 Switch Setup 93 switch vlan commands 296 syntax conventions 37 Sys commands 271 SYS LED troubleshooting 413 Sys snmp commands 341 S
76. LAN IP address Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 27 4 RPVC Arp Proxy Screen Use this screen to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode 195 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode RPVC ARP Proxy Figure 101 RPVC Arp Proxy RPVC Arp Proxy Aging Time Index Routed Domain Routed Gateway Routed PVC 600 10 10000 seconds O Disabled Apply Setting Gateway IP rush The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 RPVC Arp Proxy LABEL DESCRIPTION Routed Domain Click Routed Domain to open this screen where you can configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic see Section 27 3 on page 194 Routed Gateway Click Routed Gateway to go to the screen where you can configure gateway settings see Section 27 5 on page 196 Routed PVC Click Routed PVC to go to the screen
77. Limited Number of Learned MAC Address 1 O ZE 28 4 28 5 a4 28 4 128 4 128 PF Apply Cancel Copyport 1 x Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number Enable Select this check box to restrict the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Clear this check box to not limit the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Limited Number of Specify how many MAC addresses the AAM1212 can learn on this port The Learned MAC range is 1 128 Address Note If you also use MAC filtering on a port it is recommended that you set this limit to be equal to or greater than the number of MAC filter entries you configure Chapter 24 Port Security 181 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 54 Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Copy port Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports Paste 1 Select the number of the port from which you want to copy settings 2 Click Pas
78. Line Rate Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Performance Click Line Performance to display an ADSL port s line performance counters see Section 15 2 on page 135 Line Data Click Line Data to display an ADSL port line bit allocation see Section 15 3 on page 137 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the port Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data 133 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 29 xDSL Line Rate Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate The rate fields display the transmission rates Line Down indicates that the ADSL port is not connected to a subscriber Down up Stream Rate These are the rates in Kbps at which the port has been sending and receiving data Down up Stream Noise Margin These are the DSL line s downstream and upstream noise margins Measured in decibels dB Down up Stream Attenuation These are the reductions in amplitude of the downstream and upstream DSL signals Measured in decibels dB Down up Stream Attainable Rate These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates in Kbps at which the port could send and receive data Info Service Mode This field displays the ADSL standard that the port is using G dmt AAM1212 51 Gdmt Annex B AAM 12
79. Name This is the user name of the user profile Delete Select a user profile s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the user profile Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh and clear any selected Delete check boxes 23 3 802 1x Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Authentication 802 1x Figure 89 802 1x a Loe Enable Vv Authentication RADIUS Local Profile Apply Cancel Port Enable Control Reauthentication Reauthentication Period S 1 O 3600 60 65535 s600 0 565535 3600 0 865535 3600 80 85535 3600 0 85535 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION RADIUS Local Click this link to configure the RADIUS server or local profile settings see Profile Section 23 2 on page 177 Enable Select this check box to turn on IEEE 802 1x authentication on the switch Chapter 23 Port Authentication 179 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 53 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays a po
80. PIO cecce boaa 196 Figure 102 2684 Routed tate way sossirsssriiiissniiiii ninni 197 Figure 103 Mixed PPPoA to PPPoE Broadband Network Example 199 Figure 104 PPPOA To PPPOE csr ae rener a URBS A eda pu EAM PUR GENERA PUR to AA UD EE MARE 200 Figure 105 PPPoA to PPPOE SOUS 4i ipie d ERES IU EFE DUM kidi inna 202 Figure TOG DSP OO arani ena pedit oda o bul s M Pp GN e pda ka 205 Figure TOT DOLI IER 22discubet ebria oU Ebo kite pila ik etae e opu aad eub bn pi os anda 206 Figure 108 Transparent LAN Service Network Example sssssssss 208 au macaulbll s 209 Fone T AGL Sep sapendo rero d odrbeboobo extr treu Ure UU EE eesti 213 Figure 111 ACL Profile Setup 22x curiae caves det tuti doct eii d aani endi cuta 214 Figure 112 EL EPOD Map uua vis adsran e Dri tudin pi padded 216 Figure 113 Downstream DEOSUEBBL catasteennprittr Rein EPIRI COP RII HEIN UE Ru uN 217 Powe T LNG 219 Figure T15 Access COIEUE iua iioii e p tei cain deeded E ua e EF Cuba ctia Eb mented GEM X NNE EL bad 221 Figure 116 SNMP Management Modal 1 rerit rait retenta 222 zc muri aee c E 225 Figure 118 Service Access Contool i berkiviankk ePi viaa EkEH reia kinni r Qr pr Eaa 226 Figure 119 Remote Management Secured Client Setup sessssssss 227 Figure 120 Statie ROUNO axueccsea teu sca ad Eua pA TE BE ca npn ba ORE qd ENE bb blu oda aM IU B
81. Priority 0 Queue 0 v signment ill The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Switch Se tup LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Learning Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 10 000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned Enter 0 to disable the aging out of MAC addresses GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values Click here for more information on VLANs Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds Leave Timer Leave Timer sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer 94 Chapter 10 Switch Setup AAM1212 51 53 Seri
82. SYS LED does not turn on Table 99 SYS LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure the AAM1212 is securely connected to the IES 1000 2 Make sure the IES 1000 is properly connected to the power supply and the power supply is operating normally Make sure you are using the correct power source See the IES 1000 User s Guide 3 The LED itself or the unit may be faulty contact your vendor 55 2 The ALM LED Is On The ALM alarm LED lights when the AAM1212 is overheated or the voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels Table 100 ALM LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Use the statistics monitor command to verify the cause of the alarm See step 2 if the unit is overheated and step 3 if the voltages are out of the allowed ranges 2 Ensure that the AAM1212 is installed in a well ventilated area Keep the bottom top and all sides clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment 3 If the voltage levels are outside the allowed range take a screen shot of the statistics monitor command display and contact your vendor Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 413 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 55 3 LAN Port LEDs Do Not Turn On A LAN port s LEDs do not turn on Table 101 10 100 LED Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check the Speed Mode settings in the ENET Port Setup screen Make sure that the LAN port s connect
83. Series User s Guide Table 32 VLAN Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt polling statistics Previous Page Click one of these buttons to show the preceding following screen if the Next Page information cannot be displayed in one screen 16 4 Static VLAN Setting Screen You can assign a port to be a member of a VLAN group or prohibit a port from joining a VLAN group in this screen This is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN Static VLAN Setting Figure 67 Static VLAN Setting ED Static VLAN Setting VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting VID Active Name Delete 1 Yes DEFAULT O Delete Cancel Active O Name VLAN ID o 1 4094 Port Control Tagging Select All Select All Select None Normal Normal Fixed Fixed Fixed C Forbidden I Tx Tagging c c Fixed c c c Forbidden Tx Tagging Forbidden Tx Tagging Forbidden I Tx Tagging Forbidden Tx Tagging Forbidden I Tx Tagging Forbidden I Tx Tagging Add Cancel Fixed Fixed Fixed O 0 0 0 0 0 O0 144 Chapter 16 VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Static VLAN Setti
84. Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan disable lt vid gt Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 321 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt vid gt The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 This command deactivates the specified multicast VLAN The following example disables multicast VLAN 12 Figure 190 Multicast VLAN Disable Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan disable 12 47 8 4 Multicast VLAN Enable Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan enable lt vid gt where lt vid gt The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 This command activates the specified multicast VLAN 47 8 5 Multicast VLAN Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan show lt vlanlist gt where lt vlanlist gt You can specify a single VLAN lt 1 gt all VLAN lt gt a list of VLAN lt 1 3 gt you can also include a range of VLAN lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the current multicast VLAN settings In the state column indicates the multicast VLAN is not active while V indicates the multicast VLAN is active Figure 191 Multicast VLAN Show Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan show 1 vid name F fixed X forbidden U untag T tag 322 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 47 8 6 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan group set vid index start mcast ip end mcast ip where vid
85. TRI ITE UM 39 Brei cocira ai caen ateraia Aaa EE ENEN 39 LEX EISE Fre cler TT TOT 39 12 2 Curbside ADDICAUON sirinin dU EPA eines aE 40 Chapter 2 Installing and Removing the AAM1212 Lseueeeseeeuees 41 2 1 Installing the AAM1212 in the IES 1000 Luuuuis socer r d Lr ER nd 41 2 2 Removing the AAM1212 from the IES 1000 eese ritnisl 42 Chapter 3 Font FP ABB oet EI EEUU REID DRIED ESL RR ERD ADIRE E BE QE DR D ERE RD R ZR ERU ERE 43 CM emi RTI 43 CN MB Fanell i em TT 43 cMB EDS Te T rem 43 41 2 Colle PDEE ussauistc dite i t ata La tts Laus 44 lt lode Dolau Ethemet SONG B 1 etui IE E Cpl In EE FEERIR EU Fen v LEER eH HEU PRIUS 44 3 1 4 LAN Port Ethernet COPDFIGUBOfI 2 icci ice eorr tratta etat rena Eabb o rta eaae ro rece 44 3 1 5 Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames eseese 45 34 5 Pilco C able acoso e IE MD RE RD RIPE MEN MEI MEINE 46 X17 Teleo S0 C SiC sie cases ees bo c E br Le T ad d n o et as ta Rud 47 Table of Contents 9 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Oe ae ADSL M THU ETE stl iaccedeeraaspeanditasauaeareleleauns 47 3 1 9 Typical REI 0c et 48 91 597 Installation Scenario A isse icon dia etra ive rk bad n bdo nbus diet c obl aded E and d aducon 48 3 1 9 2 Installation Scsliarid B ao E ia be d d EL Ewa Ea ra i bd dd 49 31 9 2 instalalion INI tise tcisndeusbdeteitsbeletentu tae E 52 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator
86. This is the total number of Query packets received Report This is the total number of Report packets received Leave This is the total number of Leave packets received Number of IGMP Groups This is how many IGMP groups the AAM1212 has identified on the local network Previous Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all of the Next information cannot be seen in one screen Reload Click this button to refresh the screen Chapter 17 IGMP 151 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 35 IGMP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups Index This is the IGMP group index number VID The VID is the VLAN ID on which the IGMP group is created IP Address This is the IP address of an IP multicast group member 1 12 enet1 enet2 These columns indicate whether or not each port is a member of the IGMP snooping group 17 4 IGMP Bandwidth Screen Use this screen to set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Bandwidth Setup Figure 72 IGMP Bandwidth Port Setup Default Bandwidth 512 1 100 000 Kbps Index p Start Multicast IP fo 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255
87. Upload the Configuration File config 0 ftp put xxx dat config 0 Quit FTP Figure 211 Example Close FTP Client ftp quit Wait for the update to finish The system restarts automatically 50 4 Firmware File Upgrade Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the AAM1212 Use an FTP client to connect to the AAMI212 Figure 212 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the AAM1212 C gt ftp lt AAM1212 IP address gt Type your user name and press ENTER User 172 23 15 86 none admin Enter the management password 1234 by default Figure 213 Example Enter the Management Password Password 1234 230 Logged in Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 339 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Transfer the firmware file to the AAM1212 The firmware file on your computer that you want to put onto the AAMI212 is named irmware bin The internal firmware file on the AAMI212 is named ras Figure 214 Example Transfer the Firmware File ftp put firmware bin ras Quit FTP Figure 215 Example Close FTP Client ftp quit Wait for the update to finish The AAMI212 restarts automatically 340 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 51 SNMP This chapter covers Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP with the AAMI212 51 1 SNMP
88. User Account Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting User Account Figure 41 User Account OWES aD Authentication Enable Name Password Retype Password to confirm Privilege high Add Cancel Index Enable Name Privilege V admin high The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Click this to open the Authentication screen See Section 9 2 on page 88 Enable Select this check box to turn on the administrator account Name Enter a user name for the administrator account Password Enter a password for the administrator account Retype Password to Re enter the administrator account s password to verify that you have entered it Confirm correctly Chapter 9 User Account 87 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 13 User Account continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Privilege Select a privilege level to determine which screens the administrator can use There is a high medium or low privilege level for each command Select high to allow the administrator to use all commands including the lower privilege commands High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Select middle to allow the administrator to use middle or low privilege commands Select low to allow the administrator to use only low privilege
89. VPI 1 VCI 34 default VID 100 priority 3 It sets the platinum profile for downstream traffic shaping and a VC profile named plus for upstream traffic policing Figure 264 PVC Set Command Example ras adsl pvc set 1 1 34 100 3 platinum plus 53 3 3 PVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl pvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC This command deletes the specified PVC channel 53 4 Priority based PVCs A PPVC Priority based PVC allows you to give different priorities to PVCs that are members of the same VLAN The AAM1212 uses eight priority queues also called levels for the member PVCs The system maps frames with certain IEEE 802 1p priorities to a PVC with a particular priority queue See Chapter 13 on page 101 for the factory default mapping Use these commands to configure PPVCs and add and remove member PVCs Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 385 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 4 1 PPVC Set Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci lt encap gt lt pvid gt priority where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports l
90. and 2 and DSL ports VID and default gateway With the Ethernet 1 and 2 and DSL ports you must connect to the AAMI212 through a port that is a member of the management CPU VLAN in order to perform in band management Figure 196 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Commands ras gt ip set lt new ip address gt lt netmask gt ras gt ip gateway lt ip gt ras gt config save where lt new ip The IP address you want to configure for the AAM1212 address gt lt netmask gt The bit number of the subnet mask of the IP address you want to configure for AAM1212 s uplink downlink and AAM1212 DSL ports To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 lt ip gt The default gateway IP address you want to configure for the AAM1212 The first command changes the IP settings for the AAM1212 s uplink downlink and AAMI212 DSL ports If you don t enter the subnet mask the system automatically computes the subnet mask Chapter 49 IP Commands 329 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The second command changes the default gateway next hop This tells the AAM1212 where to send packets that have a destination IP address that is not on the same subnet as the AAMI212 s IP address The third command
91. at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out The valid range is from 1 to 128 This command sets the limit for how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned on the specified DSL port s The following example sets the MAC count filter to allow up to 50 MAC addresses to be dynamically learned on DSL port 7 Figure 172 MAC Count Set Command Example ras gt switch mac count set 7 50 308 Chapter 46 MAC Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 47 IGMP Commands This chapter describes the IGMP snooping and filtering commands 47 1 Multicast Overview See Chapter 17 on page 149 for background information on this feature 47 2 IGMP Snoop Commands Use the IGMP snoop commands to enable or disable IGMP proxy or IGMP snooping 47 2 1 IGMP Snoop Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop show This command displays the IGMP mode proxy snooping or disabled The following is an example Figure 173 IGMP Snoop Show Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop show IGMP Snooping Proxy is Disable 47 2 2 IGMP Snoop Enable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop enable lt proxy snooping gt This command turns on IGMP proxy or snooping Use proxy to have the device use IGMP proxy Use IGMP snooping to have the device passively learn multicast groups Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 309 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s G
92. copies of the files for later use The following table is a summary Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the AAMI212 and the external filename refers to the filename not on the AAM1212 that is on your computer local network or FTP site and so the name but not the extension may vary After uploading new firmware use the sys version command on the AAM1212 to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version Table 93 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config 0 dat This is the configuration filename for the AAM1212 Firmware ras bin This is the Operating System firmware on the AAM1212 50 3 Editable Configuration File The configuration file can be downloaded as a plain text ASCII file Edits to the configuration can be made to this file before it is uploaded again to the AAM1212 Note You can change the dat file to a txt file and still upload it back to the AAM1212 Note Do not upload any invalid files to the AAM1212 s configuration file as it may permanently damage your AAM1212 50 3 1 Editable Configuration File Backup Configure your system and then use FTP to backup the plain text configuration file onto your computer Do the following to backup the configuration file Use an FTP client to connect to the AAMI212 Figure 203 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the AAM1212 C
93. dFEEHEU UNS 78 Figure 38 Port Statistics RMON History Detail eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 79 List of Figures 25 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide a crcROLRCDU c 81 Figure 40 General NU ETT 85 Figure 41 User ACCOUNT acudir piri dock ende i EA A 87 d 42 Fe GIR eec E 88 Figure 43 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example 92 Figure 44 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example 93 b Ec eor MUT 94 Figare ae Le SB ee vere re a ken oed nri EI ed RM ECHO enter rere vray cere rercerrer EERNNSRNEREUE 97 Ftgurg 47 ENET Pon Sop aoscesexteactimdieestes dose erp bd des bu te s an n ddl odd 99 Figure 48 XDSL Port SetuP iin oen pad Senne etude opus pu deba to dd 103 Figure 49 Select POMS e 104 Figur S0 XDSL FOIE SSG detexit pid ER P RAE PPS DH PEE S ub PER evo HY 106 51228 172 00 gm LE 111 Figure 52 Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Delete 113 Foure Do Selt PEIUS sts Nell ennt ebbe obsedit bx Tu E rado REN RdUL E a Ead 113 Figure S4 Sele F ONG san canine Reid 114 Foue omguuecc o 115 Figure Ser eG SoC GID eT a narieeunnlliceuaenuessian 117 Figure S7 Port PEOfllgucicciciescickuriiduree eria doc eee Hd addc oi Odor peut dd dai dd dd addidi 119 Figure 58 PCR SCR and MBS in Traffic Shaping rrrrti rr tne tente 123 Figure 59 TAT CDVT and BT in Traffic Sh
94. fast rateup atur fast rateup atuc interleave rateup atur interleave rateup atuc fast ratedown atur fast ratedown atuc interleave ratedown atur interleave ratedown init fail enable atuc fail fast atuc Ses atur ses atuc uas atur uas alarmprofile delete profile Removes an alarm profile H H alarmprofile map lt portlist gt Maps specified ADSL ports to an H H lt profile gt alarm profile alarmprofile port number Displays alarm profile to ADSL L L showmap port mapping alarmprofile lt port number gt Displays which alarm profile L showport parameters are mapped to an ADSL port usnompsd port number lt max Display or set Maximum nominal H H nominal psd gt transmit PSD in the US direction dsnompsd port number lt max Display or set Maximum nominal H H nominal psd gt transmit PSD in the DS direction uscarrier port number lt m0 gt Display or set US carrier mask H H m1 from tone 0 to 63 dscarrier0 port number lt m1 gt Display or set DS carrier mask H H m2 m3 m4 m5 from tone 32 to 255 m6 lt m7 gt dscarrierl port number lt m0 gt Display or set DS carrier mask H H m1 m2 m3 m4 from tone 256 to 511 m5 m6 lt m7 gt annexl enable lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Turns on the H H Annex L feature on the specified port s 258 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide T
95. for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 213 VLANSs Note that user priority and VLAN 1 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to automatically configure switches in a VLAN network Chapter 16 VLAN 141 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits The AAM1212 handles up to 4094 VLANs VIDs 1 4094 The device accepts incoming frames with VIDs 1 4094 16 2 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the AAMI212 first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the AAMI212 first dec
96. gt ftp lt AAM1212 IP address gt Type your user name and press ENTER User 172 23 15 86 none admin 336 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Enter the management password 1234 by default Figure 204 Example Enter the Management Password Password 1234 230 Logged in Use get to transfer the configuration file to the computer The configuration file on the system that you want to backup to the computer is named config 0 Figure 205 Example Get the Configuration File config 0 ftp get config 0 Quit FTP Figure 206 Example Close FTP Client ftp quit 50 3 2 Edit Configuration File Open the config 0 file via Notepad see the following example and edit to a desired configuration Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 337 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Note Ensure that any changes you make to the commands in the configuration file correspond to the commands documented in this User s Guide The wrong configuration file or an incorrectly configured configuration file can render the device inoperable Figure 207 Configuration File Example sysinfo sys info hostname Sys info location Sys info contact snmp Sys snmp getcommunity public Sys snmp setcommunity public Sys snmp trapcommunity public Sys snmp trustedhost 0 0 0 0 Sys snmp
97. ip gt The subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation lt netmask gt The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 This command adds a domain for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain includes the subscriber s LAN IP addresses Note You must use the rpvc gateway set and the rpvc set commands before you use the rpve route set command The following example adds a domain for a CPE device is connected to DSL port on the AAM1212 and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and uses a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Figure 279 RPVC Route Set Command Example ras adsl rpvc route set 1 8 35 10 10 10 1 24 53 7 9 RPVC Route Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc route show lt portlist gt 396 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt The port s of the RPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of
98. is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT applies with the vbr traffic class Select Modify Select a VC profile s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the VC profile Delete Select a VC profile s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the VC profile The rest of the screen is for PVC configuration Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name for the profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Encap Select the encapsulation type LLC or VC for this port Class Select CBR constant bit rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR unspecified bit rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR real time variable bit rate or NRT VBR non real time variable bit rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications PCR The Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells PCR applies with all of the ATM traffic classes You can type a number of ATM cells per second in the first field or type a number of kilobytes per second in the second field to have the system automatically compute the number of ATM cells per second CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT applie
99. la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page 4 Certifications AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY on the m
100. leave time H H garptimer leaveall leaveall msec gt Set system s garp leaveall time H H rstp show Display the system s rstp settings M L rstp enable Turn system s rstp on H H rstp disable Turn system s rstp off H H rstp priority priority Set system rstp s priority H H rstp hellotime hellotime sec Set system rstp s hello time H H rstp maxage maxage sec Set system rstp s max age H H rstp fwdelay lt fwdelay sec Set system rstp s forward delay H H time rstp port show Display enet port rstp status M L rstp port enable lt portlist gt Set enet port to enable rstp H H rstp port disable lt portlist gt Set enet port to disable rstp H H rstp port priority lt portiist gt Set enet port s rstp priority H H priority 262 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P rstp port pathcost lt portlist gt Set enet port s rstp pathcost H H lt pathcost gt dhcprelay show Displays DHCP relay settings L L dhcprelay enable Turns on DHCP relay H H dhcprelay disable Turns off DHCP relay H H dhcprelay server lt vid gt lt primary Set DHCP server IP address M H set server gt where the DHCP request will lt secondary forward to server gt lt vid gt VLAN lt primary server gt IP address for primary server lt secondary server gt IP address f
101. line s tones that are known to have a high noise level Each mask can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits 00000000 ffffffff Each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone The most significant bit defines the lowest tone number in a mask US Carrier MaskO0 represents tones 0 31 Mask1 represents tones 32 63 The most significant bit defines Tone 0 In other words 0x00000001 means tone 31 For example you could use OXxfffffO00 to disable upstream carrier tones 0 19 and leave tones 20 31 enabled DS CarrierO 32 255 Mask1 represents tones 32 63 Mask2 represents tones 64 95 Mask3 represents tones 96 127 Mask4 represents tones 128 159 Mask5 represents tones 160 191 Mask6 represents tones 192 223 Mask7 represents tones 224 255 For example use 0x01000000 in Mask2 to disable downstream carrier tone 71 Use 0x03000000 in Mask2 to disable downstream carrier tones 70 and 71 108 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DS Carrier1 Mask0 represents tones 256 287 2567511 Mask1 represents tones 288 319 Mask2 represents tones 320 351 Mask3 represents tones 352 383 Mask4 represents tones 384 415 Mask5 represents tones 416 447 Mask6 represents tones 448 479 Mask7 represents tones 480 511 For example use 0x00001000 in Mask1 to di
102. name to identify the SVLAN entry This command adds or modifies an entry in the static VLAN table Use the switch vlan show command to display your configuration An example of a configuration is shown next 45 4 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example The following is an example of how to modify a static VLAN table Figure 155 Modifying the Static VLAN Example ras gt switch vlan set 2000 1 FU ras gt switch vlan set 2001 2 FU 45 4 4 2 Forwarding Process Example Tagged Frames 1 First the AAM1212 checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames see Section 45 4 2 on page 296 2 The AAMI212 checks the frame s source MAC address against the MAC filter 3 The AAM1212 then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table 4 The AAM1212 notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the AAMI212 whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have a tag 5 Frames might be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged frames Untagged Frames 298 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN 2 The AAMI212 checks the frame s source MAC address against the MAC filter 3 The AAMI212 checks the PVID table and assigns a VID and IEEE 802 1Q priority 4 The AAMI212 ignores the port from which the frame came bec
103. noise margin to be less than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin Down Stream The following parameters relate to downstream transmissions Max Rate Type a maximum downstream transfer rate 64 to 32000 Kbps bps for this port Configure the maximum downstream transfer rate to be greater than the maximum upstream transfer rate Min Rate Type the minimum downstream transfer rate 32 to 32000 Kbps for this port Configure the minimum downstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Interleave Delay Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave Type the number of milliseconds 1 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR Type the maximum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR Type the minimum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum downstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Target SNR Type the target downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target downstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin
104. not configured bandwidth settings the default multicast bandwidth setting applies see the switch igmpsnoop bandwidth default command 47 4 3 IGMP Bandwidth Delete Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth delete index where index 96 aunique number for this setting This command removes the specified multicast bandwidth configuration profile 47 5 IGMP Bandwidth Port Commands Use the IGMP bandwidth port commands to set up bandwidth budgets for multicast traffic on specific ports 47 5 1 IGMP Bandwidth Port Disable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port disable lt portlist gt 314 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command deactivates multicast bandwidth settings of the specified port 47 5 2 IGMP Bandwidth Port Enable Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port enable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command activates multicast bandwidth setting on the specified port 47 5 3 IGMP Bandwidth Port Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port set lt p
105. of Loss Of Signal Seconds that have occurred within the period lols The number of Loss Of Link Seconds that have occurred within the period 136 Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 30 xDSL Performance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Iprs The number of Loss of Power Seconds that have occurred within the period es The number of Errored Seconds that have occurred within the period init The number of successful initializations that have occurred within the period ses The number of Severely Errored Seconds that have occurred within the period uas The number of UnAvailable Seconds that have occurred within the period 15 3 xDSL Line Data Screen This screen displays an ADSL port s line bit allocation Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into tones This screen displays the number of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support ADSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist See the ITU T G992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 The bit allocation contents are only valid when
106. of the DEFVAL profile You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 127 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 27 Alarm Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Threshold Specify limits for the individual performance counters The AAM1212 sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when one of these thresholds is exceeded A value of 0 disables the alarm threshold ATU C These fields are for traffic coming from the subscriber s device to the AAM1212 ATU R These fields are for traffic going from the AAM1212 to the subscriber s device 15 Min LOF This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LOS This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LOL This field sets the limit for the number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min LPR This field sets the limit for the number of Loss of Power seconds on the ATUR that are per
107. off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Index This field displays the number of the routed PVC Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode 193 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 59 2684 Routed PVC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the routed PVC is configured VPI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VCI This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port IP This field displays the subscriber s IP address DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one NetMask This field displays the bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the
108. office switch or PBX Private Branch Exchange to the Telco 50 connector CO pins Make sure that the USER line and the CO lines are not shorted on the MDF Main Distribution Frame The line from the user carries both the ADSL and the voice signals For each line the AAM1212 has a built in splitter that separates the high frequency ADSL signal from the voice band signal and feeds the ADSL signal to the AAMI212 while the voice band signal is diverted to the CO port Chapter 3 Front Panel 47 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following figure gives an overview on a possible installation scenario for the AAMI212 Data and voice signals can coexist on the same telephone wiring Figure 11 Installation Overview MDF Splitter L DSL Modem Note You can also attach RJ 11 connectors to the Telco 50 cable and connect directly to a DSL modem s or patch panel This chapter discusses connections using MDFs 3 1 9 Typical MDF Scenarios This section describes typical installation scenarios 3 1 9 1 Installation Scenario A You want to install the AAM1212 in an environment where there are no previously installed MDFs There is no phone service and you want to install the AAM1212 for data access only No connections from the CO lines are necessary You may connect using an MDF or attach RJ 11 connectors to the non AAM1212 end of the Telco 50 cable and then connect to DSL modems directly 48 Cha
109. on features configurable by the web configurator The web configurator is the preferred configuration tool You can use text command lines for software configuration The rules of the commands are listed next 1 The command keywords are in courier new font 2 Commands can be abbreviated to the smallest unique string that differentiates the command For example the system date command could be abbreviated to sy q 3 The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets For instance config save means that the save field is optional 4 Command refers to a command used in the command line interface CI command 5 The symbol means or Note Using commands not documented in the User s Guide can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable 41 2 Command Privilege Levels There is a high middle or low privilege level for each command High privilege commands are only available to administrators with high privilege access High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Administrators with high privilege access can use all commands including the lower privilege commands Administrators with middle privilege access can use middle or low privilege commands Administrators with the low privilege level are restricted to using only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only Chapter 41 Comm
110. other device connected to the subscriber s end of the telephone line The SELT takes at least fifteen seconds To check the status of the SELT or to look at the results when the SELT is complete select a port number from the Port drop down list box and click Get SELT Data The results tell you what gauge of telephone wire is connected to the port and the approximate length of the line 244 Chapter 38 Diagnostic AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 85 Diagnostic continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PMM Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and a power management mode from the Mode drop down list box and click Set PMM Mode to have the specified port use the specified power management mode Select LO to turn off power management on the port Select L2 to scale back the power usage to just support the transmission rate that the subscriber is using Select L2 to have the ADSL connection use power saving mode and reduce the rate when there is no traffic The rate comes back up when there is traffic The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 ADSL operational mode Click Get PMM Mode to display which power mode the ADSL port is currently set to use ToneDiag Select a port number from the Port drop down list box The ADSL port must be set to ADSL2 or ADSL2 ADSL operational mode and have a connection Click Get ToneDiag data to display the ADSL port s tone diagnostics The tone diagnostic information d
111. ras adsl rpvc route set 1 8 35 10 10 10 1 24 53 7 2 RPVC Gateway Set Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc gateway set gateway ip vlan id lt priority gt where gateway ip The IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation vlan id The VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes to this gateway lt priority gt Set the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that you send to this gateway This command adds a gateway IP address to use for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example has the device use a VLAN ID of 1 and IEEE 802 1p priority of 3 when sending 2684 routed mode traffic to a gateway at IP address 192 168 10 102 Figure 273 RPVC Gateway Set Command Example ras adsl rpvc gateway set 192 168 10 102 1 3 53 7 3 RPVC Gateway Show Command Syntax ras gt adsl rpvc gateway show This command displays the gateway IP addresses that are configured for use with 2684 routed mode traffic 392 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following is an example Figure 274 RPVC Gateway Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc gateway show gateway ip vid 192 168 10 102 1 53 7 4 RPVC Gateway Delete Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc gateway delete gateway ip where
112. rate long term that can be transmitted cells per second SCR applies with the vbr traffic class lt bt gt Burst Tolerance this is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards number of cells BT applies with the vbr traffic class This command creates a virtual channel profile After you create a virtual channel profile you can assign it to any of the DSL ports on the AAM1212 The following example creates a virtual channel profile named gold that uses LLC encapsulation It uses constant bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 300 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 5 cells Figure 260 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 1 ras gt adsl vcprofile set gold llc cbr 300000 5 The following example creates a virtual channel profile named silver that uses VC encapsulation It uses real time variable bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 250 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 5 cells The average cell rate that can be transmitted SCR is set to 100 000 cells per second The maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT is set to 200 Figure 261 Set Virtual Channel Profile Comman
113. repaired by Forward Error Correction nfec The Near End blocks repaired by Forward Error Correction init The number of link ups and link downs es The Number of Errored Seconds This is how many seconds contained at least one errored block or at least one defect ses The Number of Severely Errored Seconds This is how many seconds contained 30 or more errored blocks This is a subset of n es uas The Number of Unavailable Seconds lpr The Number of Loss of Power Seconds on the ATUR that have occurred 52 2 5 15 Minute Performance Command Syntax ras statistics adsl 15mperf lt portlist gt count lt 0 96 gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt count lt 0 96 gt Specify for which 15 minute interval 0 96 you want to display performance statistics 0 is the current 15 minutes This command displays line performance statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 365 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide An example is shown next Figure 247 15 Minute Performance Command Example ras statistics adsl 15mperf 1 1 Port 1 Current 15 Min elapsed time 12 sec Link Down Current 15 Min PM ATUC ATUR lofs 0 loss 0 0 lols 0 lprs 0 es 0 0 init 0 ses 0 0 uas 0 0 History 15 Min PM 1 ATUC ATUR lofs
114. routing table entry H H route flush Clears the routing table H ping lt ip gt count Pings a remote host M L statistics monitor Displays hardware monitor status M L adsl show portlist Displays ADSL port connection M L status adsl linedata lt portlist gt Displays the line data load per M L symbol tone adsl lineinfo lt portlist gt Displays the info of the specified M L ADSL ports adsl lineperf lt portlist gt Displays the performance M L statistics of the specified ADSL port adsl linerate lt portlist gt Displays the line rate M L 268 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P adsl 15mperf lt portlist gt count Displays line performance M L lt 0 96 gt statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods adsl ldayperf lt portlist gt Displays line performance M L statistics for the current and previous 24 hours igmpsnoop info clear Display protocol packets counters L L amp number of learned groups igmpsnoop group lt vid gt Display IGMP learned group L L lt mcast_ip gt member information igmpsnoop port info lt portlist gt Display received protocol packets L L clear counters number of joined groups igmpsnoop port lt portlist gt Display joined groups in this port M L group dhcp counter lt portlist gt Disp
115. saves the new configuration to the nonvolatile memory For example use the following command sequence sets the AAMI212 to have 192 168 1 3 as the IP address 255 255 255 0 for the subnet mask and 192 168 1 233 for the default gateway Figure 197 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Command Example ras ip set 192 168 1 3 24 ras ip gateway 192 168 1 233 ras config save The AAMI212 leaves the factory with a default management IP address of 192 168 1 1 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 ff ff ff 00 in hexadecimal notation and the default gateway set at 192 168 1 254 Make sure that you configure the IP parameters correctly before you connect a AAMI212 to the network otherwise you may interrupt services already running 49 3 General IP Commands The following is a list of general IP commands that help with the management of the IP parameters 49 3 1 Show Syntax ras ip show inband outband Use the command to display the current management IP settings 49 3 2 Ping Command Syntax ras ip ping ip count This is an IP facility to check for network functionality by sending an echo request to another IP host and waiting for the reply 330 Chapter 49 IP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 49 3 3 Route Set Command Syntax ras ip route set dst ip netmask gateway ip metric name ras ip route set default lt gateway ip metric where dst ip The des
116. summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Add or Apply saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh This table shows the DSL port packet filter settings Port These are the numbers of the DSL ports Click this number to edit the port s filter settings in the section at the top PPPoE IP ARP These are the packet filter settings for each port isplays for the packet types that the is to accept on the port NetBios DHCP y displays for the packet types that the AAM1212 is t t on the port EAPOL IGMP displays for packet types that the AAM1212 is to reject on the port packet types PPPoE Only that are not listed are accepted When you select PPPoE Only appears for all of the packet types With PPPoE Only the AAM1212 rejects all packet types except for PPPoE packet types that are not listed are also rejected Chapter 20 Filtering AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 21 MAC Filter This chapter introduces the MAC filter 21 1 MAC Filter Introduction Use the MAC filter to control from which MAC Media Access Control addresses frames can or cannot come in through a port 21 2 MAC Filter Screen To open
117. the AAM1212 has resolved An example is shown next Figure 199 ARP Show Command Example ras gt ip arp show ip mac address 172 23 14 254 00 0c db 30 ac 00 172 23 15 254 00 00 db 30 ac 00 49 3 7 ARP Flush Command Syntax ras ip arp flush This command clears the AAMI212 s IP Address Resolution Protocol table 49 4 Statistics IP Command Syntax ras statistics ip This command shows the statistics for the CPU IP traffic 332 Chapter 49 IP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide An example is shown next Figure 200 Statistics IP Command Example ras statistics ip Ethernet inet 1172523 14 253 netmask broadcast 172 23 255 255 mtu in octet 10728504 in unicast in discard 0 in error out octet 41361 out unicast out discard 0 out error 1500 0 0 0 0 738 in multicast 232488 0 in unknown proto 0 861 out multicast 0 0 Chapter 49 IP Commands 333 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 334 Chapter 49 IP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance This chapter tells you how to upload a new firmware and or configuration file for the AAMI212 50 1 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Overview The AAM1212 s built in FTP server allows you to use any FTP client for example ftp exe in Windows to upgrade AAM1212 firmware or configuration files The firmware or c
118. the AAMI212 Table 75 SNMPv 2 Traps TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION coldStart This trap is sent when the AAM1212 is turned on warmStart This trap is sent when the AAM1212 restarts linkDown This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down Enterprise specific adsl atuc los traps are sent when an ADSL link is down linkUp This trap is sent when the Ethernet or ADSL link comes up authenticationFailure This trap is sent when the SNMP community check fails reboot This trap is sent when the system is going to reboot The variable is the reason for the system reboot overheat This trap is sent when the system is overheated The variable is the current system temperature in Celsius overheatOver This trap is sent when the system is no longer overheated The variable is the current system temperature in Celsius voltageOutOfRange This trap is sent when the voltage of the system is out of the normal range The variable is the current voltage of the system in volts voltageNormal This trap is sent when the voltage of the system is back within the normal range The variable is the current voltage of the system in volts thermalSensorFailure This trap is sent when the thermal sensor fails adslAtucLof This trap is sent when a Loss Of Frame is detected on the ATUC adslAturLof This trap is sent when a Loss Of Frame is detected on the ATUR adslAtucLos This trap is sent when a Loss Of Signal is detec
119. there is no dial tone your device s internal splitter may be faulty contact your vendor Reconnect the telephone wire to USER Connect a telephone to a lower port of MDF 3 If there is no dial tone then the problem is between your device and MDF 3 Check the pin assignments of the telephone wire s connector that connects to USER Replace the telephone wire connecting your device to MDF 3 If there is no dial tone then MDF 3 may be faulty Contact the telephone company if that is the case Disconnect the DSL modem from the wall jack and connect the telephone to the wall jack If there is no dial tone then there is a problem with the building wiring between the DSL subscriber s home and the MDF Contact your telephone company for troubleshooting 55 8 Local Server The computer behind a DSL modem or router cannot access a local server connected to the AAMI212 Table 107 Troubleshooting a Local Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 See Section 55 5 on page 415 to make sure that the subscriber is able to transmit to the AAM1212 Make sure the computer behind the DSL device has the correct gateway IP address configured Check the VLAN configuration see Chapter 16 on page 141 Check the cable and connections between the AAM1212 and the local server Try to access another local server If data can be transmitted to a different local server the local server that could not be acces
120. this ADSL port Severely errored seconds contained 30 or more errored blocks or at least one defect This is a subset of the Down Up Stream ES ATUC ATUR The downstream or upstream number of UnAvailable Seconds UAS Fast FEBE In fast mode the number of Far End Block Errors Far End Cyclic Redundancy Checks Fast NEBE In fast mode the number of Near End Block Errors Near End Cyclic Redundancy Checks Fast FEFEC In fast mode the Far End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward Error Correction Fast NEFEC In fast mode the Near End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward Error Correction Interleaved In interleaved mode the number of Far End Block Errors Far End Cyclic FEBE Redundancy Checks Interleaved In interleaved mode the number of Near End Block Errors Near End Cyclic NEBE Redundancy Checks Interleaved In interleaved mode the Far End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward FEFEC Error Correction Interleaved In interleaved mode the Near End number of ADSL frames repaired by Forward NEFEC Error Correction LPR This is the number of times that the subscriber s ADSL device has experienced a Loss of Power been off 15 min 1day history This section of the screen displays line performance statistics for the current and previous 15 minute periods as well as for the current and previous 24 hours lofs The number of Loss Of Frame Seconds that have occurred within the period loss The number
121. this screen click Advanced Application MAC Filter Figure 83 MAC Filter aV Filter Accept Mode accept specified MACs but deny others Deny Mode deny specified MACs but accept others E MAC LESE METELLI Ada Cancel Mode Active Delete Accept z r Accept O Accept z ri Accept O Accept gt a aras The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a DSL port for which you wish to configure MAC filtering MAC Type a device s MAC address in hexadecimal notation xx xx xx xx xx xx where x is a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from a to f in this field The MAC address must be a valid MAC address Chapter 21 MAC Filter 169 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 47 MAC Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port These are the numbers of the DSL ports Mode Select Accept to only allow frames from MAC addresses that you specify and block frames from other MAC addresses Select Deny to block frames from MAC addresses that you specify and
122. trapdst set 1 0 0 0 0 162 sys snmp trapdst set 2 0 0 0 0 162 Sys snmp trapdst set 3 0 0 0 0 162 Sys snmp trapdst set 4 0 0 0 0 162 tt server sys server enable telnet sys server enable ftp sys server enable web sys server enable icmp sys server port telnet 23 sys server port ftp 21 xnl EE Sip SS ears SHH Se nS SSS eS SSS SSS Se HSS SSS SS eS SaaS SS See Note The sys user set admin command is encrypted and you cannot edit it in a text editor Attempting to edit it and upload it to the AAM1212 will lock you out after the system restarts If this happens you will have to use the console port to restore the default configuration file and all of your configuration changes will be lost 50 3 3 Editable Configuration File Upload You can upload the configuration file by following the steps below Use an FTP client to connect to the AAMI212 Figure 208 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the AAM1212 C gt ftp lt AAM1212 IP address gt Type your user name and press ENTER User 172 23 15 86 none admin 338 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Enter the management password 1234 by default Figure 209 Example Enter the Management Password Password 1234 230 Logged in Use put to transfer the configuration file from the computer The configuration file on the system is named config 0 Figure 210 Example
123. virtual channel by assigning it a different profile The AAM1212 provides two default virtual channel profiles DEFVAL for LLC encapsulation and DEFVAL VC for VC encapsulation By default all virtual channels are associated to DEFVAL 13 9 VC Setup Screen Use this screen to view and configure a port s channel PVC settings To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup VC Setup 110 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 51 VC Setup OX ee xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Port Super Channel VPI VCI o DS VC Profile US C Profile PVID Priority o Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port VPI VCI DS US VC Profile PVID Priority Select 1 0 33 DEFVAN A 2 0 33 DEFVAL x E 3 0 33 DEFVAL 4 0 33 DEFVAL DEFVAL 5 of 33 Index 1selecteg Delete No Channel copied Copy Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 VC Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION xDSL Port Setup Click xDSL Port Setup to go to the screen where you can configure DSL port settings see Section 13 7 on page 103 PPVC Setup Click PPVC Setup to open the PPVC Setup screen where you can configure priority PVC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 11 on page 115 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view or configure settings This field is read only once you click on a port number below Super Ch
124. volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which DSL port s for which to display ACL profile settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port ACL Profile This field shows the ACL profile assigned to this PVC Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Chapter 31 ACL 213 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 68 ACL Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 31 3 ACL Profile Setup Screen Use this screen to set up ACL profiles To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL ACL Profile Setup Figure 111 ACL Profile Setup ED ACL Profile Setup NEM ACL Setup ACL Profile Map ProfleName C1 etherettype 0 0 65535 van o
125. where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the line operating values of a DSL port An example is shown next Figure 245 Lineinfo Command Example ras statistics adsl lineinfo 8 port 8 operating modes service type in operation adsl2 TRELLIS operation mode on connection detail down up stream interleaved delay ms 3 2 total transceiver DS output power dbm 2 5 total transceiver US output power dbm 11 5 atuc information vendor id 30304235303035300000000000000000 version number 66323330323030300000000000000000 serial number 30323030306530336539303030370000000000000000000000000000000000 00 atur information vendor id b5004244434d00000000000000000000 version number 41327042303139610000000000000000 serial number 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 The service type in operation is the ADSL standard that the port is using Gdmt AAM1212 51 G dmt Annex B AAM1212 53 ETSI AAM1212 53 Glite AAM1212 51 ANSI T1 413 issue 2 AAMI212 51 ADSL2 or ADSL2 Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in DSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable 3 At the time of writing the AAM1212 alway
126. 0 0 0 0 voice 10 0 70 40 00 0 0 0 0 voice ded 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice T5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 16 0 0 30 00 0 0 0 0 47 4 IGMP Bandwidth Commands Use the IGMP bandwidth commands to set up bandwidth budgets for specific multicast channels 47 4 1 IGMP Bandwidth Default Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth default bandwidth where bandwidth Allowed bandwidth between 1 and 1000 000 kbps kilo bits per second This command sets the default bandwidth for multicast channels for which you have not configured bandwidth requirements yet Multicast bandwidth settings on channels using the switch igmpsnoop bandwidth set command have higher priority over this default setting Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 313 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 47 4 2 IGMP Bandwidth Set Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth set index start mcast ip end mcast ip bandwidth where index 96 aunique number for this setting start mcast 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 the beginning of the multicast ip range end mcast ip 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 the end of the multicast range It must be greater than lt start mcast ip gt bandwidth 1 100000 in units of kbps This command configures bandwidth allocation for the multicast channel s For multicast channel s for which you have
127. 0 Kbps 4 5 4096 1 100 000 Kbps a096 1 100 000 Kbps Active Inactive select AMI None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Bandwidth Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Setup Click Bandwidth Setup to open the IGMP Bandwidth screen where you can set up bandwidth requirements for multicast channels see Section 17 4 on page 152 Port This field shows each DSL port number Active This field shows whether or not multicast bandwidth requirements are enabled on this port V displays if it is enabled and displays if it is disabled Bandwidth Enter the maximum acceptable multicast bandwidth for this port This has no effect if bandwidth requirements are disabled Select Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on this port Active Click this to enable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on the selected port Inactive Click this to disable the specified multicast bandwidth requirements on the selected port Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 17 5 IGMP Setup Screen Use this screen to configure your IGMP settings To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP IGMP Setup Figure 74 IGMP Setup ONS aD IGMP Status Filter Setup IGMP Mode Disable Apply
128. 00000000000 Designated port 0x0000 Poll Interval s ao Set Interval Stop Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol 173 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION STP Config Click STP Config to modify the AAM1212 s STP settings see Section 22 3 on page 175 Spanning Tree Protocol This field displays On if STP is activated Otherwise it displays Off Bridge Status If STP is activated the following fields appear If STP is not activated Disabled appears Our bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same in Designated root ID if the AAM1212 is the root Switch Designated root ID This is the unique identifier for the root bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same in Our bridge ID if the AAM1212 is the root Switch Topology change times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time since change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Cost to root This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Root port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Ox0000 displays w
129. 02 1p priority tag An asterisk denotes a super channel Add Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port The name of the button depends on whether or not you have clicked on a PVC number in the Index column This saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select the number of an ADSL port for which to display VC settings or display all of them Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the ADSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one PVID This is the PVID
130. 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH GERMANY Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany support zyxel hu 36 1 3361649 www zyxel hu ZyXEL Hungary HUNGARY 48 Zoldlomb Str info zyxel hu 36 1 3259100 H 1025 Budapest Hungary http zyxel kz support 7 3272 590 698 www zyxel kz ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk ave Office 414 KAZAKHSTAN sales zyxel kz 7 3272 590 689 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com T is Customer Support AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide METHOD LOCATION SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE REGULAR MAIL support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 NORWAY sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway info pl zyxel com 48 22 333 8250 www pl zyxel com ZyXEL Communications POLAND ul Okrzei 1A 48 22 333 8251 03 715 Warszawa Poland http zyxel ru support 7 095 542 89 29 www zyxel ru ZyXEL Russia RUSSIA Ostrovityanova 37a Str sales zyxel ru 7 095 542 89 25 Moscow 117279 Russia support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications S
131. 12 17455535 Secret 1234 Default Privilege Level low F 88 Chapter 9 User Account AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION User account Click this to open the User Account screen See Section 9 1 on page 87 Authentication Mode Select the process by which the AAM1212 authenticates administrators local Search the local database You maintain this database in the User Account screen radius Check an external RADIUS database using the settings below local then radius Search the local database if the user name is not found check an external RADIUS database using the settings below IP Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation Port The default UDP port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Default Privilege Level Select the privilege level assigned to administrators in case the external RADIUS database does not provide one The privilege level determines which screens the administrator can use There is
132. 12 53 ETSI AAM1212 53 G lite ANSI T1 413 issue 2 AAM1212 51 ADSL2 or ADSL2 Trellis Encoding This field displays whether Trellis encoding is turned on or off Trellis encoding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable Down Stream Interleave Delay This field displays the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream transmissions Up Stream Interleave Delay This field displays the number of milliseconds of interleave delay for upstream transmissions Down Stream Output Power This field displays the amount of power that this port is using to transmit to the subscriber s ADSL modem or router The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the more power is needed Up Stream Output Power This field displays the amount of power that the subscriber s ADSL modem or router is using to transmit to this port The total output power of the transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscribers ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the more power is needed Info Atur Info Atuc The Info Atur fields show data acquired from the ATUR ADSL Termination Unit Remote in this case the subscriber s ADSL modem or
133. 1212 drops this PDU This is not recorded as an PPPoE AC System Error in the PPPoA to PPPoE Status screen however Service Name This field is optional Specify the name of the service that uses this PVC This must be a service name that you configure on the remote access concentrator Hellotime Specify the timeout in seconds for the PPPoE session Enter 0 if there is no timeout Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which DSL port s for which to display PPPoA to PPPoE conversion settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to open the screen where you can look at the current status of this PPPoA to PPPoE conversion See Section 28 3 on page 202 Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI a
134. 139 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDU 172 Burst Tolerance BT 124 C Canonical Format Indicator CFI 141 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT 123 certifications 4 notices 4 viewing 4 CI 251 CI commands See commands CLI 251 CLI commands See commands Command Line Interface See CI or CLI commands 251 252 abbreviations 251 config save 252 configuration back up 244 335 file names 335 restore 240 335 using FTP 335 configured rate 102 console port 421 pin assignments 430 settings 44 Constant Bit Rate CBR 122 contact information 7 contact person s name 85 copyright 3 customer support 7 D Daytime RFC 867 86 default gateway 97 default privilege level 89 Index 431 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide DEFVAL 110 DEFVAL profile settings 423 DEFVAL VC 110 DHCP 168 183 DHCP relay 183 option 82 183 Diagnostic 243 disclaimer 3 Discrete Multi Tone See DMT DMT 137 double upstream mode 107 double tagged frames 207 downstream traffic 101 DSL LED troubleshooting 415 DSL port statistics 73 duplex 99 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E EAPoL 168 encapsulation LLC 110 VC Mux 110 Errored Seconds ES 136 Ethernet address See MAC address Ethernet port default settings 44 statistics 71 Extensible Authentication Protocol See EAPoL F factory defaults 241 419 Far End Block Errors FEBE 136 fast channel 102 fast mode 102 120 FCC interfe
135. 2 1 10 seconds MAX Age 20 6 40 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 4 30 seconds Priority 0 255 Path Cost 1 65535 128 128 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Spanning Tree Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION STP Status Click STP Status to display the AAM1212 s STP status see Section 22 2 on page 173 Active Select this check box to turn on RSTP Note It is recommended that you only use STP when you use the AAM1212 in standalone mode with a network topology that has loops Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol 175 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 51 Spanning Tree Protocol continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch The allowed range is 0 to 61440 The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MAX Age This is the maximum time in seconds
136. 3 1 6 115 5 51 0 20 0 97161 0 69211 1 6 15 5 5125 The following table lists the line diagnostics test parameters that display see the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 97 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command LABEL DESCRIPTION number of Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub subcarries carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each The first number is the total number of DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using The second number indicates how many upstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number These are the maximum upstream and downstream scale factors used in producing the channel characteristics function latn This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in dB satn This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in dB Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 371 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 97 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command continued LABEL DESCRIPTION snrm This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the AAM 1212 still being able to meet its tran
137. 4 3125 KHz each This number indicates how many upstream and downstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the maximum upstream and downstream scale factor used in producing the channel characteristics function latn This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in dB satn This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in dB snrm This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the AAM1212 still being able to meet its transmission targets attndr This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in dBm 374 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 98 ToneDiag Command continued LABEL DESCRIPTION i This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier log dB This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line OLN dBm The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is t
138. 41 Alarm Port Show Command Example sse 281 Figure 142 Alarm Port Set Command Example sse 281 Figure 143 Alarm Tablelist Command Example see 282 Figure 144 Alarm History Show Command Example sees 283 Figure 145 Alarm History Clear Command Example eene 284 Figure 146 Alarm Xedit Command Example eceeeseieeeeeeeseeeeneeiae 285 Figure 147 Show Command EXSITERG au e omar recette hh rte Rode ut rk int khao 287 Figure 148 DHCP Snoop Enable Command Example suus 292 Figure 149 DHCP Snoop Show Command Example ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 293 Figure 150 DHCP Counter Statistics Command Example sssssss 293 Figure 151 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command Example suususse 294 Figure 152 VLAN Port Show Command Example esee 296 Figure 153 VLAN PVID Command Example resin nine rint rp sinn FEE IRA 297 Figure 154 VLAN CPU Set Command Example eese 297 Figure 155 Modifying the Static VLAN Example see 298 Figure 156 VLAN Frame Type Command Example eeeeeeeeeeeeee 299 Figure 157 VLAN CPU Set Command Example reciente 300 Figure 158 VLAN CPU Set Command Example eeeeeceeseseeeeeenna neta 300 Figure 159 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activati
139. 6 NetBIOS 168 Network Basic Input Output System See NetBIOS non real time Variable Bit Rate nrt VBR 122 NTP RFC 1305 86 O OAM F5 Loopback 244 option 82 183 P packet filter 167 password 59 Peak Cell Rate PCR 123 Permanent Virtual Circuit See PVC ping 244 PMM 245 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet See PPPoE Port Security 181 Port Setup 99 Port VLAN ID See PVID PPPoE 168 PPVC 385 PPVC Setup 115 PPVC Setup Members 116 priority queue assignment 95 product registration 6 PVC 109 383 PVID 112 default 142 Q Q in Q See TLS Quality of Service QOS 121 R RADIUS 177 shared secret 178 RADIUS Setup 178 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP reach extended ADSL2 107 real time Variable Bit Rate rt VBR 122 reboot 241 Reed Solomon 102 120 registration product 6 related documentation 37 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service See RADIUS Remote Management screen 226 restart 241 restore configuration 240 RFC 1305 See NTP Index 433 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide RFC 2131 See DHCP RFC 2132 See DHCP RFC 2138 See RADIUS RFC 2139 See RADIUS RFC 2486 See EAPOL RFC 3046 See Option 82 RFC 867 See Daytime RFC 868 See Time RSTP 171 port states 172 See also STP S safety warnings 5 save configuration 60 Secured Client Setup screen 226 SELT 244 Service Access Control 225 Service Provider s Network SPN 207 Severely
140. 802 1Q VLAN tag The following example sets a priority of three for frames with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag that come in on DSL port 2 Figure 154 VLAN CPU Set Command Example ras switch vlan priority 2 3 45 4 4 VLAN Set Command Syntax ras switch vlan set vid lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X N gt portlist F T U X name where lt vid gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt portlist gt You can specify a single port 17 all ports lt gt a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt you can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet enet2 gt Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 297 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide lt F lt T U gt The lt F gt stands for a fixed registrar administration control flag and registers a lt port gt to the static VLAN table with lt vid gt For a fixed port you also have to specify lt T U gt the tag control flag lt T gt has the device add an IEEE 802 1Q tag to frames going out through this port s lt U gt has the device send frames out through this port s without an IEEE 802 1Q tag X N gt This is the registrar administration control flag lt X gt stands for forbidden and blocks a lt port gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vid gt N stands for normal and confirms registration of the port gt to the static VLAN table with lt vid gt This is used in GVRP applications name A
141. AAM 1212 51 53 ADSL2 module of IES 1000 User s Guide Version 3 52 Edition 1 8 2006 ZyXEL AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Copyright Copyright O 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 3 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies wi
142. AM1212 PPP LCP Config This field displays the number of config request PDUs received by the AAM1212 System Error Request from the CPE client device PPP LCP Echo This field displays the number of echo request PDUs received by the AAM1212 Request from the CPE client device PPP LCP Echo This field displays the number of echo reply PDUs received by the AAM1212 Reply from the CPE client device PPPoE PADI This field displays the number of padi PDUs sent by the AAM1212 to the BRAS PPPoE PADO This field displays the number of pado PDUs sent by the BRAS to the AAM1212 PPPoE PADR This field displays the number of padr PDUs sent by the AAM1212 to the BRAS PPPoE PADS This field displays the number of pads PDUs sent by the BRAS to the AAM1212 PPPoE PADT This field displays the number of padt PDUs sent and received by the AAM1212 PPPoE Service _ This field displays the number of service name errors for example the Name Error AAM1212 s specified service is different than the BRAS s setting PPPoE AC This field displays the number of times the access concentrator experienced an error while performing the Host request for example when resources are exhausted in the access concentrator This value does not include the number of times the AAM1212 checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU and finds a mismatch however PPPoE Generic Error This field displays the number of other t
143. AM1212 uses for Telnet Ping the AAM1212 from your computer If you are able to ping the AAM1212 but are still unable to telnet contact the distributor If you cannot ping the AAM1212 check the cable connections and IP configuration Incorrectly configuring the access control settings may lock you out from using in band management Try using the console port to reconfigure the system 55 15 Resetting the Defaults If you lock yourself and others from the AAMI212 you will need to reload the factory default configuration file Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The user name will be reset to admin and the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 419 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 55 15 1 Resetting the Defaults Via Command 55 15 2 If you know the password you can reload the factory default configuration file via Command Line Interface CLI command Use the following procedure 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 3 on page 44 for details 2 Enter your password 3 Type config restore
144. AN 256 ADSL profile 24 ATM profile 48 IGMP filter profile 128 ADSL ALARM profile 24 Dot1X profile 64 426 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide DHCP relay server 32 P ROUTE 128 Static multicast address 32 IGMP groups 256 groups MAC learning 9 5k at most 128 per ADSL port at most 4k per ENET port at most RPVC gateway IP address 96 RPVC routing entry 96 ACL profile 128 The following table shows the specifications for wire gauge Note Make sure you use wires of the specified wire gauge Table 114 Wire Gauge Specifications WIRE TYPE REQUIRED AWG NO DIAMETER Ground Wire 18 or larger Telephone Wire 26 or larger AWG American Wire Gauge is a measurement system for wire that specifies its thickness As the thickness of the wire increases the AWG number decreases 427 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 428 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide APPENDIX C Pin Assignments Hardware Telco 50 Connector Pin Assignments The following diagram shows the pin assignments of the Telco 50 connector Figure 300 Telco 50 Pin Assignments FISISISISISISISISIZISIS 181818181818181818181818 o lo lo lo lo lo lolo lo lololo o ojojojo jolojolojo jojo 1 1 v1 T d x es 4 9 vivivivivivcivsiviviviv v viviviviviviviviviviviz 9 9 yo 9 I9 S 9 9 S I9 9 9 o Je Jo Jo Je o o o o JOJO o afalalalalalalalalalala 7 Ex de Bet hee ie hee Se Te fee lS iS
145. AN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Chapter 30 TLS PVC 207 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 108 Transparent LAN Service Network Example A VLAN 24 EES EEE 30 2 TLS PVC Screen Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Services on each port This is set up by creating a TLS PVC See Chapter 13 on page 101 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanced Application TLS PVC Note You can NOT configure PPPoA to PPPoE and TLS settings on the same PVC 208 Chapter 30 TLS PVC AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 109 TLS PVC DS VC Profile DEFVAL US YC Profile VID n 1 4094 Priority Apply Cancel Show Port A11 Index Port VPIMCI VID Priority DSUS VC Profile Select Delete Select Aii None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 TLS PVC LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up a TLS PVC This field is read only once you click on a port number below VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop d
146. Actatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in 1 dBm This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the real part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the imaginary part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier log This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line QLN The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm Hz The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in 1 dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture Syntax 52 2 9 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command ras adsl lined
147. Burst Size MBS Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again Note If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 58 PCR SCR and MBS in Traffic Shaping E 3 14 3 2 4 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT controls the time scale over which the PCR is enforced CDVT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to PCR Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 123 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 14 3 2 5 Burst Tolerance BT Burst Tolerance BT is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT controls the time scale over which the SCR is enforced BT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to SCR Use this formula to calculate BT MBS x 1 SCR 1 PCR BT 14 3 2 6 Theoretical Arrival Time TAT The Theoretical Arrival Time TAT is when the next cell in an ATM connection s stream of cells is expected to arrive TAT is calcu
148. CI of the individual PVC that you are displaying This command displays the PVCs that are members of a PPVC 388 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the PVCs that are members of a PPVC for port 5 Figure 268 PPVC Member Show Command Example ras adsl ppvc member show 5 port vpi vci mvpi mvci level DS US vcprofile 5 8 35 8 36 2 DEFVAL DEFVAL 53 6 1 PPVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc show lt portlist gt vpi lt vci gt where portlist The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PPVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PPVC This command displays the runtime configured PPVCs The following example displays the PPVCs configured on DSL port 5 Figure 269 PPVC Show Command Example ras gt adsl ppvc show 5 port vpi vci encap pvid pri 5 8 35 llc 25 6 53 6 2 PPVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 389 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt The port s of the PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports l
149. Clear Click Clear to delete the information the AAM1212 has learned about multicast groups This resets every counter in this screen 17 9 IGMP Port Group Screen Use this screen to display the current list of multicast groups each port joins To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP IGMP Port Group Figure 77 IGMP Port Group E IGMP F IGMP Status Show Port l Port VID Multicast IP Source IP Refresh Chapter 17 IGMP 157 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 IGMP Port Group LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 150 Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field shows each port number VID This field shows the associated VLAN ID Multicast IP This field shows the IP address of the multicast group joined by this port Source IP This field shows the IP address of the client that joined the multicast group on this port Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information 158 Chapter 17 IGMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Static Multicast This chapter describes the Static Multicast screen 18 1 Static Multicast Use static multicast to allow incoming frames based on multicast MAC address es that you specify This feature
150. Commands Use these commands to configure SNMP settings See Chapter 34 on page 221 for more information about SNMP 51 1 1 Get Community Command Syntax ras sys snmp getcommunity community where community The password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Enter this command with the community to set the password 51 1 2 Set Community Command Syntax ras sys snmp setcommunity community where community The password for the incoming Set requests from the management station Enter this command with the community to set the password 51 1 3 Trusted Host Set Command Syntax ras sys snmp trusthost ip Chapter 51 SNMP 341 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt ip gt The IP address of a trusted host Use this command to add the host IP address to the list of trusted hosts If you enter a trusted host your AAM1212 will only respond to SNMP messages from this address If you leave the trusted host set to 0 0 0 0 default the AAM1212 will respond to all SNMP messages it receives regardless of source 51 1 4 Trap Community Command Syntax ras gt sys snmp trapcommunity lt community gt where lt community gt The password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Enter this command with the community to set the password 51 1 5 Trap Destination Set Command Syntax ras sys snmp trapdst set index ip lt port gt
151. Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 27 3 2684 Routed Domain Screen Use this screen to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode Routed Domain Figure 100 2684 Routed Domain OWE Routed Domain J RPVC ARP Proxy Routed Gateway Routed PVC Port l o VCI o 0 0 0 0 NetMask o 1 32 Index Port VPI VCI NetMask Delete 194 Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 2684 Routed Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION RPVC ARP Proxy Click RPVC ARP Proxy to go to the screen where you can view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them see Section 27 4 on page 195 Routed Gateway Click Routed Gateway to go to the screen where you can configure gateway settings see Section 27 5 on page 196 Routed PVC Click Routed PVC to go to the screen where you can configure routed PVC settings see
152. DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt pppoe Reject PPPoE packets Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet relies on PPP and Ethernet PPPoE is a specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem ip Reject IP packets Internet Protocol The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks arp Reject ARP packets Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical computer address that is recognized in the local network netbios Reject NetBIOS packets Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN dhcp Reject DHCP packets Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addresses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems eapol Reject EAPol packets EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 over LAN EAP is used with IEEE 802 1x to allow additional authentication methods besides RADIUS to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the
153. E AAEN ERAN 229 Figare Te T Alani SALUS a pocoto Pa ERR QU REED INO SEP UENO dc KPa IO MEE RH vU E ee 231 Figure 122 Alit Exit SEL xsutoosca sativa deno reno eie S 234 Figure 123 Alarm Event Setup Edit 1 eicere antra hd dia 235 ge ee Alarm Port SQW Dy T M 236 List of Figures 27 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide a AXu cnn 239 Figure 126 Fimmware Upgrade TP 239 Figure 127 Restore Conflgulatiplt 2 ciii niss eriperet cider E toti dioc 240 Figure 128 Restore Default Configuration erit ree rare tnr netta naa 241 Figure 129 Restore Factory Default Settings Reboot eese 241 Figure 130 Reboot SySteny m iess nnii M 242 e amy sys pre 243 Figure 132 MAC Table Filtering Flowchart 5 serre errorae nent FR eren E MER EkEdES 247 Figure T1259 MAL TUBIS ond cipi o Ep REL rr rc od ob e d RS UR HL p Ea 248 Figure T34 ARP Tablo sonnait aa T 250 Figure 135 Log Show Command Example 2 5 icc cecinit rom ertet kit 271 Figure 136 Info Show EXQSIIDIGC Lisrsccestero scii np e P P LIU PFERDE HS GR OR 274 Figure 137 Isolation Show Example usce REPRE ERU ECEPE ER MEE AF E UD RERFFIUIDUMEFERRUMID inin 275 Figure 138 Statistics Monitor Command Example sese 276 Figure 139 Statistics Port Command Example eeeeeeeeseeecceenee etna 277 Figure 140 Alarm Show Command Example s cccciissesetsscacssenrscnataanensiannenveanannacarninn 280 Figure 1
154. E LAN 10 100 8 12 J 2 2 Removing the AAM1212 from the IES 1000 1 Turning the two screws that secure the module to the chassis counter clockwise to loosen them Figure 5 Removal Loosen Module Screws SYSCONSOLE LAN 10 100 2 2 Gently pull the AAM1212 out of the chassis as shown next Figure 6 Removal Removing the AAM1212 from the IES 1000 d l 42 Chapter 2 Installing and Removing the AAM1212 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Front Panel This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the AAMI212 and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel The figure below shows the front panel of the AAMI212 Figure 7 Front Panel 2 159 2 OOO ALM OOO O W OOO O ci OOO StSconsour LAN 10 100 9 3 1 1 Front Panel Ports The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1 Front Panel Ports LABEL DESCRIPTION CONSOLE Only connect this port if you want to configure the AAM1212 using the command line interface CLI via the console port LAN 10 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router USER CO Connect the Telco 50 connector USER pins 14 25 39 50 to subscribers respectively Connect the Telco 50 connector CO pin
155. EL tnra rent EE Entra nne etae tke opaca 339 Figure 212 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the AAM1212 339 Figure 213 Example Enter the Management Password sess 339 Figure 214 Example Transfer the Firmware File accen ce n ente attentus 340 Figure 215 Example Close FTF CIBPL 5i sepia Pri e io PR RUE et dieses 340 Figure 216 DSL Port Show Command Exerple iterari icones icit rca 345 Figure 217 DSL Profile Show Command Example eeeeeseeeeeees 347 Figure 218 DSL Port Profile Set Command Exariaple 7 eei tienen 349 Figure 219 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 2 1 eate tette netus 349 Figure 220 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example suus 349 Figure 221 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example 1 2 citet ettet to 350 Figure 222 DSL Port Name Command Example eese 351 Figure 223 DSL Port Tel Command Example ussukbrkoin it Rr krs Ebo UR EFEEP IB UEKRERU IUE sirnaan 2351 Figure 224 DSL Port Loopback Command Example sssssssssss 352 Figure 225 DSL Port Upstream PSD Command Example ssusssss 352 Figure 226 DSL Port Downstream PSD Command Example 353 Figure 227 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Example ss 354 Figure 228 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Display Example 354 Figure 229 DSL Port Dow
156. ERE pd bai e Ead 341 51 1 9 Trusted Host Set Command ssec pe PER MEKR USES IAR FEE RUEDA KEekF Akin iiin 341 511 2 Trap Comma G Omelia ioo pei artist beet A RP LAE Ax A 342 51 1 5 Trap Destination Set Command 1255 rrr reti tierna Eon PEE Lett 342 51 1 b Show SNMP Settings Command 15er rtt tirer tr para 342 Chapter 52 ADSL Command S te 345 PM ER M Pant Pe TET 345 52 1 1 DSL Port Show Command i cri o Ern PEqAEE REC U Ie ETERA 345 521 2 DSL Por Enable Command iie de te ec eo De 345 52 1 3 DSL Port Disable Command 2225 5 aati ead Ra obra ax KE Rn aan rae 346 52 1 4 DSL Port Profile SHOW Command 12i ioc ime ceci trei utro rco a 346 52 1 5 DSL Port Profile Set Command 1er terat i t n 347 52 1 6 DSL Port Profile Delete Command eere onion e PR ee Ee REDDE 349 20 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 22 1 7 DSL Port Profile Map Command iecore ho petto P 1 trt E Eas 349 o2 L5 DSL Port Name COTImIBII 1 ucuui ie sreaacus inasnan annin aa 350 52 18 DSL Pot Tel COT oci sna ad din a ubl eir Fee bU Feb dUNcE abita ES 351 22 71 10 DSL Por Loopback Command 225 i pnta rtt eC NNA 351 52 1 11 DSL Port Upstream PSD Command sssrini eei ope tierno reae 352 52 1 12 DSL Port Downstream PSD Cominand 5 223 cios cosa duce ee era aiiin 353 52 1 13 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command seessssssssss 353 52 1 14 DSL Port Downstream CarrierO Command sese 354 52 1 15 D
157. Figure 238 Annex L Disable Command Example ras adsl annexl disable 5 52 1 20 Annex M Enable Command This command is available for the AAMI212 51 Syntax ras adsl annexm enable portlist This command turns on the Annex M double upstream feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s This has the upstream connection use tones 6 to 63 The following example turns on the Annex M feature for port 5 Figure 239 Annex M Enable Command Example ras adsl annexm enable 5 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 359 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 1 21 52 1 22 52 1 23 Annex M Disable Command This command is available for the AAMI212 51 Syntax ras adsl annexm disable lt portlist gt This command turns off the Annex M double upstream feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s The following example turns off the Annex M feature for port 5 Figure 240 Annex M Disable Command Example ras adsl annexm disable 5 Annex I Enable Command This command is available for the AAM1212 51 Syntax ras adsl annexi enable portlist This command turns on the Annex I all digital mode feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s With Annex I the DSL connection uses the full spectrum of the physical line and the user can not use POTS or ISDN service The following example turns on the Annex I feature for port 5 Figure 241 Annex Enable Command Example ras adsl annexi enable 5 An
158. H H delete Chapter 41 Commands 261 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P igmpsnoop mvlan lt vid gt lt index gt Create a multicast to VLAN H H group set start mcast ip translation entry end mcast ip up to 16 entries index 1 16 Note IP address in each entry should be disjointed igmpsnoop mvlan vid index Delete a multicast to VLAN H H group delete translation entry igmpsnoop mvlan vlanlist Show a multicast to VLAN M L group show translation entry igmpfilter set lt portlist gt lt name gt Sets an ADSL port s to use an H H IGMP filter profile igmpfilter show portlist Displays which IGMP filter profile M L an ADSL port s is using igmpfilter profile lt name gt lt index gt Configures an IGMP filter profile H H set lt startip gt lt endip gt igmpfilter profile lt name gt Removes an IGMP filter profile H H delete igmpfilter profile name Displays an IGMP filter profile s M L show settings queuemap show Displays the system s priority level M L to ENET queue mapping queuemap set priority queue Maps a priority level to a ENET H H queue garptimer show Display the system s garp settings M L garptimer join join msec gt Set system s garp join time H H garptimer leave leave msec gt Set system s garp
159. L L lt vci gt dhcpsnoop disable lt portlist gt Disable ip spoofing for a port M H dhcpsnoop enable lt portlist gt Enable ip spoofing for a port M H dhcpsnoop flush lt portlist gt Flush DHCP snooping table for a M H port dhcpsnoop show lt portlist gt Display DHCP snooping result on L L a port dscp show portlist Displaying per port DSCP setting L L dscp enable lt portlist gt Enable ADSL ENET ports to use M H DSCP mapping dscp disable lt portlist gt Disable ADSL ENET ports to use M H DSCP mapping dscp map show portlist Displaying the DSCP code to L L 802 1p mapping table dscp map set srccp lt mappri gt Setting the DSCP code to 802 1p M H mapping table lt srccp gt source code point 0 63 example 12395710915 mappri mapping priority 0 7 vlan show vlanlist Displays VLAN settings M L vlan portshow portlist Displays the port s VLAN M L settings vlan set lt vid gt Configures a VLAN entry H H lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt IXIN gt lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X N gt name vlan enable lt vid gt Turns on a VLAN entry H H vlan disable lt vid gt Turns off a VLAN entry H H vlan delete vlanlist Removes a VLAN entry H H vlan pvid lt portlist gt lt pvid gt Sets the PVID Port VLAN ID H H assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port s vlan priority lt portlist gt Sets a port s default IEEE 802 1p H H lt priority gt priority vl
160. L a Aa 183 EN MTA El i NM HP 183 Table of Contents 13 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 25 2 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Option 82 n se 183 25 2 1 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Formats 183 20 0 DHCP Relay SOGE 184 Chapter 26 DHCP SNOOP siisii ianoaaeie ia aani dente ANES AAKA S OE K NaRa 187 20 1 DHCP SHOOD COPIE assirsnaati paeau aa aAa E aaa ria acoge eU bna 187 202 DHCP GROOP SOneew araga E O E 187 20 3 DHCP Snop SaS SOEN Auai Dort e Eai 188 20 4 DHCP Counter SORBB aessa ianiai Eres aai aa aiaia ana ERR Fa ad iaaa 189 Chapter 27 2084 Routed Mode P n 191 2TA 2054 Rbuted MOS occa shecssvecnisiurepecteiiuenencraciieeneicene ab e RUDUEE VER I EPOR EE EK tU 191 27 1 1 2684 Routed Mode EXAImple 1 sisse eene etra etd ete ep 191 27 2 2084 Rented PYG Semen srcane anen ea NR Ioco ER aeq iei nu e e qEME M eis 192 27 2 2084 Routed Domain SCEO 2 13 IneI EISE ExELE ED HD Y da pto Fit pn PEE Sdn 194 27A REVC Arp Proxy SOIGOPL uu ei dins a dees nba ta dnd UEM wedi AF PUER EE ERA MD cab 195 27 5 2684 Routed Gateway Screen osuere sect isesa su bor esda aiia 196 Chapter 28 PPPOA Io PPPOE scosi e PA oM RC MI LXI a Ae RM PM RIAM EM DANSE ANM NE 199 20 1 PPFOA t0 FPPPROE OYEC osc oss TOTO 199 28 2 PPPOA t0 PPPOE SEIS sii qp E pER IEEE RE eE A E 199 28 3 PPPOA to PPPOE Status SGO ON o ioi er oret ia prt ro hah eed obo Od ds 202 Chapter 29 gi
161. L upstream signal noise margin 0 31db The maximum acceptable DSL upstream signal noise margin 0 31db The minimum DSL upstream transmission rate 32 4096 Kbps The target DSL downstream signal noise margin 0 3 1db Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 347 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide down min The minimum acceptable DSL downstream signal noise margin margin 0 31db down max The maximum acceptable DSL downstream signal noise margin margin 0 31db down min rate The minimum DSL downstream transmission rate 32 32000 Kbps up down shift The upstream down shift noise margin 0 31 in dB margin up up shift The upstream up shift noise margin 0 31 in dB margin down down The downstream down shift noise margin 0 31 in dB shift margin down up shift The downstream up shift noise margin 0 31 in dB margin gt The profile is a table that contains information on DSL line configuration Each entry in this table reflects a parameter defined by a manager which can be used to configure the DSL line Note that the default value will be used for any of the above fields that are omitted The upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers in the profile set command the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower mul
162. LAN Disable Command ccccccccccecceseeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeeeeeseeees 321 47 8 4 Multicast VLAN Enable Command cccccccccceceseecaeaeseeeeeseesssseeeeeseeees 322 47 8 5 Multicast VLAN Show Command i ior net rp ea sacan 322 47 8 6 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command sss 323 47 8 7 Multicast VLAN Group Delete Command ssssssssssss 323 47 8 8 Multicast VLAN Group Show Command sss 323 Chapter 48 Packet Filter Command S eos eve Pe n FERE YS PEN SE UR MORE EEEDO ERR Ua eaa 325 43 1 Packet Filter Commands su scecpeqcixan uam e kun AR ERO INDE ER EDEPNE HR NM OTE UM HAN EK IdA 325 49 1 1 Packet Filler Show Command aec eit pm rk e na iiSi 325 48 1 2 Packet Filter Set Command ccccceccccceceeeeceseeseeaeaeaeaeaeeeseeeeeeseeees 326 48 1 3 Packet Filter PPPOE Only COMMAND 122 ttn 327 Table of Contents 19 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Chapter 49 IP C Ommmands acoso scissa E RE EEYKEKE HER A a ERENP ARENA a VOLENS UE REESE AR RORA 329 49 1 IP Commands UENO 1 aon eate iurant ER Rp ua Ea bat XXE erba de e dba 329 49 2 IP Settings and Default Gateway ccc cccsecess secco certi rti terrier ert pr eer th tne Eee cie 329 29 3 General IP OOTP UNS us cisco erede Ru E Sb Ra Du RE EbER USER REDE RE PARLA FE AME E FU ATE 330 AOU e s RN EUM 330 Z5 2 Ping CONTIN o Rec orte Dy in d deiode p bd er ed ra 330 49 3 3 Route Set Command ode a bad ebk obw REL d RR shama
163. Line Diagnostics Get Command Syntax ras adsl linediag getld port number Use this command to display the line diagnostics results after using the line diagnostics set command on a DSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical DSL line Note Wait at least one minute after using the line diagnostic set command before using this command 368 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the line diagnostics results for DSL port 1 Figure 250 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example ras adsl linediag getld 1 Line Diagnostics Parameter channel 0 number of subcarries 256 32 hlinScale 19625 32767 latn 54 0 satn 52 8 snrm 60 60 attndr 12140000 1120000 farEndActatp 75 125 i ITI li im log OLN SNR 0 32768 32768 1023 255 255 1 32768 32768 1023 255 255 2 32768 32768 1023 255 255 3 32768 32768 1023 255 255 4 32768 32768 1023 255 255 5 32768 32768 1023 255 255 6 11604 4752 83 191 132 7 17794 5598 48 190 139 8 22385 5567 30 184 147 9 24903 5163 21 163 152 10 26768 5013 15 185 159 11 29179 5494 8 175 165 12 31605 6574 1 172 168 13 32766 8020 1023 186 170 14 32159 9597 1023 183 173 15 30990 11350 1023 182 173 16 30432 13730 1023 186 172 17 30259 16694 1023 182 170 18 29137 19570 1023 171 170 19 26499 21554 1023 186 172 20 23288 22973 0 173 174 The following table lists the line diagnostics tes
164. MP Bandwidth Set Commald 22 ncc ere road ere op Ipse in 314 47 4 3 IGMP Bandwidth Delete Command seeeeeeeeee 314 475 IGMP Bandwidth Port Commands Lco s pot ainin 314 47 5 1 IGMP Bandwidth Port Disable Command eeeeesses 314 47 5 2 IGMP Bandwidth Port Enable Command eee 415 47 5 3 IGMP Bandwidth Port Set Command eeeeessene 315 47 5 4 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command ccccccesseseeaeeesssssseseneeseeees 315 47 6 IGMP Count Limit COMMAS 1c rete aaaea 316 47 5 1 IGMP Count Disable Command iuisuesa rasis eirinn na 316 47 8 2 IGMP Count Enable Command 1 12 o nort i ia 317 47 8 3 IGMP Count Set Command sessirnir n in AER 317 47 5 4 IGMP Count Show COMING 12 ec cciaici oc recie saco decor ieri neinar aE 318 27 7 IGMP Snoop Statistics Commands Lice sc eee cia Eee rix EE PIS EE nna xau E EN Ewa 318 47 7 1 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command 1 trennen 318 43 7 2 IGMP Group Statistics Command 4 5 5 2 m ona e opone elo arte nord 319 47 7 3 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command 5 en e reiec cran iaa 319 47 7 4 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command 1o entre ict i bib eee cerne se 320 47 8 Multicast VLAN Comlabids 22 2 m rp ee DH LI EO Ra dt re heredi 320 47 8 1 Multicast VLAN Set Command 1 iore rt ertt rr HR ERRRR aE nnie nak 320 47 8 2 Multicast VLAN Delete Command ccccccccccccceceseseeeaeseaeeeseaeeeeeseeees 321 47 8 3 Multicast V
165. Microsoft Internet Explorer 1 x 2 Do you want to delete this channel in other ports too 8 Click OK The following screen appears Figure 26 Select Ports 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 9 0 G 0 O GO O GC C E 10 2 O O ENET4 select All None ENET2 7 LU None Apply Cancel 9 Click All and then click Apply The VC Setup screen is updated Figure 27 VC Setup VC Setup J xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Port ix Super Channel O VPI o vcl NN DS VC Profle DEFvAL v usvcPrfie H PVID fi 1 4094 Priority o v Add Cancel Index Port YPI VCI DS US VC Profile PVID Priority Select Show Port ALL Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied Copy Paste 10Select Super Channel to allow the channel to forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels Then enter the VPI and VCI that you use Leave the other default settings and click Add The VC Setup screen is updated Chapter 5 Initial Configuration 65 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 28 VC Setup OX GEC ED xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Port Super Channel O VPI o DS VC Profile DEFVAL US VC Profile PVID fi 1 4094 Priority o x VCI o Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port VPI VCI DS US VC Profile PVID Priority Select 1 1 1043 Vial 1 0 e Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied Copy Paste 11Select the new channel s Select rad
166. NIXNININIXIIMIMIXNIMINIMIRNIMIXIXMINIXIi i iii ieee AL JL C AL ALL ieee iii iii lt i local 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Alarm Event Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Status Click Alarm Status to go to a screen that displays the alarms that are currently in the system see Section 36 2 on page 231 Alarm Port Setup Click Alarm Port Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s See Section 36 5 on page 236 Index This field displays the index number of the alarm in the list Click this to specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 36 4 1 on page 235 Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms sys represents system alarms Condition Code This field displays the condition code number for the specific alarm message Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies 234 Chapter 36 Alarm AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 82 Alarm Event Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Facility This field displays the log facility local1 local7 on the syslog server where the system is to l
167. Numbers continued PORT NUMBER PIN NUMBER 41 USER 24 49 CO 11 36 12 USER 25 50 CO 12 37 Console Cable Pin Assignments The following diagrams and chart show the pin assignments of the console cable Figure 301 Console Cable RJ 11 Male Connector 0000 Figure 302 Console Cable DB 9 Female Connector 809000 0000 Table 116 Console Cable Connector Pin Assignments RJ 11 MALE DB 9 FEMALE Pin 2 TXD Pin 2 Pin 3 RXD Pin 3 Pin 4 GND Pin 5 430 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Numerics 2684 routed mode 390 A Access Control 221 actual rate 102 Address Resolution Protocol See ARP adsl alarmprofile commands 375 adsl commands 345 adsl linediag commands 367 adsl paepvc commands 399 ADSL Port Setup 101 119 adsl ppvc commands 385 ADSL profiles 101 default 103 adsl pvc commands 383 adsl rpvc commands 390 ADSL standard 134 adsl tlspvc commands 403 adsl vcprofile commands 381 aging time 94 alarm commands 279 Alarm Profile Screen 127 all digital mode 107 ALM LED troubleshooting 413 American Wire Gauge AWG 427 Annex 107 Annex L 107 Annex M 107 ARP 168 249 table 249 ATM F5 244 ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification 122 ATM QoS 121 ATM traffic class 122 126 authentication 88 default privilege level for administrators 89 modes for administrators 89 user 88 Index B back up configuration 241 bit allocation
168. PAIN Arte 21 5 planta sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 28033 Madrid Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S SWEDEN Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden support ua zyxel com 380 44 247 69 78 www ua zyxel com ZyXEL Ukraine UKRAINE 13 Pimonenko Str sales ua zyxel com 380 44 494 49 32 Kiev 04050 Ukraine UNITED KINGDOM support zyxel co uk 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only www zyxel co uk sales zyxel co uk 44 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK is the prefix number you enter to make an international telephone call Customer Support AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table of Contents COG MIG e M HM 3 KoG OS cce c VER EEC RADIX DRUG FURORE XR B E Te RE RA AR FUERON G bU FRAN EUR FVRRDUKRM UE 4 STORY WURDE ETT DULL DI 5 ZYXEL Limited Warranty soccer e trno t rehak sah cR CERE EQEER PORE FM RRK EDVEPOQE PMEREL VERE VERRRE RARE 6 Customer SAPPE uu eicere pen EDRIE GLRR Id aa Kr Dic Sd Ll DP GL doc aia ed aN 7 Table DI CONUSIES succ ad crass adn Di NE ONU ania NIRE N 9 List of FIgUre stet aka 25 Listor TODOS annona 33 Po AGG un 37 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the AAM1212 ssssssnssnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 39 UNES PE N na a
169. PPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI of the PPVC The VCI of the PPVC This PVC channel is for internal use The subscriber does not need to create this PVC The VPI of the individual PVC that you are adding to the PPVC The VPI setting can be 0 to 255 The VCI of the individual PVC that you are adding to the PPVC The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 with a VPI of 0 or 1 to 65535 if the VPI is not 0 The subscriber s device must create this PVC Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile The priority queue 0 7 to use for this PVCs traffic 7 is the highest priority This command adds a member PVC to a PPVC You must create the PPVC before you use this command to add a member Note Only the member PVCs need to be created on the subscriber s device The following example adds a PVC to a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 The PVC uses VPI 8 and VCI 36 It sets the DEFVAL profile for downstream traffic shaping and for upstream traffic policing It uses priority queue 2 Figure 266 PPVC Member Set Command Example ras adsl ppvc member set 5 8 35 8 36 DEFVAL DEFVAL 2
170. PVC is configured VPI VCl This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port 216 Chapter 31 ACL AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 32 Downstream Broadcast This chapter shows you how to allow or block downstream broadcast traffic 32 1 Downstream Broadcast Downstream broadcast allows you to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to specified VLANs on specified ports 32 2 Downstream Broadcast Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Downstream Broadcast Figure 113 Downstream Broadcast Downstream Broadcast Port 1 viAN o Blocking Table Port fall Index Port VLAN Select Delete Select AMI None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Downstream Broadcast LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings VLAN Specify the number of a VLAN on this entry s port to which you do not want to send broadcast traffic The VLAN must already be configured in the system Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Blocking Table
171. PVC settings Index This field displays the number of the PVC Click a PVC s index number to use the top of the screen to edit the PVC Note At the time of writing you cannot edit the VPI and VCI If you want to change them add a new PVC with the desired settings Then you can delete any unwanted PVCs Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the PVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to frames received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 210 Chapter 30 TLS PVC AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 31 ACL This chapter shows you how to set up ACL profiles on each port 31 1 Access Control Logic ACL Overview An ACL Access Control Logic profile allows the AAM1212 to classify and perform actions on the upstrea
172. Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel An asterisk denotes a super channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag An asterisk denotes a super channel Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 21 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Do the following to remove one or more PVCs Delete 1 Select a PVC s Select radio button 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK if you want to remove the PVC from other ports Click Cancel to only remove the one you selected Figure 52 Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup VC Setup Delete x 2 Do you want to delete this channel in other ports too Cancel 4 If you clicked OK the following screen appears 5 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 6 Click Apply to delete the channels Figure 53 Select Ports ENET1 select Au None ENET2 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 113 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 21 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Do the following to copy settings from one PVC to another port or ports Copy 1 Click the Select radio button of the PVC from which you want to Paste copy settings 2 Click Paste 3 The following screen appears 4 S
173. RMON History Detail Screen Use this screen to display detailed RMON history To open this screen click any index number in the RMON History screen 78 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 38 Port Statistics RMON History Detail c SEUSS Index Sample Index Interval Start Drop Events Octets Pkts BroadcastPkts MulticastPkts CRCAlignErrors UndersizePkts OversizePkts Fragments Jabbers Collisions Utilizations TOR mn ao oo oOo oO a oa The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Port Statistics RMON History Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION UP Click this to return to the previous screen Refresh Click this to update this screen Index This field displays the index of the sample interval Sample Index This field displays the sample number Interval Start This field displays the data sampling time Drop Events This field displays the total number of packets that were dropped in the sampling period Octets This field displays the total number of octets received transmitted in the sampling period Pkts This field displays the total number of good packets received transmitted in the sampling period BroadcastPkts This field displays the total number of broadcast packets received transmitted in the sampling period MulticastPkts This field displays the total number of multicast packets recei
174. RR ET AREE RA AR d MG Va ER dE B 85 Chapter 9 sir ACCO ui oe WR QURE Pe VERRE ERU AR VPE RE BAR MR OCA ava hav ga Pa Vos Ord OT Po Ves BEY Roteatuns 87 9 T User Account BEIBED viis eiudi pad cc cid Mie Casa Sbod Eebed sans Lola did bera ped eacus i 87 9 2 Authie nlicaliol SGEE s ceat rnb te arb btc pics uaa b Fa Red adc rx Ani 88 Chapter 10 MM rere Qi 91 101 GARP Timer Set m 91 10 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide WO SEH IO m 91 10 2 1 Standalone Switch ModE css ceurk o sadeedssesnasedinesasueudddcarccmtent iaiaaeaia 91 10 2 2 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example 92 10 2 3 Daisychain Swith MOda eT E 92 10 2 4 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example 93 10 3 Switch Setup SCRISI ETT IT E S LI 93 Chapter 11 abc 97 Chapter 12 ENEI Port Sop m 99 Chapter 13 XDSL Port Solupe en aeaa aa akoa 101 T3 1 ADSL Standards Overview ossa cis EM re parie iniaa aada EE XU QUEE REA kaada 101 13 2 Downstream and LIDSIEOSTII pisei ctor pb Feb Ye Eo ova SORU EFE epe RENE E RUNE EE EEUU kV UE IE 101 TOT ERIS rr Ure ent t bot oo rn o oso D o ol t Lave Ea 101 ux Mntccih NBb 0 EA ER 102 TAA FaSt I M 102 13 5 Configured Versus Actual Rate
175. S octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats128to255Octets This is the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 128 to 255 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats256to511Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 256 to 511 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats512to1023Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 512 to 1023 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats1024to1518Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You Clear Counter Set Interval may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 4 RMON History Screen Use this screen to display general informa
176. SL Port Downstream Carrier Command esses 355 52 1 16 PMM Parameters Command eese nennen nnn 356 52 1 17 Impulse Noise Protection Command 1 ertt enin e see 358 52 1 18 Amex L Enable Command ueris iive o a tor rn ta er I E nin 358 52 1 19 Annex L Disable Command pererin ape Epp e HE ere ER EEEa 359 521 20 Annex M Enable Command 225 5 2 4d pa nase eeni dioa 359 52 1 21 Annex M Disable Command 1 enn aae kk xata Ryu a kh kh d 360 52 1 22 Annex Enable Command 55 eer mirar E aE ia 360 52 1 23 Annex I Disable Combat 4155 2 m 3 ttt Lp tH ESEE a pRe cS i 360 52 2 DSL Port Statistics CODES s ciue eiat ERE pado REM b ga Ct FEE an Eb Pax GRE ii 361 De aT DSL Pert Show Command iios cina ind p eulI d VER XE EM Orc dept r db cric vbt LK hs 361 522 2 Linsdala Command 4 ert aer OR a o etc ap b cda 361 52 2 2 Linelrito C om lid us iokoi ai n t CREE PREMER ER XEABEE ER CO EEEn 363 SPANIEN T url M 364 52 2 5 15 Minute Performance Command 15 eeepc u ER aka age haa 365 52 40 1 Day FPerlormance Command 2 5 5 esee e rivi adu br INO EOM BER I0 i 367 92 2 7 Line Diagnostics Set COmb MBFIE ses Gers tation p LISSE RR pO a ER SNR RA 367 52 2 8 Line Diagnostics Get Command esee enda sna tha nata ta 368 52 2 9 Line Diagnostics Got 992 3 COmImanigd 24 toten terne euenire 370 B2 4 10 SELT Disgnoste Set COmmald scuro norit FREI ERR X48 372 52 2 11 SELT Diagnostic Get Command adexectiduess
177. Section 27 2 on page 192 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this routed PVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this routed PVC IP Enter the subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation NetMask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Index This field displays the number of the routed PVC Port This field displays the number of the DSL port on which the routed PVC is configured VPI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port VCI This field displays the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port IP This field displays the subscriber s IP address NetMask This field displays the bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s
178. Settings PR T 423 Appendix B AAM1212 SPechiCatiOns ccccsiceccscncscissorissresecasssasnsassnsssnsacdasneseansarseedssorsssersedvenaii 425 Appendix C Pin BSS DIL DE PEE TETTE CET 1 1 LES 429 j m 431 Table of Contents 23 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 24 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide List of Figures Figure T TUS ANCON ete oi nian a rea p bt D etus leto He 40 Fig re 2 C rbside Applicati see epe trn tek pnr Ee een c aS LP e EE e P FEE uno 40 Figure 3 Installation Push the AAM1212 into the IES 1000 seee 41 Figure 4 Installation Tighten Module Screws ese 42 Figure 5 Removal Loosen Module Screws eeeeeeesiseneee nennen nnn nnne nnt hh nnn 42 Figure 6 Removal Removing the AAM1212 from the IES 1000 42 draco darc MTM 43 Figure 9 stacking Multiple IES TOOU Units 1 ioianetr rre tn n FE rina ER PEE ndn ne rrr e doe FR eva 45 az zxdspsu 46 Figure 10 Telco 50 Cable with RJ 11 Connectors eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 47 Figure 11 Installation OUGPVAGW u iicuiite picco cider rro eer educi edet ue tad tr ettet 48 Figure 12 Installation Senao JN iios dde ebrei ha beet RR H1 N E Fe Ek e asta dex pk eua 49 Figure 13 One MDF for End user and CO Connections esee 50 Figure 14 Installatio
179. Start button then move your mouse pointer to Programs and then click Acrobat Reader e g is a shorthand for for instance and 1 e means that is or in other words e AAM1212 refers to the AAM1212 51 for ADSL over POTS Annex A and the AAM1212 53 for ADSL over ISDN Annex B Differentiation is made where needed The AAMI212 may be referred to as the AAM1212 the device or the system in this User s Guide Preface 37 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Graphics Icons Key AAM1212 Computer Server m Nasr ki S EE INI Computer DSLAM Gateway m e N Central Office ISP Internet Hub Switch EN Aib de w s um gg um e Firmware Naming Conventions A firmware version includes the model code and release number as shown in the following example Firmware Version V3 52 ABA 0 ABA is the model code ABA denotes the AAM1212 51 for ADSL over POTS Annex A ABP denotes the AAM1212 53 for ADSL over ISDN Annex B 0 is this firmware s release number This varies as new firmware is released Your firmware s release number may not match what is displayed in this User s Guide User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Ro
180. Statistics Screens 71 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast frames received of 64 to 1518 octets in length for non VLAN or 1522 octets for VLAN not including multicast frames Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account Rx mac pause This field shows the number of valid IEEE 802 3x Pause frames received on this port Rx fragments This field shows the number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths Rx error overrun This field shows how many times an Ethernet transmitter overrun occurred Rx error mru This field shows the number of received frames that were dropped due to exceeding the Maximum Receive Unit frame size Rx dropped This field shows the number of received frames that were received into the AAM1212 but later dropped because of a lack of system resources Rx jabber This field shows the number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors Rx error alignment This field shows the number of frames received that were 64 to 1518 non VLAN or 1522 VLAN octets long but contained an invalid FCS and a non integral number of octets Rx oversize
181. Syntax ras switch pktfilter show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the packet type filter settings on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example displays the packet type filter settings for DSL ports 1 and 2 V displays for the packet types that the AAM1212 is to accept on the port displays for packet types that the AAM1212 is to reject on the port packet types that are not listed are accepted When you use PPPoE only appears for all of the packet types With PPPoE only the AAM1212 rejects all packet types except for PPPoE packet types that are not listed are also rejected Figure 193 Packet Filter Show Command Example ras switch pktfilter show 1 2 V pass through filter out Don t care E Enable D Disable port pppoe ip arp netbios dhcp eapol igmp PPPoE Only cr SSS rv epum e 1 V V V V V V V D 2 V V V V Y V V D Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands 325 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 48 1 2 Packet Filter Set Command Syntax ras gt switch pktfilter set lt portlist gt filter where lt portlist gt filter You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of
182. T mentee 221 24 1 Access Control SCEE saroian P HIE a beue Een PERPE ed pupa 221 34 2 INCE SS Control CIV ETI 5 siscbn cereo I re RECO UEE naani aana o IE ER NEAR hai ERR ened 221 xc ce M 221 2413 L 0pported MIBS szerre at ss lk Op LH d RU OA 223 Kom Mc MI T 223 JAA SNMP SOEC T aeea 225 34 5 Service Access Contlal SORS 1eoiesn cra Fen R Ee akaandaa ER I ERE aad 225 34 5 Remote Management Screan 2 ccenidigquurberr esu ERE RES EURUKEERN SN M i nn enn 226 Chapter 35 Static ROUTING scissione ERR RYRKR ARR XRARRRAR da Rad Rex RAN Axa KARARAR UU toned Key EAT ReR RAN AR RA exi do 229 Chapter 36 PVCU e E E 231 29 1 TAB accote occa p ER EodI RE CREER E ope AER e DRE ER MEER loan Ru HR ERR BEER ERE RR E Ef 231 v ASIE ES IM TOTO 231 Rus uml ri m E t T 232 204 Mant Event Setup BOBO cucccepicieewie ncs ba dur Vas babe E end Rae LAM c EE ERA res IG 233 36 4 1 Edit Abra Event Setup SOFBDD 1i td ror d te o oeL ERE oa das 235 35 5 Alam Port Setup SCION ioa beoe eau erui ME ENEE Ea ER A ERA PUE MERE RR A 236 Chapter 37 MMPS OS eer 239 371 Maintenance SOTO EN Em 239 37 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen 1 si eratac uh tbc eh Pa d ODE LY RR d DEE LERRA dE uada 239 37 3 Restore Configuration SCHON cc ies secure inre icrt t tuve oe cct tetas c E es aber aa 240 27 485 Backing Up a Configuration FUE uas ttp ntu t tS a keessa 240 STA Lo
183. TER 54 ACL Commands An ACL Access Control Logic profile allows the system to classify and perform actions on the upstream traffic Use the ACL Profile commands to set up ACL profiles and the ACL Assignment commands to apply them to PVCs 54 1 ACL Profile Commands Use these commands to set up ACL profiles 54 1 1 ACL Profile Set Command Syntax ras switch acl profile set name rule action where name The name of the ACL profile lt rule gt The rule that classifies traffic flows See below lt action gt One or more actions to perform on the classified packets You can select one or more of the following actions e rate rate Sets the transmission rate 1 65535 in kbps for the matched traffic e rvlan lt rvlan gt Replaces the VLAN ID with this VLAN ID 1 4094 e rpri lt rpri gt Replaces the priority with this priority 0 7 of the matched packets deny Drops the packets This command configures an ACL rule to classify the upstream traffic and perform action s on the classified traffic The following lists the set of criteria you can configure for rules in ACL profiles The rules are listed in sequence from highest priority to lowest priority The criteria within a rule are position independent etype lt etype gt vlan vid etype etype smac mac etype etype dmac mac Chapter 54 ACL Commands 407 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide vlan
184. Table 113 Device Spegficalibl seccina RD E REF NEA TRE S PEPPER FREIE INA 425 Table 114 Wire Gauge Specifications ccecccccsseseccccceeesseceeenenseeceeeeeeseecceenensesees 427 Table 115 Hardware Telco 50 Connector Port and Pin Numbers 429 Table 116 Console Cable Connector Pin Assignments eseseessse 430 List of Tables 35 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 36 List of Tables AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the AAMI212 This preface introduces you to the AAM1212 and discusses the conventions of this User s Guide It also provides information on other related documentation About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your AAMI212 for its various applications Related Documentation ZyXEL Web Site Please go to http www zyxel com for product news firmware updated documents and other support materials Syntax Conventions Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example In Windows click Start Programs Acrobat Reader means first click the
185. The following example creates a PPPoA to PPPoE PVC 1 33 for port 1 The VLAN ID is 1 and the IEEE 802 1p priority is 0 This configuration is for the video service on the vom access concentrator The switch waits 10 seconds before terminating the PPPoE session Figure 285 PAE PVC Set Command Example ras adsl paepvc set 1 1 33 DEFVAL 1 0 acname vom srvcname video hellotime 10 400 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 8 3 PAE PVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc show portlist vpi vci where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC vci The VCI of the PAE PVC This command displays the PPPoA to PPPoE PVC settings for the specified port s or PVCs The following example displays the settings for port 1 Figure 286 PAE PVC Show Command Example ras adsl paepvc show 1 port vpi vci pvid pri htime US DS vcprofile acname srvcname 1 1 33 I 0 10 dsprofile DEFVAL usprofile acname vom srvcname video 53 8 4 PAE PVC Session Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc session lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL por
186. The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 index 16 aunique number for this setting start mcast Start of the multicast IP address range ip gt lt end mcast ip gt End ofthe multicast IP address range This command creates a multicast VLAN group The following example creates a multicast VLAN with VID 10 and group index 1 The multicast address range is 224 224 224 1 224 224 224 10 Figure 192 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan group set 10 1 224 224 224 1 224 224 224 10 47 8 7 Multicast VLAN Group Delete Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop mvlan group delete vid index where vid The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 index 1 16 a unique number for this setting This command removes the specified multicast VLAN group setting 47 8 8 Multicast VLAN Group Show Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop mvlan group show lt vid gt Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 323 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where vid The multicast VLAN ID 1 4094 This command displays a multicast to VLAN translation entry 324 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 48 Packet Filter Commands This chapter describes the packet filter commands 48 1 Packet Filter Commands Use the following packet filter commands to filter out specific types of packets on specific ports 48 1 1 Packet Filter Show Command
187. The number of DHCP Request packets on this port The number of DHCP Ack packets on this port The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit 44 4 6 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics dhcp snoop lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt Use this command to look at the DHCP snooping table on the specified port s The following example displays the settings of port 1 Figure 151 DHCP Snoop Statistics Command Example ras gt statistics dhcp snoop 1 port overflow mac Each field is described in the following table port overflow The selected DSL port number s The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit The MAC address of a client on this port to which the DHCP server assigned an IP address The IP address assigned to a client on this port 294 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN commands 45 1 Introduction to VLANs See Chapter 16 on page 141 for more backgr
188. This command sets the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s 284 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Note Use the alarm tablelist command to display alarm setting details The following example creates an alarm report entry that sets all system alarms to the major severity level and sends them to an SNMP server at the local 3 log facility Figure 146 Alarm Xedit Command Example ras alarm xedit sys all major local3 syslog 43 11 Alarm Cutoff Command Syntax ras alarm cutoff This command cancels an alarm This stops the sending of the alarm signal current This is useful in stopping an alarm if you have the alarm output connector pins connected to a visible or audible alarm The alarm entry remains in the system 43 12 Alarm Clear Command Syntax ras alarm clear This command erases the clearable alarm entries Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 285 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 286 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 44 DHCP Commands This chapter describes how to use the DHCP Relay and DHCP Snoop commands 44 1 DHCP Relay Commands Use these commands to configure the DHCP relay feature See Chapter 25 on page 183 for background information on DHCP relay 44 1 1 Show Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay show This command displays whether or not the DHCP relay feature is acti
189. Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Note Upstream traffic policing should be used in conjunction with the ATM shaping feature on the subscriber s device If the subscriber s device does not apply the appropriate ATM shaping all upstream traffic will be discarded due to upstream traffic policing PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for multicast VLAN or TLS PVC 200 Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 63 PPPoA to PPPoE continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag AC Name This field is optional Specify the hostname of a remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or if you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator In this case the AAM1212 checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU If there is a mismatch the AAM
190. U 12 296 254 3 VLAN Priority CORE 12i isct i pr pt AER x ERE EE REA Rt Rd 297 254143 VLAN Set Command 5 ettrt eta Eera AEA 297 45 4 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example esee 298 45 4 4 2 Forwarding Process Example sse 298 2544 5 VLAN Frame Type Command acuscecuccu dar pr br na eEER Up pne PE enr P ai 299 45410 VLAN CPU Show Command 1k oo ptr td e xor dE Fa disk kho Ease Ee Ras 299 454 7 VLAN CPU Set Command sranna kasd Ea Ya p MORE GBA iE Kb E Rada 300 45 4 8 Configuring Management VLAN Example sene 300 4549 VLAN Delete Command o arc nd s REPE Lore de dea 301 aoc VIESMIENBSEB s distet Sie tuanienouinu tete das tH EIUS 301 Zo VLAN DRAE cose rao dprars cur dabis Pak Le pupa c Salt ntedss QU endura secu Dre ER Ful e Ei 301 58 1 VLAM Show Command ususin aiad a Eea rada 302 Chapter 46 VS EXT DESTIN i 303 45 1 MAC Commands Overview 1 ioi na rhe qx MER EET En NN KE n AX EM ME DEP ANRA 303 40 2 MAC Filler CommMandS anyonik iE ANNE 303 46 2 1 MAC Filter Show Command iiic eerie n inenen nn aper EAERI 303 40 2 2 MAC Filter Enable Command 1 2 5 niic trei cnet rebus bna ena 304 46 2 3 MAC Filter Disable Command _ ccccecececeeecesececsesesanesaessneeesees 304 46 2 4 MAC Filter Mode Command u ccccccccecccceecececesceseeeneneaeaeeeenseeseseeees 304 46 2 5 MAC Filler Set CoOnmiiapd cte c adi s ERE Let a eta Sa urea 305 46 2 6 MAC Filter Delete Command
191. User s Guide Figure 1 MTU Application SE me 1 2 2 Curbside Application The AAM1212 can be used by an Internet Service Provider ISP in a street cabinet to form a mini POP Point of Presence to provide broadband services to residential areas that are too far away from the ISP to avail of DSL services Residents need a DSL modem connected as shown in the previous figure Figure 2 Curbside Application Internet 40 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the AAM1212 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Installing and Removing the AAM1212 This chapter shows you how to install the AAMI212 in the IES 1000 and how to remove it 2 1 Installing the AAM1212 in the IES 1000 1 Hold the AAMI212 with the network ports facing you 2 Insert it into an empty slot on the front of the IES 1000 Push the AAMI212 into the IES 1000 until the front of the AAMI212 is flush with the IES 1000 Figure 3 Installation Push the AAM1212 into the IES 1000 Note The front of the AAM1212 must be flush with the front of the IES 1000 3 Turn the two screws on the front of the AAMI212 clockwise to secure the AAMI212 to the chassis as shown below Chapter 2 Installing and Removing the AAM1212 41 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 4 Installation Tighten Module Screws 159 sete eee ie ieee ses uer C OOD IL m J mm COO l a i OOO SYSCONSOL
192. a high medium or low privilege level for each command You can also choose to deny access to the AAM1212 Select high to allow the administrator to use all commands including the lower privilege commands High privilege commands include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system and resetting the factory defaults Select middle to allow the administrator to use middle or low privilege commands Select low to allow the administrator to use only low privilege commands Low privilege commands are read only Select deny to prevent the administrator from accessing the AAM1212 Chapter 9 User Account 89 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 90 Chapter 9 User Account AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Switch Setup The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global device features 10 1 GARP Timer Setup GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network devices to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave messa
193. aaien naea aia Fen d x e ERE A ER ER Np d RS 215 Table T0 AGL Prolo MIB 21 5 pP HEEL EE IP E 216 Table 71 Downstream BIGAdBeSst Loss se tto aaau aa ER IM ub ot IIR Ere LER Id 217 BH c c c TENE 219 Table 73 Access Control Summary uisssseeeie nci ket ec rire pco Dev ve Eee Tid 221 Table T4 SNMP Com Winans eiae d ovt o ao oo on Lot eR nad dun 222 Table TO3SNMIPV2 TIRE auksionida a Ea th ae am piv tu Ea 223 Epic e 225 Table 77 Semice fesses Control iussus pes EH wanveevans CEN put aa EPA a CU eS REX XE ERR RATE 226 Table 78 Remote Management Secured Client Setup 227 Tate 7 iste Faun aeons allan ER end a 229 Table 80 Alarm Status eT TR 231 Table 8T Alam Deserp ODS aauseescrieiis eppeebuis e eve quu ta el E Faber AI RI oL PI IENEE Ep rri E RUpLdE 232 34 List of Tables AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 62 Alarm Event SONG iuiescsssitapeect t Db eR an EU Eoo L I POR Ebo pese odas 234 Table B3 Alarm Event Setup Edit 12 riecht LEER Cep trt Ya FERRE C Un x FERRE CHR iiSi 235 Table 84 Alarm Port Sep ies ipprnset n usua CNN tasa anaE Eo bx AVE VP rct E EU ede 236 HC cS gcncrc rm 244 Tahle 96 MAG TIDS E 248 Tabe STARP TADIG e naniii ek Oeean Eaa 250 Tope SE NII sanserne ianen i EEEE NEEN EEE EEEE RASER 254 Wale OS Ley 0 aaa TOUT 271 Tabte OU Lug Moraes aua RG 272 Table 91 General Alarm Command Parameters sse 279 Table 92 Log ROTI 282 Table 93 Filename CODVOlllo
194. abber This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an incorrect FCS value Tx oversize This field shows the number of frames transmitted that were bigger than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 VLAN and contained a valid FCS packet lt 64 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 64 octets or less in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits 72 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION packet 65 127 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 65 to 127 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 128 255 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 128 to 255 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 256 511 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 256 to 511 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 512 1023 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 512 to 1023 octets in length this includes FCS octets but
195. able 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P annexl disable lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Turns off the H H Annex L feature on the specified port s annexl show lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Displays the Annex M L L feature setting for the specified port s annexi enable lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Turns on the H H Annex feature on the specified port s annexi disable lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Turns off the H H Annex feature on the specified port s annexi show lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Displays the Annex M L feature setting for the specified port s annexm enable lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Turns on the H H Annex M feature on the specified port s annexm disable lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Turns off the H H Annex M feature on the specified port s annexm show lt portlist gt AAM1212 51 Displays the Annex M L M feature setting for the specified port s sra enable lt portlist gt Turns on Seamless Rate H H Adaptation SRA ADSL2 on the specified port s sra disable lt portlist gt Turns off SRA ADSL2 on the H H specified port s sra show lt portlist gt Displays the SRA ADSL2 setting M L for the specified port s pmm enable lt portlist gt L2 L3 Turns on the Power Management H H feature on the specified port s pmm disable lt portlist gt Turns off the Power Management H H feature on
196. able the specified IGMP count limit on this port Active Click this to enable the specified IGMP count limits on the selected ports Inactive Click this to disable the specified IGMP count limits on the selected ports Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 17 8 IGMP Port Info Screen Use this screen to display the current number of IGMP related packets received on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP IGMP Port Info 156 Chapter 17 IGMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 76 IGMP Port Info IGMP Portinfo g IGMP Status Show Port fall Port Group Count Query Count Join Count Leave Count 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 IGMP Port Info LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 150 Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field shows each port number Group Count This is the total number of Group packets received on this port Query Count This is the total number of Query packets received on this port Join Count This is the total number of Join packets received on this port Leave Count This is the total number of Leave packets received on this port
197. ad Fac y DoD seneke 241 Table of Contents 15 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide F d Cv mE ril m 241 ara Command LI FIP sirasini auda E pauca bid c OR d t ep LE SELL b KD Et 242 Chapter 38 BICDJuli A 243 SOA Diagnostic SCHOGN 243 Chapter 39 MAG TADIG scinn 247 39 1 Introduction to MAC Table 125 cessas Coran kh cL p x di rib pa act 247 29 2 MAC Table OPERI auscebsstumuetaebtubidte ee iive Eee E aE E ceo pi UNE ROS HE oii Eee Ec A REO EEUEdA 248 Chapter 40 ARP TSbIBiossrinEiek i eei eaa a Me AE M asm xat iaEx SPUR RNC EE RAE 249 40 1 Introduelion to ARP Table 1 cca dae ida c bi a d edi treat 249 ZU 1How ARE UOI ean tattered ime Gee tla trait iate eodd 249 302 ARP Table SGEE 2e eot adea toL basa ES ERR EL EE at ka a Pe CE H E abe e a oet ds 249 Chapter 41 LOIDIISBS conia pur Ee EN edness eg E EORUM 251 41 1 Command Line Interface Overview ssssennnnnennn nn 251 41 2 Commend Pvilege Levels usus ceccseneseessveerscacuee stescea crt an epe Ide 251 41 3 Saving Your COMMENT uices ita vedo acer iis dore IA E ademas EAM RIE REO EEE ENA 252 ME ARD AIDA ER OR ET TRE 252 Chapter 42 Command Examples 55a imas ku obe ku ka RR ieies A S KOREAN RR GRAL ARR RRAM RA AR NERA RA a iis 271 42 1 Command Examples Overview i oo rt Ip rare ERER YI EXER PARE Ad n i ia
198. ad II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you 38 Preface AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know the AAM1212 This chapter introduces the main features and applications of your AAM1212 1 1 Overview The AAM1212 ADSL Access Module is an ADSL multiplexer network module designed to be installed in the IES 1000 IP based DSLAM chassis The AAMI212 aggregates traffic from 12 ADSL lines to two Ethernet ports to connect ADSL subscribers to the Internet You can use the built in web configurator to manage and configure the AAMI212 In addition the AAM1212 can also be managed via Telnet the console port or third party SNMP management See Appendix B on page 425 for a complete list of features 1 2 Applications These are the main applications for the AAM1212 Provide Internet access and multimedia services for Multiple Tenant Units MTU Other applications include telemedicine surveillance systems remote servers systems cellular base stations and high quality teleconferencing 1 2 1 MTU Application The following diagram depicts a typical application of the AAMI212 with DSL modems in a large residential building or multiple tenant unit MTU This application leverages existing phone line wiring to provide Internet access to all tenants and the tenants can continue to use the existing phone services Chapter 1 Getting to Know the AAM1212 39 AAM1212 51 53 Series
199. ae eenicetucs ubere ernes 399 53 9 PPPoA to PPPOE PAE Commands i2 rrr err I rh dE td id ond d 399 53 8 1 PAE PVC Delete Command 55 oper Rr EERI irr ie n ECKE EREYR ER ARENS 399 og m s PAE PYG Set COMM dusdisesenpi euuiuciiad en ia eod br ciate 400 53 8 3 PAE PVC Show Command 2er inina aana npa aab Uk incendie epa aui 401 53 9 4 PAE PVC Session Command cessare pet rp Ex e REB ER PRI XR EE EA NEARRRQEIARR 401 52 8 5 PAE PVC Counter CONFUSE etr tent nra t d td 402 53 9 Transparent LAN Service TLS Commands sse 403 53 9 1 TLS PYC Delete Command uses aco arr Gaia dii prc S Fewa cad 403 Bag TLS PVC Sel CONMTBATIE uda tot koe daa A 404 53 9 3 TLS PVC Show Command iussus ketetuauk eulx anner DIA EERRATYRUMER CEN Coa EK CHOR 404 ACL esnLiilqe 407 541 AGL Profle Gommans 15 Beto p t recti oed dese bec eei e ad 407 54 1 1 ACL Profile Set Command 1 Lees scence heals sad tide Rok bx XE aai era 407 54 1 2 ACL Profle Delete Command 12 25 2 x corte ierra e iE 409 22 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 54 1 3 ACL Profile Show Map Command 155 trn rrt hne honra ehh 409 54 14 ACL Profile Show COmmand iaeussxcsade nk rh datori Ee ee bed AER a detta EN tac 409 54 2 ACL Assignment COImITIIES 4 cci rcc crore piinaa isinna sainia 410 54 2 1 ACL Assignment Set Command 22 c tentaret Let Yen pet n Ma pe n rada 410 54 2 2 ACL Assignment Delete Command
200. age 187 DHCP Snoop Status Click DHCP Snoop Status to open the screen where you can look at or clear the current DHCP snooping table on each port see Section 26 3 on page 188 Show Port Select a port for which you wish to view information Port This field displays the selected DSL port number s Discover This field displays the number of DHCP Discover packets on this port Offer This field displays the number of DHCP Offer packets on this port Request This field displays the number of DHCP Request packets on this port Ack This field displays the number of DHCP Acknowledge packets on this port Overflow The DHCP server can assign up to 32 IP addresses at one time to each port This field displays the number of requests from DHCP clients above this limit Clear Click Clear to delete the information the AAM1212 has learned about DHCP packets This resets every counter in this screen Chapter 26 DHCP Snoop 189 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 190 Chapter 26 DHCP Snoop AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 27 2684 Routed Mode This chapter shows you how to set up 2684 routed mode service 27 1 2684 Routed Mode Use the 2684 formerly 1483 routed mode to have the AAMI212 add MAC address headers to 2684 routed mode traffic from a PVC that connects to a subscriber device that uses 2684 routed mode You also specify the gateway to which the AAM1212 sends the traffic a
201. aii 271 HAET CONO S a ETE 271 22 4 1 Log Show Command ecce ccu si dc teni aai 271 d2 LOO FONE CT C MET 271 Ae 54 LO Wi c r 212 45 e Log GIBT OIRTISE usccsspcrastbtp ptr d PEPEELI HE boi EXE HELP ER REP LIU OH 274 22 3 9 Inter Show Command 1st rabbia aka n exu b Ebene EE ends 274 A250 eoo COMINGS sorserien ved adde EO AIDS Fabi qct Decl OaE dS 215 4241 1 Isolation Show Command 2 ooi etr oor oe ae sita e Eee es a tas 275 4232 Isolation Enable Command oco nepeceetrte ber ecn eta Epor Gba be Feud eb Po aia 275 42 4 3 Isolatiori Disable Command 22 e teer ptas te ttibbn dae erp n neHs sates dansdeceivintevecieas 2 5 42 5 Statistics Monitor Command L1iiucea cta kept d e Cha dct Rt eios bk c itia 275 426 Statistics Port COIITat x c d REI REPRE E RREPH DI eio RUIN DEED QR PR DIDA RPRRUIS 276 16 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Chapter 43 Alarm COMANO S Lunae risque aC or KE gin RC beds bug cad shana RCM asinine 279 2x1 ABL DOR sasarina iada anaie aaa Lb Esci ada 279 43 2 General Alarm Command Parameters sss 279 238 Amm Show C mmand Lucien arbor bring aA EINE SEL ia A RED CEN DEE YEARS 279 4344 Alarm Port Show Command 2 opa gari bottes ERE nro pi EE ERRETCN FEARS SRM E FRED RIA UP DIE 280 AD 5 PURITY Port Se Command aui ioo od ER E ner oo po Or cee ees 281 43 6 Alarm Tablelist Command sse ener 281 AST GO lig m 282
202. allow frames from other MAC addresses Active Select this check box to turn on MAC filtering for a port MAC This field lists the MAC addresses that are set for this port Delete Click Delete to remove a MAC address from the list Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 170 Chapter 21 MAC Filter AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Spanning Tree Protocol This chapter introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 22 1 RSTP and STP RSTP adds rapid reconfiguration capability to STP The AAM1212 supports RSTP and the earlier STP RSTP and STP detect and break network loops and provide backup links between switches bridges or routers They allow a device to interact with other RSTP or STP aware devices in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Integrated Ethernet Switch uses RSTP by default but can still operate with STP switches although without RSTP s benefits The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value MAC address Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port It is assigned accord
203. an IGMP filter profile The following example configures an IGMP filter profile named voice with a range of multicast IP addresses index 1 from 224 1 1 10 to 224 1 1 44 Figure 178 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command Example ras switch igmpfilter profile set testl 1 224 1 1 10 224 1 1 44 47 3 4 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command Syntax ras switch igmpfilter profile delete name where name The name of an IGMP filter profile This command removes an IGMP filter profile The following example removes the voice IGMP filter profile Figure 179 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command Example ras gt switch igmpfilter profile delete voic 47 3 5 IGMP Filter Profile Show Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpfilter profile show lt name gt where lt name gt The name of an IGMP filter profile or all of the IGMP filter profiles lt gt This command displays an IGMP filter profile s settings 312 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the voice IGMP filter profile s settings Figure 180 IGMP Filter Show Command Example ras switch igmpfilter profile show voice profile index startip endip voice T 224 1 1 10 224 1 1 44 voice 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 voice 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 voice 9 0 0 0 0
204. an gvrp lt portlist gt Set the port s to enable or disable H H lt enable disable gt gvrp Chapter 41 Commands 265 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P vlan frametype lt portlist gt Sets the specified DSL port to H H lt all tag gt accept tagged untagged or Ethernet frames or both Note enet1 enet2 are fixed at all vlan cpu show Displays the VLAN ID of the M Management VLAN vlan cpu set lt vid gt Sets the VLAN ID of the H Management VLAN mac flush Clears learned MAC addresses H H from the forwarding table mac agingtime show Displays the MAC aging out time M L period mac agingtime set lt sec Sets the MAC aging out time H H 10 10000 0 disabl period ed gt mac antispoofing Show the MAC antispoofing status M L show mac antispoofing Turns on the MAC antispoofing H H enable mac antispoofing Turns off the MAC antispoofing H H disable mac count show portlist Displays the system s current M L MAC address count settings mac count enable lt portlist gt Turns on the MAC address count H H filter for an ADSL port s mac count disable lt portlist gt Turns off the MAC address count H H filter for an ADSL port s mac count set lt portlist gt lt count gt Sets the MAC address count filter H H for an ADSL port s mac filter show po
205. an specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PAE PVC lt DS vcprofile Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s upstream vepronatel traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile lt pvid gt 1 4094 the VLAN Identifier to add to Ethernet frames that the system routes using this PVC lt priority gt Set the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 to add to the traffic that uses this PVC lt acname gt This field is optional Specify the hostname of a remote access concentrator 1f there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or that you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator srvcname This field is optional Specify the name of the service that uses this PVC This must be a service name that you configure on the remote access concentrator lt hellotime gt 0 600 specify the timeout in seconds for the PPPoE session Enter 0 if there is no timeout This command creates a PPPoA to PPPoE PVC to allow communication between the ATM CPE and Ethernet network BRAS segments The PVC is mapped to a PPPoE session that connects to the specified BRAS
206. and you might have to use the console to reconfigure the system 37 4 Backing Up a Configuration File Backing up your device configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Click Management Maintenance and do the following to save your device s configuration to your computer 1 Right click the Click here Backup Text Configuration link and click Save Target As Or Click the Click here Backup Text Configuration link and then click File Save As 240 Chapter 37 Maintenance AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 2 In the Save As screen choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer Note See the CLI chapters to edit the configuration text file Note You can change the dat file to a txt file and still upload it back to the AAM1212 37 5 Load Factory Defaults Use this function to clear all device configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults Note Warning Restoring the default configuration deletes all the current settings It is recommended to back up the configuration file before restoring the default configuration To do this click Management Maintenance Click here Restore Default Configuration Figure 128 Restore Default Configuration
207. and controls how the AAM1212 routes DHCP requests The AAM1212 can route DHCP requests to the active DHCP server for the VLAN or it can route DHCP requests to all DHCP servers set up for the VLAN 44 2 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 1 Circuit ID Use the following commands to configure the DHCP relay Option 82 agent information feature sub option 1 This feature applies regardless of whether or not the DHCP relay is on Chapter 44 DHCP Commands 289 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 44 2 1 Option 82 Sub option 1 Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay option82 enable This command turns on the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 1 feature 44 2 2 Option 82 Sub option 1 Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay option82 disable This command turns off the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 1 feature 44 2 3 Option 82 Sub option 1 Set Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay option82 set lt relay info gt where xrelay info gt Upto 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the AAM1212 to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the name of the AAM1212 or the ISP This command adds the specified information for the relay agent 44 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Agent Information Sub option 2 Remote ID Use the following commands to configure the DHCP relay Option 82 age
208. andalone Switch Mode Example The following graphic shows AAM1212 1 and 2 connected to each other and the Ethernet backbone switch 3 in a network topology that creates a loop The AAM1212 are using the standalone switch mode and have RSTP enabled In this example both AAM1212 have port isolation turned on Communications between A and B must first go through another switch 3 in the figure However A and B can communicate with C without their communications going through another switch or router Figure 43 Port Isolation with Standalone Switch Mode Example Internet 10 2 3 Daisychain Switch Mode Daisychain switch mode sets the AAM1212 to use Ethernet port one ENET 1 as an uplink port to connect to the Ethernet backbone and Ethernet port two ENET 2 to connect to another daisychained or subtending AAMI212 The daisychain switch mode is recommended for use in a network topology that does not have loops When you daisychain multiple AAM1212 they must all be set to daisychain mode Daisychain switch mode with port isolation enabled blocks communications between subscriber ports on an individual AAM1212 and between the subscribers of any daisychained AAM1212 see Figure 44 on page 93 for an example Use the same port isolation setting on all AAM1212 that you set up in a daisychain 92 Chapter 10 Switch Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 10 2 4 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example In the example b
209. ands 251 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 41 3 Saving Your Configuration Use the following command to save your configuration when you are done with a configuration session ras config save Note Do not turn off your AAM1212 while saving your configuration This command saves all system configurations to nonvolatile memory You must use this command to save any configuration changes that you make otherwise the AAMI212 returns to its default settings when it is restarted Save your changes after each configuration session Nonvolatile memory refers to the AAM1212 s storage that remains even if the AAMI212 s power is turned off Run time memory is lost when the AAMI212 s power is turned off 41 4 Commands The following table lists commands that you can use with the AAM1212 The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command H for high M for middle or L for low and the equivalent in the web configurator H for high or L for low Table 88 Commands CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P Sys info show Displays general system L L information info hostname hostname Sets the system name M L info location lt location gt Sets location information M L info contact lt contact gt Sets contact person information M L reboot show sec cancel Sets the reboot timer or displays H H the timer and remaining time for
210. ands to configure virtual channel profiles 53 2 1 Show Virtual Channel Profile Command Syntax ras adsl vcprofile show vcprofile where vcprofile The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters Displays the settings of the specified virtual channel profile or all of them if you do not specify one 53 2 2 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Syntax ras adsl vcprofile set lt vcprofile gt lt vc llc gt ubr cbr pcr lt cdvt gt ras adsl vcprofile set lt vcprofile gt vc llc vbr rt vbr nrt vbr pcr lt cdvt gt scr bt where vcprofile The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters You cannot change the DEFVAL or DEFVAL VC profiles vc 1lc The type of encapsulation vc or llc Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 381 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide ubr cbr The ubr unspecified bit rate or cbr constant bit rate or ATM traffic class lt pcr gt Peak Cell Rate 150 to 300000 the maximum rate cells per second at which the sender can send cells cdvt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay number of cells 0 to 255 cells or means 0 lt vbr rt The real time vbr or non real time nrt vbr Variable Bit Rate YPC LE Evan ATM traffic class lt scr gt The Sustained Cell Rate sets the average cell
211. annel The AAM1212 forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to have this channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for a channel on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 111 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 21 VC Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Note Upstream traffic policing should be used in conjunction with the ATM shaping feature on the subscriber s device If the subscriber s device does not apply the appropriate ATM shaping all upstream traffic will be discarded due to upstream traffic policing PVID Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this channel Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 8
212. ao96 32 4096 Kbps 4 Kbps resolution default 4096 Min L2 Rate EN 32 4088 Kbps 4 Kbps resolution default 32 L to L2 Rate he lt Min L2 Rate 2 and gt 16 Kbps default 6 US Carrier 0 53 DS Carrier 32 255 DS Carrier1 256 511 Mask Mask1 00000000 00000000 oo000000 00000000 joo000000 O0000000 00000000 O0000000 jJO0000000 00000000 oo000000 oo000000 00000000 00000000 jooo00000 O0000000 00000000 Mask2 bit 1 indicates the bin is masked off Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 xDSL Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Last Page Click this to return to the previous screen General Setup Active Select this check box to turn on this ADSL port Customer Info Enter information to identify the subscriber connected to this ADSL port You can use up to 31 printable ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens Customer Tel Enter information to identify the telephone number of the subscriber connected to this ADSL port You can use up to 15 ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens Profile Select a profile of ADSL settings such as the transfer rate interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings to assign to this port Use the Port Profile screen to configure port profiles see Chapter 14 on page 119 Mode Select the port s ADSL operational mode Select the mode that the subscriber s device use
213. aping uerb RR been ae be eria 124 FOUS GO VO o c M M 125 Foure T Alami PMS aca vse aa cd evs a hecha ane EA SEENEN SEa 127 Figure GZ IGMP Filler Prolo icio pk pror ESM pRR PNREREECEP UNE PRAEPERU ena eae 130 Figure 89 XDSL Lipe Ple BIO se rrt i a bra e Ed b erp c uda 133 Figure G4 XDSL Performante ites asd sts pale e Doha CELERE Le ha d pO DELE pd DA e op 135 Figure 65 XDSL Line Dala C 138 Figure pe VLAN STAG m 143 Fome cate VLAN DONNE senkop S 144 Figure 68 VLAN Port Seng iicoiiosece eo coriis scitote tti deine Lati dete sc ENEA 146 Foure CJ aah PONE iun hoan eda D beoe pA PEN ADAD EDGE BEA HEAR ind 147 Figure 70 IGMP Proxy Network Example secscenunsensnnniinencnnnnnniin 150 recente FU IGS SIRS ee c 151 Fur 72 IGMP Bandwidth sca uedodcc cet pn tei appo beh Fab va e CEU ppeaonaeeaaeaiemieaaadddn sawed 152 Figure 73 Bandwidth Port Setup oc isien ierit eie rnini td ot kc eire ha 154 Figure 73 Uy pee LY zs aro ee ee DR ere SE rca So ec es a Est error re 154 Figare 5 MIS CODI cs ood ea Ebrei e Ds eu ade fen a EEPRE Puta rl vd a Freue Pe iua Re 156 Figure 76 tl Port uj e 157 Figure T7 IGMP PON OEOBB ud satan sth eb Ge kan ru ada koh ku ala bea AARE AENEA 157 Figure fo static reta ES 159 Figure TI MYLAN S US aa s b o dto p C D etia rd 161 Figure 80 MYLAN Setup aici senda Pata ork eu Epa dicke aan Kb apa oa pA BEDAE Eana Ria
214. ateway Click Routed Gateway to go to the screen where you can configure gateway settings see Section 27 5 on page 196 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to configure settings Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the System receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this routed PVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this routed PVC IP Enter the subscriber s CPE WAN IP address in dotted decimal notation NetMask The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s WAN IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Make sure that the routed PVC s subnet does not include the AAM1212 s IP address DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned
215. ation by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management When the AAMI212 forwards traffic to a subscriber port it tries to forward traffic to a normal PVC with the same VLAN ID If this PVC does not exist the AAM1212 uses the super channel instead This applies to all downstream traffic not just multicast traffic It is suggested to use a super channel for multicast VLAN If a normal PVC is used and the multicast VLAN ID is not the same as the PVC s VID the AAMI212 does not forward traffic to this PVC even if the subscriber s port has joined the multicast VLAN Since the AAMI212 might change the subscriber s VLAN ID to the multicast VLAN ID both the subscriber s port and the Ethernet port should join the multicast VLAN 19 2 MVLAN Status Screen Use this screen to look at a summary of all multicast VLAN on the AAMI212 To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN Figure 79 MVLAN Status ANuWuENEICUNENND MYLAN Setup MVLAN Group The Number Of MVLAN 1 Status Name VID 8 89 10 11 12 ENETI ENET2 Index Enable example 5 UU UU UT TS STI LU TUT MU DUM Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN 161 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 MVLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN Setup Click MVLAN Setup to open the MVLAN Setup screen where you can configure basic settings and port members
216. ause the AAMI212 does not send a frame to the port from which it came The AAM1212 also does not forward frames to forbidden ports 5 If after looking at the SVLAN the AAM1212 does not have any ports to which it will send the frame it drops the frame 45 4 5 VLAN Frame Type Command Syntax ras switch vlan frametype lt portlist gt lt all tag gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 gt You can also include a range of DSL ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt all tag Use tag to have the specified port s accept only incoming Ethernet frames that have a VLAN tag Use a11 to have the specified port s accept both tagged and untagged incoming Ethernet frames This command sets the specified DSL ports to accept VLAN tagged Ethernet frames or both tagged and untagged Ethernet frames Note The AAM1212 accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames on the Ethernet ports The following example sets the AAM1212 to accept only VLAN tagged Ethernet frames on DSL port 3 Figure 156 VLAN Frame Type Command Example ras switch vlan frametype 3 tag 45 4 6 VLAN CPU Show Command Syntax ras switch vlan cpu show Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 299 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command displays the management VLAN CPU You can only use ports that are members of this management VLAN in order t
217. ays the IP address of the gateway VID This field displays the VLAN Identifier that the system adds to Ethernet frames that it sends to this gateway Priority This field displays the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 that is added to traffic sent to this gateway Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Clicking Delete saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode 197 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 198 Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 28 PPPoA to PPPoE This chapter shows you how to set up the AAM1212 to convert PPPoA frames to PPPoE traffic and vice versa 28 1 PPPoA to PPPoE Overview Before migrating to an Ethernet infrastructure a broadband network might consist of PPPoA connections between the CPE devices and the DSLAM and PPPoE connections from the DSLAM to the Broadband Remote Access Server BRAS The following figure shows a network example Figure 103 Mixed PPPoA to PPPoE Broadband Network Example In order to allow communication between the end points the CPE devices and the BRAS you need to configure the DSLAM the AAM1212 to tra
218. ber gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt ip gt lt netmask gt Delete RPVC routing subnet on a port H H 256 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P rpvc route show lt portlist gt Display RPVC routing subnet on a M L port rpvc arp agingtime Display RPVC ARP proxy aging H H show time rpvc arp agingtime lt sec Set RPVC ARP proxy aging time M L set 10 10000 0 disabl ed gt rpve arp flush Flush RPVC ARP proxy table H H rpvc arp show Show RPVC ARP proxy table M L paepvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Delete a PPPoAoE PVC M H lt vci gt paepve set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Create modify a PPPoAoE PVC M H lt vci gt lt DS lt acname gt access concentrator vcprofile US name veprofile gt lt pvid gt lt sryvcname gt service name ducis Ge lacnane lt time gt 0 600 in unit of second lt string32 gt er c3 faevenana eae ala srvcname lt string32 gt ee hellotime lt time gt paepvc show lt portlist gt detail Display PPPoAoE PVC setting by L L paepvc session lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Display PPPoAoE PVC session L L vci status paepvc counter lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Display PPPoAoE PVC counter L L lt vci gt tlspvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Delete a TLS PVC M H lt vci gt
219. bidden l TxTagging Fixed C Forbidden l TxTagging Fixed C Forbidden l TxTagging Fixed C Forbidden l TxTagging Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 MVLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN Status Click MVLAN Status to open the MVLAN Status screen where you can view a summary of all multicast VLAN on the AAM1212 see Section 19 2 on page 161 MVLAN Group Click MVLAN Group to open the MVLAN Group screen where you can configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 4 on page 164 VID This field shows the VLAN ID of each multicast VLAN Click it to edit its basic settings and port members in the fields below Active This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Yes or inactive No Name This field shows the name of this multicast VLAN Delete Select the check boxes of the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button You cannot delete a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh Active Select this if you want the multicast VLAN to be active Clear this if you want the multicast VLAN to be inactive Name Enter a descriptive name for the multicast VLAN The name can be 1 31 printable ASCII characters long Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN t
220. c VLAN to configure ports to dynamically join a VLAN group or permanently assign ports to a VLAN group or prohibit ports from joining a VLAN group see Section 16 4 on page 144 Port The port numbers identify the AAM1212 s ports PVID Type the Port VLAN ID PVID from 1 to 4094 The AAM1212 assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port Priority Select an IEEE 802 1p priority to assign to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port GVRP Select this check box if the AAM1212 should use GVRP to automatically register and configure VLAN membership Acceptable Frame Select All to have the port accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames Type Select Tag Only to have the port only accept incoming frames that have a VLAN tag Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 146 Chapter 16 VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 34 VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Copy port Paste Do the following to copy settings from one port to another port or ports 1 Select the number of the port from which you want to copy se
221. can be used in conjunction with IGMP snooping proxy to allow multicast MAC address es that are not learned by IGMP snooping or IGMP proxy Use static multicast to pass routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF 18 2 Static Multicast Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Static Multicast Figure 78 Static Multicast xima The Number Of Static Multicast 1 S Page 1 of 1 Previous Reload Next Index Y Y Y Adding new entry a Add MAC Address 7 8 g 01 00 5e 12 34 56 Join ail Leave All Delete v y Y Y Y Y To join leave a multicast group click the port status The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Static Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of static multicast entries configured on the AAM1212 Static Multicast Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all status Next information cannot be seen in one screen Reload Click this button to refresh the screen The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the IGMP groups Index This is the static multicast group index number Chapter 18 Static Multicast 159 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 42 Static Multicast continued
222. can map to the 8 priority levels for outgoing DSL traffic Traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through the device faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates IEEE 802 1p Priority 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Priority 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Priority 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Priority 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Priority 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Priority 2 This is for spare bandwidth Priority 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Priority O Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non
223. ce s WAN IP 192 168 10 200 in this example must be in the same subnet as the gateway s IP address 192 168 10 102 in this example The AAMI212 s management IP address can be any IP address it doesn t have any relationship to the WAN IP address or routed gateway IP address The AAMI212 s management IP address should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the WAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device It is suggested that you set the netmask of the subscriber s WAN IP address to 32 to avoid this problem The AAM1212 s management IP address should not be in the same subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain It will make the AAMI212 confused if the AAMI212 receives a packet with this IP as destination IP The AAMI212 s management IP address also should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the LAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device Make sure you assign the IP addresses properly Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 391 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide n general deployment the computer must set the CPE device s LAN IP address 10 10 10 10 in this example as its default gateway The subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain must be unique Use the following command sequence to configure the AAMI212 for this example set up Figure 272 2684 Routed Mode Commands Example ras adsl rpvc gateway set 192 168 10 102 1 ras adsl rpvc set 1 8 35 DEFVAL 192 168 10 200 32 192 168 10 102
224. changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Close Click Close to exit the screen without saving your changes 36 5 Alarm Port Setup Screen Use this screen to set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Port Setup Figure 124 Alarm Port Setup OLE NEN Port 1 2 3 4 5 Alarm Status Alarm Event Setup Severity Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Alarm Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Status Click Alarm Status to go to a screen that displays the alarms that are currently in the system see Section 36 2 on page 231 Alarm Event Setup Click Alarm Event Setup to go to a screen where you can configure the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s See Section 36 4 on page 233 236 Chapter 36 Alarm AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 84 Alarm Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This column lists the device s individual DSL and Ethernet interfaces Severity Select an alarm severity level critical major minor or info as the threshol
225. cking In RSTP BPDUs are discarded In STP only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed 172 Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 49 RSTP Port States continued RSTP PORT STATE STP PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Discarding Listening In RSTP BPDUs are discarded In STP all BPDUs are received and processed Learning Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded See the IEEE 802 1w standard for more information on RSTP See the IEEE 802 1D standard for more information on STP 22 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 85 Spanning Tree Protocol Status XrrunnrRcA4 Ink STP Config Spanning Tree Protocol On Bridge Status Our bridge ID 8000 001349000001 Designated root ID 8000 001349000001 Topology change times Time since change 0 00 04 Cost to root 0 Root port ID 0x0000 Root max age second 20 Root hello time second 2 Root forward delay second 15 Max age second 20 Hello time second 2 Forward delay second 15 Port Status ENET1 ENET2 State Disabled discarding Port ID 0x8032 Path cost 4 Costto root 0 Designated bridge 0000 0
226. commands Low privilege commands are read only Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Index This field displays the number of the user account Click an account s index number to use the top of the screen to edit it Enable This field displays a V if you have the administrator account turned on It displays a if the administrator account is turned off Name This field displays the administrator account s user name Privilege This field displays the administrator account s access level high middle or low Select Select this check box and click the Delete button to remove an administrator account Delete Select an administrator account s check box and click this button to remove the administrator account Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen afresh 9 2 Authentication Screen Use this screen to set up the authentication policies and settings by which administrators can access the AAMI212 To open this screen click Basic Setting User Account Authentication Figure 42 Authentication xxm ME D User account Authentication Mode local then radius IP 127 0 0 254 Port 18
227. conds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of UnAvailable Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes This command configures settings and thresholds that define when the AAM1212 is to send an alarm trap and generate a syslog entry Configure alarm profiles first and then use the alarmprofile map command to set the AAM1212 to use them with specific DSL ports The following example sets an alarm profile named SESalarm that has the AAMI212 send an alarm trap and generate a syslog whenever the upstream connection s number of severely errored seconds exceeds three within a 15 minute period Figure 256 Alarm Profile Set Command Example ras adsl alarmprofile set SI 000 ESalarm0000000000000000020 3 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 377 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 3 3 Alarm Profile Delete Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile delete profile where profile The name of an alarm profile This command allows you to delete an individual alarm profile by its name You cannot delete the DEFVAL alarm profile The following example deletes the SESalarm alarm profile Figure 257 Alarm Profile Delete Command Example ras adsl alarm profile delete SESalarm 52 3 4 Alarm Profile Map Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile map lt portlist gt profile where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports
228. creen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Authentication 2 At the time of writing Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports 802 1x See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other operating Systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software Chapter 23 Port Authentication 177 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 88 RADIUS Oka Enable Authentication Server IP address 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 1812 1 65535 Shared Secret 1234 Apply Enable Local Profile Setting Support upto 64 profiles Name Password Retype Password to confirm index Name Delete 1 admin m The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 RADIUS LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1x Click 802 1x to configure individual port authentication settings see Section 23 3 on page 179 Enable Select this check box to have the AAM1212 use an external RADIUS server to Authentication authenticate users Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be share
229. d between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Enable Local Profile Select this check box to have the AAM1212 use its internal database of user Setting names and passwords to authenticate users Name Type the user name of the user profile Password Type a password up to 31 characters long for this user profile Retype Password to Type the password again to make sure you have entered it properly confirm 178 Chapter 23 Port Authentication AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 52 RADIUS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh This table displays the configured user profiles Index These are the numbers of the user profiles Click this number to edit the user profile
230. d Example 2 ras gt adsl vcprofile set silver ve vbr 250000 5 100000 200 382 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example creates a virtual channel profile named economy that uses LLC encapsulation It uses unspecified bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 50 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 100 cells Figure 262 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 3 ras adsl vcprofile set gold llc cbr 50000 100 53 2 3 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command Syntax ras adsl vcprofile delete lt vcprofile gt where vcprofile The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters You cannot delete the DEFVAL or DEFVAL VC profiles You cannot delete a virtual channel profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile The following example deletes the silver virtual channel profile Figure 263 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command Example ras adsl vcprofile delete silver 53 3 PVC Channels Channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs let you set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL
231. d VCI 35 The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and uses a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Figure 281 RPVC Route Delete Command Example ras adsl rpvc route delete 1 8 35 10 10 10 1 24 RPVC ARP Agingtime Set Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime set sec where sec The number of seconds 10 10000 the device is to keep the Address Resolution Protocol table s entries of IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways Use 0 to disable the aging time This command configures how long the device stores the IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode in the Address Resolution Protocol table The following example sets the device to store the IP addresses 2684 routed mode gateways in the Address Resolution Protocol table for 500 seconds Figure 282 RPVC ARP Agingtime Command Example ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime set 500 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime show This command displays how long the device stores the IP addresses of 2684 routed mode gateways in the Address Resolution Protocol table The following is an example Figure 283 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc arp agingtime show rpvc aging time sec 500 398 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 7 13 RPVC
232. d block frames from other MAC addresses deny Block frames from MAC addresses that you specify and allow frames from other MAC addresses This command sets whether the AAM1212 allows or blocks access for the MAC addresses you specify The following example sets DSL port 5 to allow frames from the MAC addresses specified for DSL port 5 Figure 166 MAC Filter Mode Command Example ras gt switch mac filter mode 5 accept 46 2 5 MAC Filter Set Command Syntax ras gt switch mac filter set lt port gt lt mac gt lt mac gt lt mac gt where lt port gt The number of a DSL port lt mac gt The source MAC address in 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 format This command adds an allowed source MAC address on the specified DSL port The following example adds source MAC address 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 for DSL port 5 Figure 167 MAC Filter Set Command Example ras switch mac filter set 5 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 46 2 6 MAC Filter Delete Command Syntax ras switch mac filter delete port mac mac mac where port The number of a DSL port Chapter 46 MAC Commands 305 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide mac The source MAC address in 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 format This command removes a configured source MAC address from the DSL port that you specify The following example removes the source MAC address of 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 from the MAC filter for DSL port 5 Figur
233. d displays the index number of the alarm entry in the system Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Severity This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Timestamp This field displays the month day hour minute and second that the system created the log Source This field displays where the alarm originated This is either a DSL port number one of the Ethernet ports enet 1 or 2 or eqpt for the system itself Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of entries Next Page Click this to display the following page of entries 36 3 Alarm Descriptions This table describes alarms that the system can send ATUC refers to the downstream channel for traffic going from the AAM1212 to the subscriber ATUR refers to the upstream channel for traffic coming from the subscriber to the AAMI212 A V in the CLEARABLE column indicates that an administrator can remove the alarm Table 81 Alarm Descriptions NO ALARM CONDITION FACILITY SNMP SYSLOG SEVERITY area 1 dsl 5000 line_up local1 V V info 2 dsl 5001 line down local1 V V minor V 3 dsl 5002 ad perf lol thresh local1 V V min
234. d for recording alarms on this port Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Chapter 36 Alarm 237 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 238 Chapter 36 Alarm AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 37 Maintenance This chapter explains how to use the maintenance screens 37 1 Maintenance Screen To open this screen click Management Maintenance Figure 125 Maintenance DANSENS Firmware Upgrade Click here Restore Text Configuration Click here Backup Text Configuration Click here Restore Default Configuration Click here Reboot System Click Here 37 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen Use this screen to upgrade your device firmware See the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your de
235. d in t1413 mode only or if it is an old modem that only supports t1413 You have to explicitly configure the line in t1413 mode to make the modem initialize The following example sets DSL port 1 to have the gold profile in G dmt mode Figure 221 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example ras adsl profile map 1 gold gdmt 52 1 8 DSL Port Name Command Syntax ras adsl name lt portlist gt name 350 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt name gt A descriptive name for the port You can use up to 31 printable ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens This command sets the name of a DSL port s The following example sets DSL port 5 to have the name super Figure 222 DSL Port Name Command Example ras gt adsl name 5 super 52 1 9 DSL Port Tel Command Syntax ras gt adsl tel lt portlist gt lt tel gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt tel gt a DSL subscriber s telephone number You can use up to 15 ASCII characters including spaces and hyphens This command records the telephone number of a DSL subscriber
236. d timer H wdog set lt msec 0 disable gt Sets the watchdog count 0 turns the watchdog off H monitor show Displays the hardware monitor s statistics L L monitor enable Turns the hardware monitor on H H monitor disable Turns the hardware monitor off H H monitor vlimit Xidx high low Sets the maximum high or minimum low voltage at the specified voltage sensor You can specify a voltage with up to three digits after a decimal point 0 941 for example Normal voltage at each sensor Idx 1 1 2v 2 1 8v 3 3 3v 4 24v H H monitor tlimit lt idx gt lt high gt lt low gt Sets the maximum lt high gt or minimum lt low gt temperature at the specified temperature sensor You can specify a temperature with up to three digits after a decimal point 50 025 for example Temperature sensor locations Idx 1 DSL 2 CPU 3 HW monitor H H user online Displays online user info M user enable lt name gt Turns on the specified user name of multi login H H user disable lt name gt Turns off the specified user name of multi login H H user Set username password lt high middle low gt Creates or edits the password and privilege level of the specified user name H H user delete lt name gt Removes the specified user name of multi login H H
237. ddresses 44 4 1 DHCP Snoop Enable Command Syntax ras gt switch dhcpsnoop enable lt portlist gt Chapter 44 DHCP Commands 291 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt This command activates the DHCP snooping feature on the specified port s The following example enables DHCP snooping on port 1 Figure 148 DHCP Snoop Enable Command Example ras gt switch dhcpsnoop enable 1 44 4 2 DHCP Snoop Disable Command Syntax ras gt switch dhcpsnoop disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt This command disables the DHCP snooping feature on the specified port s 44 4 3 DHCP Snoop Flush Command Syntax ras gt switch dhcpsnoop flush lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet enet2 gt This command clears the DHCP snooping binding table on the specified port s The system also automatically clears the binding table when you disable DHCP snooping 292 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands AAM1212
238. de CHAPTER 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens This chapter describes the Home status Port Statistics and RMON screens 6 1 Home Screen The Home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details To open this screen click Home in any web configurator screen Figure 33 Home Home 3 System Up Time O days 19 30 31 ENET Status Port Name Media Duplex Up Time Up enet1 10 0copper full duplex 19 30 19 Down enet2 i Status Up Down stream Interleave Fast Up Time Down f Down Down Down Down 1 2 3 4 5 l sfe l dP nd ou fe foam Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop Port 1 Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Home LABEL DESCRIPTION System up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started The following fields are related to the Ethernet ports ENET This field displays the number of the Ethernet port Click a port number to display that port s statistics screen The Ethernet Port Statistics Screen appears See Section 6 1 1 on page 70 Status This field displays whether the Ethernet port is connected Up or not Down Port Name This field displays the name of the Ethernet port Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens 69 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 5 H
239. de dabMta lu d EH ett FON aa SM EU 111 Table 22 IEEE 802 1p Priority te PPVG Mapping iuuceccsoss eaa tn eet epa enhn 114 E duse Am MT 115 Table 24 PPYG Seb Edi iicet e E RP ERE EM SEE DINE Doro He uS M Co IE oA 117 Tahe 2S POM PONO sraoin a aA 119 Tue B VE PTOBIB 252scutietrdevixi Moo IRURE o EA NAE GENES AU EE NER GE Ai 125 Table 27 Alarm NISI Mete 127 Table Ze IGMP Filler Prole iiio DeL t seed acting E rct ope baa 130 Table 29 XOSL Line Rate DO ccc iccscdetcaicturcca IER SERM LO E EHE SERE e MERERI IA 133 Table 50 XDSL Perfortl e 2auisce eei sei p cbuiiee pre biu teens Sev epa EPA RP V Ue EC U UE AMENC E PP nce ue E EUPL IE 136 WNT SI MB E c SAA DEEA OVE ETA 138 Tabs Sz VLAN SIDES aiit i HE ee errr EV ren ter ren rrr Mei 143 Table 22 Statie VLAN Saling ict inia srt dso x p ita ed Per i o a OR 145 Table 34 VLAN Port Setting denciscentidpce a ipei apxte ERE Ee die px eU Aaaa loans 146 Tade diei EI A c 151 Table 36 IGMP Bandwibll 1 iori appa LEER HERI THERE E PELLE CHEER ERA na 153 Table 37 Bandwidth Port Setup 2iuaprie rite abe Ius Ra SERI E RARE ER i 154 VS 36 IGMP GEW e 155 List of Tables 33 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 39 IGMP COUINE A A 156 BH rues eer E EANA ELE aan AAAA Ra 157 Tade di IGMP Pon Group c siarane i a ane inii 158 Table d Stane MIUIBOSSU 1i iron erro e AAR 159 Table 43 MVLAN Slus SS 00 E ESTEE 162 Tabe da MYLAN Ec c i a 163 Table 45 MYLAN GOUR aaisan anni eiaa ER Aa
240. ding to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 23 Port Authentication This chapter describes the 802 1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup 23 1 Introduction to Authentication IEEE 802 1x is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile management on a network RADIUS server 23 1 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location Figure 87 RADIUS Server 23 1 2 Introduction to Local User Database By storing user profiles locally on the AAM1212 your AAMI212 is able to authenticate users without interacting 23 2 RADIUS S
241. display statistics about a DSL port To open this screen click a DSL port s number in the Home screen Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens 73 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 35 Port Statistics DSL Fort Statistics xDSL Port 1 Port Name Tx packets 327628 Rx packets D Txbroadcastpackets 327449 Rx broadcast packets Tx discard packets Rx discard packets Errors Tx rate Rx rate Tx bytes 40182162 Rx bytes 0 YPI VCI 0 33 Tx Packets 327528 Rx Packets 0 Tx rate 212 Rx rate 0 Tx cells 758154 Rx cells 0 Errors 0 Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Port 1 Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Port Statistics DSL LABEL DESCRIPTION RMON Click this to open the RMON Statistics screen Return Click this to go back to the Home screen xDSL Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view statistics This field identifies the port described in this screen Port Name This field displays the name that you have configured for the port If you have not configured a name it is blank Tx packets This field shows the number of packets transmitted on this port Rx packets This field shows the number of packets received on this port Tx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast packets transmitted on this port packets Rx broadcast This field shows the number of broadcast packet
242. dit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Modify Click Add Modify to save member PVC settings for a PPVC In order to change a member PVC s settings just enter the PVC s VPI and VCI and configure the settings you want These settings replace the PVC s old settings when you click Add Modify Clicking Add Modify saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Close Click Close to exit the screen without saving your changes 118 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 14 xDSL Profiles Setup A profile is a list of settings that you define Then you can assign them to one or more individual ports For background information about many of these settings see Chapter 13 on page 101 14 1 Port Profile Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup Figure 57 Port Profile OD VC Profile Alarm Profile IGMP Filter Profile Index Name Latency Mode Down Up Stream Rate kbps Select 1 DEFVAL Interleave 2048 512 e 2 DEFVAL MAX Interleave 9088 512 Name Latency Mode Interleave Up Stream Down Stream Max Rate 1000 84 4096 kbps 24000 64 32000 kbps Min Rate 52 32 4096 kbps c4 22 32000 kbps Interleave Delay zo 1 255 ms 20
243. ds this screen refreshes You may Clear Counter Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 1 Ethernet Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to display statistics about an Ethernet port To open this screen click an Ethernet port s number in the Home screen 70 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 34 Port Statistics Ethernet a Port Statistics Port ENET1 v Port Name Rx bytes Rx error fcs Rx broadcast Rx fragments Rx error mru Rx jabber Rx oversize Rx discard Tx bytes Tx multicast Txmac pause Tx frames Tx undersize Tx oversize packet lt 64 packet 1 28 255 packet 512 1023 packet 1522 packet total multicast total Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval RMON Return enet1 29544799 Rx packets 348191 0 Rx multicast 18963 327387 Rx mac pause 0 D Rx error overrun 6 Rx dropped 0 Rx error alignment D Rx undersize 17948 1733468 Tx packets Tx broadcast Tx fragments Tx error underrun Tx jabber 46948 4554 1002 265946 packet 65 127 30992 pack
244. dwidth lt portlist gt Set bandwidth threshold for a port M H port set lt bandwidth gt lt bandwidth gt 1 100 000 in unit of kbps igmpsnoop bandwidth lt portlist gt Show bandwidth control setting for L L port show a port igmpsnoop bandwidth lt index gt start Set bandwidth budget for a range M H set mcast ip gt lt end of multicast IP channels specified mcast ip in index field bandwidth index 1 96 lt start mcast ip gt ip start multicast IP address lt end mcast ip gt ip end multicast IP address igmpsnoop bandwidth Show bandwidth budget for a L L show range of multicast IP channels igmpsnoop igmpcount lt portlist gt Disable IGMP count limiting to H H disable subscriber port igmpsnoop igmpcount lt portlist gt Enable IGMP count limiting to H H enable subscriber port igmpsnoop igmpcount lt portlist gt count SetIGMP count limiting number to H H set subscriber port igmpsnoop igmpcount portlist Display IGMP count limiting setting M L show status on the specified slot igmpsnoop mvlan set vid Configures a MVLAN entry H H lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X gt lt portlist gt lt F lt T U gt X gt name igmpsnoop mvlan lt vlanlist gt Show multicast vlans M L show Include group information igmpsnoop mvlan lt vid gt Turns off a MVLAN entry H H disable igmpsnoop mvlan vid Turns on a MVLAN entry H H enable igmpsnoop mvlan lt vlanlist gt Removes a MVLAN entry
245. dy when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp CORPORATE www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II HEADQUARTERS Science Park WORLDWIDE sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan soporte zyxel co cr 506 2017878 www zyxel co cr ZyXEL Costa Rica COSTA RICA Plaza Roble Escazu sales zyxel co cr 506 2015098 ftp zyxel co cr Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica CZECH REPUBLIC info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modranska 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej DENMARK sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark support zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND a Malminkaari 10 sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland info zyxel fr 33 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 4 72 52 19 20 Bat
246. e Select Select a profile s Select radio button and click Modify to edit the profile Modify Select Select a profile s Select radio button and click Delete to remove the profile Delete The rest of the screen is for profile configuration Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name up to 31 characters for the profile Latency Mode This field sets the ADSL latency mode for the ports that belong to this profile Select Fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary Select Interleave mode to use interleave delay when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line See Section 13 4 on page 102 for more on interleave delay Up Stream The following parameters relate to upstream transmissions Max Rate Type a maximum upstream transfer rate 64 to 4096 Kbps for this profile Configure the maximum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Min Rate Type the minimum upstream transfer rate 32 to 4096 Kbps for this port Configure the minimum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum upstream transfer rate Interleave Delay Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to Interleave Type the number of milliseconds 1 255 of
247. e 168 MAC Filter Delete Command Example ras switch mac filter delete 5 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 46 3 MAC Count Commands Use MAC count commands to limit how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned MAC count commands are listed next When the MAC filter accept mode is enabled see Section 46 2 on page 303 the AAM1212 ignores the MAC count setting and accepts all of the MAC addresses listed for the port in the MAC filter settings 46 3 1 MAC Count Show Command Syntax ras switch mac count show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the MAC count settings on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example displays the MAC count settings for DSL port 4 Figure 169 MAC Count Show Command Example ras gt switch mac count show 4 port status count 306 Chapter 46 MAC Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 46 3 2 MAC Count Enable Command Syntax ras switch mac count enable portlist where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command enables the MAC count filter on the specified DSL port s When the MAC filter accep
248. e AAM1212 53 Enable Annex to use all digital mode With Annex I the ADSL connection uses the full spectrum of the physical line and the user can not use POTS or ISDN service This increases the upstream data rate Note The subscriber cannot use POTS or ISDN services when you enable Annex I PMM Enable the Power ManageMent PMM feature to reduce the amount of power used overall and reduce the instances of the connection going down PMM increases or decreases the transmission power based on line conditions PMM also decreases the number of service interruptions Select L2 to have the ADSL connection use power saving mode and reduce the rate when there is no traffic The rate comes back up when there is traffic Select L3 to use both power management modes L2 and L3 L3 puts the ADSL connection to sleep mode LO power mode uses no power reduction See the ITU T G 992 3 standard for more on PMM and the power modes states SRA Enable Seamless Rate Adaptation SRA to have the AAM1212 automatically adjust the connection s data rate according to line conditions without interrupting service Sudden spikes in the line s noise level impulse noise can cause errors and result in lost packets Set the impulse noise protection minimum to have a buffer to protect the ADSL physical layer connection against impulse noise This buffering causes a delay that reduces transfer speeds It is recommended that you use a non zero setting
249. e as well as restart the system Diagnostic Use this screen to view system logs and test port s MAC Table Use this screen to view the MAC addresses of devices attached to what ports ARP Table Use this screen to view the MAC address to IP address resolution table Config Save Config Save Use this screen to save the device s configuration into the nonvolatile memory the AAM1212 s storage that remains even if the AAM1212 s power is turned off 4 5 Changing Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Basic Setting and then User Account to display the User Account screen Figure 19 User Account OUEST ae Authentication Enable Name Password Retype Password to confirm Privilege high Add Cancel Index Enable Name Privilege Select V admin high C Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 59 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Click the index number 1 to edit the default administrator account settings Figure 20 User Account OWS Authentication Enable Name Password Retype Password to confirm Privilege nigh Modify Cancel Index Enable Name Privilege Select 1 V admin high C Enter the new password in the Password and Retype Password to confirm fields and click Modify Do not forget to click Config Save before you exit the web configurator See Section 4 6 on page 60 4 6 Sa
250. e lines between MDF blocks 3 1 6 Telco 50 Cables Telco 50 cables are used for data and voice applications with MDFs Main Distribution Frame patch panels and distribution boxes They can also be used as extension cables Telco 50 cables are made up of 25 twisted pair copper wires Connect a Telco 50 connector to one end of the cable see the hardware specifications appendix for pin assignments and connect the other end directly to an MDF alternatively attach RJ 11 connectors and connect directly to DSL modem s 46 Chapter 3 Front Panel AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 10 Telco 50 Cable with RJ 11 Connectors 3 1 7 Telco 50 Connections The internal DSL splitters separate the voice signals from the DSL signals They feed the DSL signals to the AAM1212 and divert the voice signals to the CO lines of the Telco 50 connector Connect the CO lines of the Telco 50 connector to the PBX or PSTN ISDN switch Connect the USER lines of the Telco 50 connector to the subscribers telephone wiring In most multi tenant unit applications the USER pins connect to the subscribers telephone wiring via Main Distribution Frame MDF See the section on MDF scenarios and the pin assignments in the hardware specifications appendix for details on Telco 50 connections 3 1 8 ADSL Connections Connect the lines from the user equipment ADSL modems to the Telco 50 connector USER pins and the lines from the central
251. e switch mode and port isolation settings Check to see that the VPI VCI and multiplexing mode LLC VC settings in the subscriber s DSL modem or router match those of the DSL port If the subscriber is having problems with a video or other high bandwidth services make sure the AAM1212 s DSL port s data rates are set high enough Check the VLAN configuration Ping the AAM1212 from the computer behind the DSL modem or router If you cannot ping connect a DSL modem to a DSL port that is known to work If the DSL modem or router works with a different DSL port there may be a problem with the original port Contact the distributor If using a different port does not work try a different DSL modem or router with the original port 55 6 There Is No Voice on a DSL Connection The AAM1212 has internal splitters and CO side Telco 50 connectors that allow the telephone wiring used for DSL connections to also simultaneously carry normal voice conversations Table 104 DSL Voice Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure the subscriber has a splitter properly installed Check the DSL line pin assignments shown in Appendix C on page 429 Check the telephone wire connections between the subscriber and the MDF s Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and USER port s c1 o N Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and the CO connector
252. e the Select All button to include every port Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN ID Use the All button to include every port Use the None button to clear all of the ports check boxes Add Click Add to save your settings The VLAN then displays in the summary table at the top of the screen Clicking Add saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh 16 5 VLAN Port Setting Screen Use this screen to specify port VLAN IDs and to set whether or not Ethernet ports propagate VLAN information to other devices To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Port Setting Chapter 16 VLAN 145 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 68 VLAN Port Setting VLAN Status Static VLAN Setting Priority GVRP Acceptable Frame Type E ALL E ALL All All All All Apply Cancel Copy port 1 Paste The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click VLAN Status to see which of the AAM1212 s ports are members of which VLANs see Section 16 3 on page 142 Static VLAN Click Stati
253. ear End CRC Interleaved FEFEC 0 Far End Corrected FEC Interleaved NEFEC 0 Near End Corrected FEC LPR 0 15 min history lofs loss lols Iprs Current ATUC 0 0 ATUR Previous 1 ATUC ATUR Previous 2 ATUC ATUR Previous 3 ATUC ATUR 1 day history lofs loss lols Iprs Current ATUC n 0 n ATUR 0 0 Previous ATUC 0 0 ATUR 0 0 ecOoocccccococ ses ceo c o o o ses Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data 135 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 xDSL Performance LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Rate Click Line Rate to display an ADSL port s line operating values see Section 15 1 on page 133 Line Data Click Line Data to display an ADSL ports line bit allocation see Section 15 3 on page 137 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information Port Name This section displays the name of the port Performance since last link up Line Type Fast stands for non interleaved fast mode and Interleaved stands for interleaved mode Init This field displays the number of link ups and link downs ATUC ATUR ES The Number of Errored Seconds transmitted downstream or received upstream on this ADSL port ATUC ATUR The Number of Severely Errored Seconds transmitted downstream or received SES upstream on
254. ecified DSL port s Sudden spikes in the line s noise level impulse noise can cause errors and result in lost packets Set the impulse noise protection minimum to have a buffer to protect the DSL physical layer connection against impulse noise This buffering causes a delay that reduces transfer speeds It is recommended that you use a non zero setting for real time traffic that has no error correction like videoconferencing The following example sets the impulse noise protection minimum to 1 DMT symbols for upstream and 0 5 DMT symbols for downstream for DSL port 5 Figure 236 Impulse Noise Protection Command Example ras adsl inp 5 21 Annex L Enable Command This command is available for the AAMI212 51 Syntax ras adsl annexl enable portlist 358 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command turns on the Annex L reach extended feature on the specified ADSL2 port s Annex L can be used with Annex A ADSL over POTS not Annex B ADSL over ISDN The following example turns on the Annex L feature for port 5 Figure 237 Annex L Enable Command Example ras adsl annexl enable 5 52 1 19 Annex L Disable Command This command is available for the AAM1212 51 Syntax ras adsl annexl disable lt portlist gt This command turns off the Annex L reach extended feature on the specified ADSL2 port s The following example turns off the Annex L feature for port 5
255. ed appears when RSTP has not been turned on for the individual port or the whole device Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Ox0000 displays when this device is the root switch Path cost This is the path cost from this port to the root switch 174 Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 50 Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cost to root This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Designated bridge This is the unique identifier for the bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address Designated port This is the port on the designated bridge that has the lowest path cost to reach the root bridge consisting of bridge priority Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt STP statistic polling 22 3 Spanning Tree Protocol Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol STP Config Figure 86 Spanning Tree Protocol DEETAN STP Status Active C Bridge Priority 32768 0 865535 Hello Time
256. eful for ensuring the service quality of high bandwidth services like video or Internet Protocol television IPTV IGMP count can limit how many channels IGMP groups the subscriber connected to a DSL port can use at a time If each channel requires 4 5 Mbps of download bandwidth and the subscriber s connection supports 11 Mbps you can use IGMP count to limit the subscriber to using just 2 channels at a time This also effectively limits the subscriber to using only two IPTVs with the DSL connection To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Count Setup Chapter 17 IGMP 155 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 75 IGMP Count IGMP Status Count Select s 0 16 s 0 16 s 0 1 z s 0 19 m x s 0 19 Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 IGMP Count LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Status Click IGMP Status to open the IGMP Setup screen where you can view current IGMP information see Section 17 3 on page 150 Port This field shows each DSL port number Active This field shows whether or not the IGMP count limit is enabled on this port V displays if it is enabled and displays if it is disabled Count Enter the maximum number of IGMP groups a subscriber on this port can join This has no effect if the IGMP count limit is disabled Select Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or dis
257. eld displays the condition code number for the specific alarm message Condition This field displays a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Facility The log facility local1 local7 has the device log the syslog messages to a particular file in the syslog server Select a log facility local1 local7 from the drop down list box if this entry is for sending alarms to a syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details SNMP Select this check box to have the system send this alarm to an SNMP server Syslog Select this check box to have the system send this alarm to a syslog server Chapter 36 Alarm 235 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 83 Alarm Event Setup Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Severity Select an alarm severity level critical major minor or info for this alarm Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe Clearable Select this check box to allow administrators to use the management interface to remove an alarm report generated by this alarm event entry Select this check box to keep an alarm report generated by this alarm event in the system until the conditions that caused the alarm report are no longer present Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these
258. elect to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 5 Click Apply to copy the settings Figure 54 Select Ports 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 9 DOOOOoOooogo 19 12 Or ENET1 select an None ENET2 7 Apply Cancel 13 10 Priority based PVCs A PPVC Priority based PVC allows you to give different priorities to PVCs that are members of the same VLAN The AAM1212 uses eight priority queues also called levels for the member PVCs The system maps frames with certain IEEE 802 1p priorities to a PVC with a particular priority queue The following table gives the factory default mapping Table 22 IEEE 802 1p Priority to PPVC Mapping IEEE 802 1 PRIORITY MAPS TO PPVC 0 33 PRIORITY QUEUE 7 gt level 7 6 gt level 6 5 gt level 5 4 gt level 4 3 gt level 3 2 gt level 2 114 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 22 IEEE 802 1p Priority to PPVC Mapping continued IEEE 802 1 PRIORITY MAPS TO PPVC 0 33 PRIORITY QUEUE 1 gt level 1 0 gt level 0 13 11 PPVC Setup Screen Use this screen to view and configure PPVCs To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Figure 55 PPVC Setup OME ee Port VPI Show Port ALL Index Port 1 1 2 1 3 2 4 3 xDSL Port Setup VC Setup
259. elow the AAM1212 1 has its Ethernet port one ENET 1 connected to the Ethernet backbone switch 3 and it s Ethernet port two ENET2 connected to Ethernet port one ENET 1 of the daisychained AAMI212 2 With port isolation turned on communications between A and B must first go through another switch or router 3 in the figure A and B also cannot communicate with C without their communications going through another switch or router Figure 44 Port Isolation with Daisychain Switch Mode Example Internet 10 3 Switch Setup Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting Switch Setup Chapter 10 Switch Setup 93 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 45 Switch Setup XII NN MAC Address Lea GARP Timer Port Isolation MAC Anti Spoofi Switch Mode Enet Priority Queue As ADSL Priority Queue Assignment rning Aging Time soo 10 10000 seconds O Disabled Join Timer 200 100 65535 milliseconds Leave Timer eoo Leave Timer must 2 Join Timer Leave All Timer 10000 Leave All Timer must gt Leave Timer Active Iv ng Active O Standalone Priority 7 Queue 3 v Priority 6 Queue 3 v Priority 5 Queue 2 v Priority 4 Queue 2 Priority 3 Queue 1 v Priority 2 Queue 0 Priority 1 Queue 0 Priority 0 Queue 1 Priority 7 Queue 7 Y Priority 6 Queue 6 v Priority 5 Queue 5 _ Priority 4 Queue 4 7 Priority 3 Queue 3 v Priority 2 Queue 2 v Priority 1 Queue 1 v
260. eneral device information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as temperature status You can check the firmware version number and monitor the hardware status in this screen To open this screen click Basic Setting System Information Figure 39 System Info xcu cH System Name ZyNOS FAW Version DSP Code Version AAM1 212 51 V3 52 ABA 0 07 07 2006 5 04 0003 Hardware Version Serial Number Ethernet Address 00 13 49 de 00 ad Hardware Monitor M Enable Temperature Unit C 7 Temperature C Current MAX MI 1 51 53 48 55 97 2 57 58 54 55 97 3 56 58 53 55 97 Current MAX MIN Average Threshold Low Threshold Hi Status 1 152 21 152 METIS 51145 1 056 1 344 Normal 1 820 1 820 1 820 1 820 1 656 1 944 Normal 3 200 3 257 3 200 3 200 3 036 3 564 Normal 18 175 18 175 18 175 18 175 16 560 19 440 Normal Average Threshold Low Threshold Hi Status Normal Normal Normal Voltage 4 o0 MN i New threshold Apply Temperature C Hi Volt Hi 344 saa 5 564 EITE Volt Lo 056 1 656 056 IDCM Temperature C Lo 5 5 s Ao ii Ao Poll Interval s ao Set Interval Stop Chapter 7 System Information 81 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the de
261. eric error 0 402 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Each value is described below tx rx ppp lcp config request ppp lcp echo request ppp lcp echo reply pppoe pppoe pppoe pppoe pppoe pppoe error pppoe error pppoe error padi pado padr pads padt Srvcname ac system generic The values in these columns are for packets transmitted tx or received rx by the AAM1212 The number of config request PDUs received by the AAMI212 from the CPE client device The number of echo request PDUs received by the AAMI212 from the CPE client device The number of echo reply PDUs received by the AAM1212 from the CPE client device The number of padi PDUs sent by the AAMI212 to the BRAS The number of pado PDUs sent by the BRAS to the AAM1212 The number of padr PDUs sent by the AAM1212 to the BRAS The number of pads PDUs sent by the BRAS to the AAM1212 The number of padt PDUs sent and received by the AAM1212 The number of service name errors for example the AAM1212 s specified service is different than the BRAS s setting The number of times the access concentrator experienced an error while performing the Host request for example when resources are exhausted in the access concentrator This value does not include the number of times the AAM1212 checks the AC name field in the BRAS s reply PDU and finds a mismatch however T
262. eries User s Guide Figure 119 Remote Management Secured Client Setup Remote Management Secured Client Setup index Enable 1 Start IP Address End IP Address Return Telnet FTP Web ICMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Amy caca 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Remote Management Secured Client Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Return Click Return to go back to the previous screen Index This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the AAM1212 Enable Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start IP Address End IP Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage the AAM1212 The AAM1212 checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The AAM1212 immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Web Select services that may be used for managing the AAM1212 from the specified ICMP trusted computers Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save li
263. ers of DHCP request frames that the AAM1212 relays to a DHCP server The Agent Information field that the AAM1212 adds contains an Agent Circuit ID sub option that includes the port number VLAN ID and optional information about the port where the DHCP request was received The following figure shows the format of the Agent Circuit ID sub option The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field If the configuration request was received on a DSL port a 2 byte Port No field specifies the ingress port number the first byte is always 0 the second byte is in hexadecimal format The next field 1s 2 bytes and displays the DHCP request packet s VLAN ID The last field A can range from 0 to 24 bytes and 1s optional information that you specify about this relay agent Figure 92 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format 1 N VLANID A Chapter 25 DHCP Relay 183 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The Agent Information field that the AAM1212 adds also contains an Agent Remote ID sub option of information that you specify The following figure shows the format of the Agent Remote ID sub option The 2 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The length N gives the total number of octets in the Agent Information Field Then there is the number of the port in plain text format upon which the DHCP cl
264. es User s Guide Table 15 Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Isolation Active Turn on port isolation to block communications between subscriber ports When you enable port isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers MAC Anti Spoofing Select this if you want the AAM1212 to generate an alarm and issue a SNMP trap when an existing MAC address appears on another port Switch Mode Select Standalone to use both of the AAM1212 s Ethernet ports ENET 1 and ENET 2 as uplink ports Note Standalone mode is recommended for network topologies that use loops Use Daisychain mode to cascade daisychain multiple AAM1212 The AAM1212 uses Ethernet port one ENET 1 as an uplink port to connect to the Ethernet backbone and uses Ethernet port two ENET 2 to connect to another daisychained or subtending AAM1212 Note Daisychain mode is recommended for network topologies that do not use loops Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The device has 4 physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels for outgoing Ethernet traffic The device has 8 physical queues that you
265. es real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The nrt VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation An example of an nrt VBR connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers 14 3 1 3 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is similar to the ABR traffic class for bursty data transfers However while ABR gives subscribers a set amount of bandwidth UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth 14 3 2 Traffic Parameters These are the parameters that control the flow of ATM traffic 122 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 14 3 2 1 Peak Cell Rate PCR Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed 14 3 2 2 Sustained Cell Rate SCR Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR 14 3 2 3 Maximum
266. eseacceeeeees 430 Figure 302 Console Cable DB 9 Female Connector eese 430 32 List of Figures AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide List of Tables Table T Front Panel Pars 1ainascneta Doce von Eras dad ra eld e ck Pr M p o LERRA quA 43 pjk n amer A E 43 Table 3 Navigation Panel Submenu Links ceceescicsceceeeesee eene nenne 57 Table 4 Web Configurator SISOS iuciesssceie si besie te Xx psit dia aded dies orta p SR ants 57 Tabs HDI 1sususdates ci ET m aM damen ee hee 69 Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet iiec ses cii cerea ich bero k ce tbi de De a 71 Table 7 Port Statistics DSL sessirnar A Eid 74 Tople S Por Statistics RMON pmcaniiiaan aa 76 Table 9 Port Statistics RMON HISTOTY siiis iier ettet porte tna orta tds A 78 Table 10 Port Statistics RMON History Detail eeee 79 Table 1i System IMO 82 THe T Ganor SOUP siaa 85 Table 19 User JAOSDMPI araceas ia E 87 BL E45 y r a een isani n e anain 89 THe Sars SRU ORE 94 Table TB IP Sete gii aded iin m P ERR DRE tbei du E REP eee 97 Tabie 17 BNET POR SED musei Dado oar end eie d gd e d 99 Table 18 ADSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates 101 Table 198 SDSL Port Setup auseusecentetuckkpei ci e Ux aanere HF ERE PI cae nana ea boiia 103 Tabie 2U DSL POI SEHE auussieprecistitesstA te prh AS ae PLIN POL I RE YLL ASSERERE IS RN URPEYA 106 Table zT WC SEDIB asit Rei tandi debn iudi E
267. ess control sessions Table 73 Access Control Summary CONSOLE PORT TELNET FTP WEB SNMP Number of sessions allowed 1 5 1 No limit No limit 34 3 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of TCP IP protocol suite A manager station can manage and monitor the AAM1212 through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 and or SNMP version 2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Chapter 34 Access Control 221 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 116 SNMP Management Model AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the AAM1212 An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Ba
268. et 256 511 817 packet 1024 1518 0 350258 18963 327387 31278267 broadcast total octet total stop Port fa Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Port Statistics Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION RMON Click this to open the RMON Statistics screen Return Click this to go back to the Home screen Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view statistics This field identifies the port described in this screen Port Name This field displays the name that you have configured for the port Rx bytes This field shows the number of octets of Ethernet frames received that are from 0 to 1518 octets in size counting the ones in bad packets not counting framing bits but counting FCS Frame Check Sequence octets An octet is an 8 bit binary digit byte Rx packets This field shows the number of packets received on this port including multicast unicast broadcast and bad packets Rx error fcs This field shows the number of frames received with an integral length of 64 to 1518 octets and containing a Frame Check Sequence error Rx multicast This field shows the number of good multicast frames received of 64 to 1518 octets in length for non VLAN or 1522 octets for VLAN not including Broadcast frames Frames with range or length errors are also not taken into account Chapter 6 Home and Port
269. et Filter Screen Use this screen to set which types of packets the AAM1212 accepts on individual DSL ports To open this screen click Advanced Application Filtering Figure 82 Packet Filter OZ dm NP Port hz PPPoE Only PPPoE Iv Pass through IP M Pass through ARP IV Pass through NetBios M Pass through DHCP M Pass through EAPOL M Pass through IGMP M Pass through V Passthrough Filtter out 2 Don t care Port PPPoE ARP NetBios DHCP EAPOL IGMP PPPoE Only 1 v V V V 2 3 4 5 Yy V v V V V v M The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Packet Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a DSL port for which you wish to configure packet type filtering This box is read only after you click on one of the port numbers in the table below PPPoE Only Select this to allow only PPPoE traffic This will gray out the check boxes for other packet types and the system will drop any non PPPoE packets Select the check boxes of the types of packets to accept on the DSL port When you clear one of these check boxes the field label changes to Filter Out and the system drops the corresponding type of packets Chapter 20 Filtering 167 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 46 Packet Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoE Pass through Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet relies on PPP and Ethernet It is a specification for co
270. ettings then display in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Clicking Apply saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh This table shows the multicast range settings Index This field displays the number that identifies this setting Start Multicast IP This field displays the beginning of the multicast range End Multicast IP This field displays the end of the multicast range Bandwidth This field displays the allowed bandwidth for the specified multicast range Select Select this and click Delete to remove the setting Delete Click this to remove the selected settings Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table 17 4 1 Bandwidth Port Setup Screen Use this screen to set up multicast bandwidth requirements for specific ports To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP Bandwidth Setup Port Setup Chapter 17 IGMP 153 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 73 Bandwidth Port Setup OLEATE NEN Bandwidth Setup Port Active Bandwidth Select 4 096 1 100 000 kbps D aos6 1 100 000 Kbps 2 z 3 a096 1 100 00
271. excludes framing bits packet 1024 1518 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 1024 to 1518 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet 1522 This field shows the number of frames received and transmitted including bad frames that were 1519 to 1522 octets in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits packet total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted packets broadcast total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted broadcast frames multicast total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted multicast frames octet total This field shows the total number of received and transmitted octets unicast multicast and broadcast Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Clear Counter Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 2 DSL Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to
272. f the vpi is 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi is not 0 Enable the super channel option to allow a channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The AAM1212 forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment One port can have only one super channel The default VID 1 to 4094 Each PVC must have a unique VID since the AAM1212 forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID You must assign a default VID 1 to 4094 and IEEE 802 1p default priority 0 to 7 to normal channels Each PVC must have a unique VID since the AAM1212 forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID 384 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag DS vcprofile Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s upstream v protilsle traffic The AAMI212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile This command allows the configuration of a PVC permanent virtual circuit for one or a range of DSL ports The following example sets a PVC on DSL port 1 with
273. folder on your computer 2 Connect your computer to the console port and use terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VTIO0O terminal emulation 9600 bps e No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit e No flow control 3 Turn off the AAM1212 and turn it back on to restart it and begin a session 4 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press a key to enter debug mode Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 421 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 5 Type atba5 after the Enter Debug Mode message this changes the console port speed to 115200 bps 6 Change the configuration of your terminal emulation software to use 115200 bps and reconnect to the AAMI212 7 Type atur after the Enter Debug Mode message 8 Waitforthe Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 9 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen Figure 299 Example Xmodem Upload Ee 004 Folder C Product Filename C Product Firmware bin F Protocol 1K Xmodem Send Close Cancel Type the firmware file s location or click Browse to search for it Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Then click Send 10A fter a successful firmware upload type atgo to restart the AAM1212 The console port speed automatically changes back to 9600 bps when the AAM1212 restarts
274. for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 3 on page 162 MVLAN Group Click MVLAN Group to open the MVLAN Group screen where you can configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 4 on page 164 The Number of This is the number of multicast VLAN configured on the AAM1212 MVLAN The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings for each multicast VLAN Index This is a sequential value and is not associated with this multicast VLAN Name VID This field shows the name and VLAN ID of this multicast VLAN 1 12 These fields display whether or not each port is a member of this multicast ENET1 2 VLAN V displays for members and displays for non members You can change these settings in the MVLAN Setup screen Status This field shows whether this multicast VLAN is active Enable or inactive Disable 19 3 MVLAN Setup Screen Use this screen to configure basic settings and port members for each multicast VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN MVLAN Setup 162 Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 80 MVLAN Setup MVLAN Status MVLAN Group Name Delete example O e o 1 4094 Control Tagging elect All Select All Select Au None S Fixed C Forbidden l TxTadding Fixed C Forbidden l TxTagging Fixed C Forbidden l TxTagging Fixed C For
275. for real time traffic that has no error correction like videoconferencing US INP Set the minimum upstream US impulse noise protection setting DS INP Set the minimum downstream DS impulse noise protection setting Max US TX PSD Specify the maximum upstream transmit power The unit of measure is 0 1 dBm Hz for example to set the maximum upstream transmit power to 10 dBm Hz set this value to 100 Max DS TX PSD Specify the maximum downstream transmit power The unit of measure is 0 1 dBm Hz for example to set the maximum downstream transmit power to 10 dBm Hz set this value to 100 LO Time Set the minimum time in seconds that the ADSL line must stay in LO power mode before changing to the L2 power mode Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 107 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION L2 Time Set minimum time in seconds that the ADSL line must stay in the L2 power mode before reducing the power again in the L2 power mode L2 ATPR Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction ATPR in decibels dB that is permitted in a L2 power reduction The system can gradually decrease the ADSL line transmission power while it is in the L2 power mode This is the largest individual power reduction allowed in the L2 power mode L2 ATPRT Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction Total ATPRT in dec
276. for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of severely errored seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucUasLThreshTrap The number of Unavailable seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of Unavailable seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturSesLThreshTrap The number of severely errored seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of severely errored seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturUasLThreshTrap The number of Unavailable seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of Unavailable seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval Chapter 34 Access Control AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 34 4 SNMP Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control SNMP Figure 117 SNMP ius Return Get Community Set Community Trap Community Trap Destination 1 Trap Destination 2 Trap Destination 3 Trap Destination 4 buries uie t S O S bussies o 0 0 0 0 Penfez 1 65525 0 0 0 0 Ponfis2 1 65535 0 0 0 0 pPonfis2 1 65535 0 0 0 0 Pon ie2 165535 Trusted Host 0 0 0 0 means trust all 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 SNMP
277. gateway ip The IP address of the gateway to which you no longer want the device to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation This command removes a gateway IP address that the device was set to use for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example has the device remove a 2684 routed mode traffic gateway entry for IP address 192 168 10 102 Figure 275 RPVC Gateway Delete Command Example ras adsl rpvc gateway delete 192 168 10 102 53 7 5 RPVC Set Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci DS vcprofile US vcprofile gt lt ip gt lt netmask gt gateway ip where lt portlist gt The port s of the RPVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC vci The VCI of the RPVC Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 393 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide DS vcprofile US vcprofile ip lt netmask gt lt gateway ip gt Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile The subscriber s CPE WAN IP address in dotted decimal notati
278. ge A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 10 2 Switch Modes The AAM1212 supports standalone and daisychain switch modes 10 2 1 Standalone Switch Mode Standalone switch mode relates to the AAM1212 s operational behavior not a standalone network topology The standalone switch mode allows either or both of the AAM1212 s Ethernet ports to connect to the backbone Ethernet network You can also connect one of the AAM1212 s Ethernet ports to the Ethernet network and the other to another AAM1212 see Figure 43 on page 92 for an example When the AAM1212 is in standalone mode you can use it in a network topology that uses loops you should also enable RSTP You can have multiple AAM1212 connected on the same network and set both of them to use standalone mode in order to use them with a network topology that uses loops Standalone switch mode with port isolation enabled blocks communications between subscriber ports on an individual AAMI212 However one AAM1212 s subscribers can communicate with another AAM1212 s subscribers if the two AAM1212 s Ethernet ports are connected to each other see Figure 43 on page 92 for an example If you have multiple AAM1212 connected on the same network and set to standalone mode they do not all need to have the same port isolation setting Chapter 10 Switch Setup 91 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 10 2 2 Port Isolation with St
279. h sensor Volt Hi Use these fields to configure the highest voltage limit at each sensor Volt Lo Use these fields to configure the lowest voltage limit at each sensor Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt statistic polling Chapter 7 System Information 83 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 84 Chapter 7 System Information AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 8 General Setup The General Setup screen allows you to configure general device identification information It also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your device The real time is then displayed in the logs To open this screen click Basic Setting General Setup Figure 40 General Setup DIOTAN Host Name n a_n Location PO f Contact Person s Name Model AAM1 212 51 Use Time Server when Bootup Time Server IP Address Current Time New Timet hh mm ss Current Date New Datei vyyy mm dd Time Zone When synchronizing with time server It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Na
280. h you ftp web icmp Can manage the device and the protocols that can be used syslog show Displays the syslog settings M L syslog enable Turns on the syslog logging H H syslog disable Turns off the syslog logging H H syslog server lt ip gt Sets the IP address of the syslog H H server stdio show Displays Current Stdio Timeout L L stdio set minute 0 no Sets Current Stdio Timeout H H timeout time show Displays the system s current time L L time set hh mm ss Sets the system s time H H date show Displays the system s current L L date date set lt yyyy mm dd Sets the system s date H H timeserver show Displays the system s time server M L timeserver set lt none gt Sets the system to not use a time H H server timeserver set daytime ip Sets the time service protocol H H nosync time server s IP address and the device s time zone timeserver set time ntp ip Sets the time service protocol H H lt utc lt time server s IP address and the gt 0100 1200 gt device s time zone nosync timeserver sync Retrieves the date and time from H H the time server Chapter 41 Commands 253 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION log show Displays the device s logs M L log clear Clears the device s logs H H wdog show Displays the current watchdog firmware protection feature status an
281. hapter 42 Command Examples 277 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 278 Chapter 42 Command Examples AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 43 Alarm Commands This chapter describes the alarm management commands 43 1 Alarm Commands Use these commands to view customize and clear alarms You can also set the device to report alarms to an SNMP or syslog server that you specify 43 2 General Alarm Command Parameters The following table describes commonly used alarm command parameter notation Table 91 General Alarm Command Parameters NOTATION DESCRIPTION alarm Specify a category of alarms eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms Sys represents system alarms all specifies every alarm category severity Specify an alarm severity level critical major minor info or all Critical alarms are the most severe major alarms are the second most severe minor alarms are the third most severe and info alarms are the least severe condition This is the text description for the condition under which the alarm applies Use the alarm tablelist to find alarm conditions 43 3 Alarm Show Command Syntax ras alarm show lt severity gt all alarm all condition all detail where detail Display in depth alarm information This command displays the current alarms by severity alarm ca
282. he AAM1212 automatically determine the type of connection that the Ethernet port has When the peer Ethernet device has auto negotiation turned on the AAM1212 negotiates with the peer to determine the connection speed If the peer Ethernet port does not have auto negotiation turned on the AAM1212 determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using full duplex Select 10 Copper if the Ethernet port has a 10 MB electrical connection Select 100 Copper if the Ethernet port has a 100 MB electrical connection Duplex The AAM1212 uses full duplex Ethernet connections by default Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 12 ENET Port Setup 99 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 100 Chapter 12 ENET Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 13 xDSL Port Setup This chapter explains how to configure settings for profiles and individual ADSL ports It also covers how to configure virtual channels and virtual channel profiles 13 4 ADSL Standards Overview These are the ADSL standards and rates that the AAM1212 supports at the time of writing The actual transfer rates will va
283. he number of other types of errors that occur in the PPPoE session between the AAM1212 and the BRAS 53 9 Transparent LAN Service TLS Commands Note You can NOT configure PPPoA to PPPoE and TLS settings on the same PVC 53 9 1 TLS PVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl tlspvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt The port number of the TLS PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 403 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide lt vpi gt The VPI of the TLS PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the TLS PVC This command clears TLS settings for the PVC 53 9 2 TLS PVC Set Command Syntax ras adsl tlspvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci DS vcprofile US vcprofile gt lt pvid gt lt priority gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the TLS PVC You can specify a single DSL port 1 all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the TLS PVC lt vci gt The VCI of the TLS PVC lt DS vcprofile Assign a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US Assign a VC profile to use for policing this channel s upstream Veprorilele traffic The AAMI212 does not perform upstream traffic
284. he rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm Hz The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR dB This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as those caused by temperature variations and moisture 52 3 Alarm Profile Commands Configure alarm profiles to set alarm settings and thresholds for the DSL ports 52 3 1 Alarm Profile Show Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile show profile where profile The name of an alarm profile Displays the settings of the specified alarm profile or all of them if you do not specify one Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 375 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the default alarm profile DEFVAL Figure 255 Alarm Profile Show Command Example 3 E 3 i 3 d 3 i 3 d 3 i 3 n m m 3 A j n ras adsl alarmprofile show DEFVAL 01 DEFVAL ATU C ATU R hreshl5MinLofs sec 0 0 hreshl5MinLoss sec 0 0 hreshl5MinLols sec 0 hreshl5MinLprs 0 0 hreshl5MinESs sec 0 0 hreshFastRateUp bps 0 0 hreshInterleaveRateUp bps 0 0 hreshFastRateDown bps 0 0 hreshInte
285. he same network layer Each type of criteria can only be used once in a classifier For example profile acl set test protocol tcp protocol udp deny is not allowed For this example you need to create a separate classifier for each protocol and apply them to the same PVC s The following example creates an ACL rule example named test for traffic from VLAN 10 with a priority level of 2 This rule limits the rate on the classified traffic to 1000 kbps and changes the priority level to 7 408 Chapter 54 ACL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 291 ACL Profile Set Command Example ras switch acl profile set test vlan 10 priority 2 rate 1000 rpri 7 54 1 2 ACL Profile Delete Command Syntax ras switch acl profile delete name where name The name of the ACL profile This command removes the specified ACL profile Note You cannot remove the ACL profile s that is currently in use 54 1 3 ACL Profile Show Map Command Syntax ras gt switch acl profile showmap lt name gt where lt name gt The name of the ACL profile This command displays the DSL port s to which the specified ACL profile is applied The following example displays the port mapping table for the example ACL profile Figure 292 ACL Profile Show Map Command Example ras gt switch acl profile showmap test profile test port type vpi vci 54 1 4 ACL Profile Show Command Syntax ras
286. he valid range is between 1 and 4094 Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN 163 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 44 MVLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays each port number Control Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this multicast VLAN Use the Select All button to include every port Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this multicast VLAN Use the Select All button to include every port Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN ID Use the All button to include every port Use the None button to clear all of the ports check boxes Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields afresh 19 4 MVLAN Group Screen Use this screen to configure ranges of multicast IP addresses for each multicast VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application Multicast VLAN MVLAN Group Figure 81 MVLAN Group E MYLAN MYLAN Status MVLAN Setup MVLAN ID s v Index i xl Start Multicast IP 0 0 0 0 2240 0 0 239 255 255 255 End Multicast IP 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Appl
287. hen this device is the root switch Root max age second This is the maximum time in seconds the root switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Root hello time second This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Root forward delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Max age second This is the maximum time in seconds the AAM1212 can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Hello time second This is the time interval in seconds at which the AAM1212 transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Forward delay second This is the time in seconds the AAM1212 will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Port Status This identifies the AAM1212 s ports that support the use of STP If STP is activated the following fields appear If STP is not activated Disabled appears State This field displays the port s RSTP or STP state With RSTP the state can be discarding learning or forwarding With STP the state can be disabled blocking listening learning or forwarding Disabl
288. hose caused by temperature variations and moisture Syntax 52 2 10 SELT Diagnostic Set Command ras adsl linediag setselt port number This command has the AAMI212 perform a single end line test on the specified port This test checks the distance to the subscriber s location Note The port must have an open loop There cannot be a DSL device phone fax machine or other device connected to the subscriber s end of the telephone line The test takes at least 15 seconds You can run the SELT Diagnostic Get Command to check the status of the test and to look at the results Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 2 11 52 2 12 The following example starts a SELT test on DSL port 1 Figure 252 SELT Diagnostic Set Command Example ras adsl linediag setselt 1 SELT Diagnostic Get Command Syntax ras adsl linediag getselt port number Use this command to display the status and the results of the SELT test on the specified port The report tells you what gauge of telephone wire is connected to the port and the approximate length of the line measured both in meters and thousands of feet The following example displays the status and results SELT diagnostic results for DSL port 1 Figure 253 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example ras adsl linediag getselt 1 port inprogress cableType loopEstimateLength 1 INPROGRESS 24 AWG O m 0 00 kFt ras adsl li
289. iag getld992 3 port number Use this command to display the line diagnostics results in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard after using the line diagnostics set command on a DSL port Use the line diagnostics results to analyze problems with the physical DSL line Note Wait at least one minute after using the line diagnostic set command before using this command Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the line diagnostics results for DSL port 1 Figure 251 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command Example ras adsl linediag getid992 3 1 port 1 number of subcarries 256 32 hlinScale 17024 32767 latn 2 0 0 2 satn 2 0 0 0 snrm 0 0 6 0 attndr 10398468 1152000 farEndActatp 20 4 12 4 i li rl li im log dB QLN dBm SNR dB 0 A N A A A A 1 A N A A N A N A 2 A N A A A A 3 A N A N A N A N A 4 A N A N A A A 5 A N A A N A N A 6 0 31557 0 00796 9 9 120 5 85 7 0 43477 0 31599 5 3 120 0 42 0 8 0 28313 0 67576 2 6 0719 5 44 5 9 0 01016 0 86645 1 1 119 0 46 5 10 0 28423 0 89969 0 4 1T8 5 51 25 11 0 48750 0 85403 30 1 118 0 52 50 12 0 63495 0 79630 0 2 118 0 54 5 13 0 75373 0 75644 0 6 Salles 56 5 14 0 84457 0 72510 1 0 SALT 0 56 5 15 0 89389 0 68549 Ual 116 5 56 5 16 0 90713 0 64631 T0 114 5 56 5 17 0 91955 0 63196 1 0 116 0 57 0 18 0 95053 0 64860 T4 3 116 0 57 0 19 0 97781 0 6756
290. ibels dB that is permitted in the L2 power mode This is the total transmit power decrease that is allowed to occur in the L2 power mode Max L2 Rate Set the maximum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 Min L2 Rate Set the minimum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 LO to L2 Rate Set the down stream transfer rate in Kilobits per second that serves as the threshold for whether the port is to use the LO or the L2 power mode The system changes from LO mode to L2 mode when the downstream transfer rate stays below this threshold for LO Time The system changes back from L2 mode to LO mode when the downstream transfer rate goes above this threshold This rate must be less than or equal to one half of the Min L2 Rate and at least 16 Kbps Use this part of the screen to mask carrier tones Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the ADSL port Do this to have the system not use an ADSL
291. ic IGMP multicast groups use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure a different profile and then assign it to the subscriber s ADSL port in the XDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup IGMP Filter Profile The top of the screen displays the configured IGMP filter profiles Use the bottom part of the screen with the Add and Cancel buttons to add or edit alarm profiles Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 129 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 62 IGMP Filter Profile IGMP Filter Profile J Port Profile C Profile Alarm Profile Index 1 Name jan 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A o 2c co E 2 e Orin kf win Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Start IP Name Delete DEFVAL C _Detet m End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP End IP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 IGMP Filter Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Profile Click Port Profile to configure port profiles and assign them to individual ports see Section 14 1 on page 119 VC Profile Click VC Profile to open the VC Profile screen where you can configure virtual channel profiles see Section 14 5 on page 125
292. ice has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Chapter 39 MAC Table 247 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Ifthe device has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame 39 2 MAC Table Screen To open this screen click Management MAC Table Figure 133 MAC Table ED MAC Table Show port ALL Refresh time 00 05 19 1970 01 01 Index Port MAC l Enet 1 00 50 8d 48 59 1f Refresh Hush The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Show port Select a port for which to display learned MAC addresses or display all of them Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Previous Next Click one of these buttons to show the previous next screen if all of the information cannot be seen in one screen Index This is the number of the MAC table entry Port This is the port to which the MAC address is associated MAC This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came Refresh Click Refresh to update the list of dynamically learned MAC addresses Flush Click Flush to remove all of the dynamically learned MAC address entries from the MAC table
293. ides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed The egress outgoing port s of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination MAC address and the VID of the frame For a unicast frame the egress port based on the destination MAC address must be a member of the VID also otherwise the frame is blocked For a broadcast frame it is duplicated only on ports except the ingress port itself that are members of the VID thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per VLAN per port basis recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame otherwise it is transmitted as an untagged frame 16 3 VLAN Status Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application VLAN 142 Chapter 16 VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 66 VLAN Status VLAN Status g Static VLAN Setting VLAN Port Setting The Number Of VLAN 1 Page1 of 1 Index Status Name VID Elapsed Time 1 21 3 4 15185 7 0 8 159 110 ee enet1 enet2 1 Static DEFAULT 1 D days 19 49 13 UI OTe SCT LUIS pU DUCUM UU DT ULTIO Poll Interval S ao Set Interval Stop Change Pages Previous Page Next Page The follow
294. ient request was received The next field B in the figure is 0 to 23 bytes of optional information that you specify This is followed by the name and telephone number configured for the DSL port The port number optional information B in the figure DSL name and DSL telephone number fields are separated by forward slashes Figure 93 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub option Format 25 3 DHCP Relay Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Relay Figure 94 DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Enable DHCP Relay Relay Mode Enable Option82 Sub option1 Sub option1 Circuit ID Enable Option82 Sub option2 Sub option2 Remote ID VLAN ID o 1 4094 0 for the default server Primary Server IP 0 0 0 0 Secondary Server IP 0 0 0 0 Active Server Primary Server List Note The server with VLAN ID 0 is the default server Active server Index VLAN ID Primary Server IP Secondary Server IP Select 1 0 172 23 5 2 0 0 0 0 r Delete Select m None 184 Chapter 25 DHCP Relay AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 DHCP Relay LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Relay Enable DHCP relay to have the AAM1212 relay DHCP requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients Relay Mode Specify how the AAM1212 relays DHCP requests Auto The AAM1212 routes DHCP requests to the active server for each VLAN Both
295. ier tones 70 and 71 for DSL port 5 Figure 231 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 2 ras adsl dscarrier0 5 0 0300000000000 52 1 15 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Syntax ras adsl dscarrierl port number m0 ml m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 lt m7 gt where m0 m7 The downstream carrier tones to be masked disabled Each lt mx gt can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits 0 ffffffff Each lt mx gt represents 32 carrier tones each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones m0 7 tones 256 287 ml 7 tones 288 319 m2 tones 320 351 m3 tones 352 383 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 355 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 1 16 m4 7 tones 384 415 m5 tones 416 447 m6 tones 448 479 m7 tones 480 511 The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it This command displays or sets masks for downstream carrier tones from 256 to 511 on the specified ADSL2 port s Use this command to have the system not use a DSL line s tones that are known to have a high noise level The following example disables downstream carrier tone 307 for ADSL2 port 5 Figure 232 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 1 ras adsl dscarrierl 5 0 00001000 00000 0 The following example disables downstream carrier tones
296. ile Click Alarm Profile to open the Alarm Profile screen where you can configure limits that trigger an alarm when exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 127 IGMP Filter Profile Click IGMP Filter Profile to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 129 Index This is the number of the VC profile Name This name identifies the VC profile Encap This field displays the profile s type of encapsulation llc or vc Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 125 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 26 VC Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION AAL This field displays the ATM adaptation layer used by the VC profile aal5 The VC profile uses ATM adaptation layer 5 Class This field displays the type of ATM traffic class cbr constant bit rate vbr real time variable bit rate nrt vbr non real time variable bit rate or ubr unspecified bit rate PCR This is the Peak Cell Rate PCR the maximum number of cells that the sender can send per second CDVT This field displays the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay SCR The Sustained Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term in cells per second that can be transmitted SCR applies with the vbr traffic class BT Burst Tolerance BT is the maximum number of cells that the port
297. imit for port 4 Figure 183 IGMP Count Enable Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop igmpcount enable 4 47 6 3 IGMP Count Set Command Syntax ras gt switch igmpsnoop igmpcount set lt portlist gt lt count gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt count gt 0 16 the maximum number of IGMP groups subscribers on the specified port s can join This command sets the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port s The following command sets a IGMP count limit of 2 for port 4 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 317 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 184 IGMP Count Set Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount set 4 2 47 6 4 IGMP Count Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the IGMP count limit setting status for the specified DSL port s The following example displays the IGMP count limit settings for ports 1 5 Figure 185 IGMP Count Show Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop igmpcount show 1 5 port enable count 47 7 IGMP Snoop Statistics Commands Use the IGMP Snoop Statis
298. imum upstream and downstream rate settings profile and name of each DSL port The following example displays information on DSL port 5 Figure 216 DSL Port Show Command Example ras gt adsl show 5 port enable mode up downstream profile 5 auto 512 2048 DEFVAL 52 1 2 DSL Port Enable Command Syntax ras gt adsl enable lt portlist gt Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 345 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command forcibly enables the specified DSL port s 52 1 3 DSL Port Disable Command Syntax ras gt adsl disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command forcibly disables the specified DSL port s Note The factory default of all ports is enabled 52 1 4 DSL Port Profile Show Command Syntax ras gt adsl profile show profile where lt profile gt A profile name This command displays the specified DSL profile or all DSL profiles if you do not specify one 346 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the DSL DEFVAL profile Figure 217 DSL Profile Show
299. ing table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Static VLAN Setting Click Static VLAN Setting to configure ports to dynamically join a VLAN group or permanently assign ports to a VLAN group or prohibit ports from joining a VLAN group see Section 16 4 on page 144 VLAN Port Setting Click VLAN Port Setting to specify Port VLAN IDs PVIDs See Section 16 5 on page 145 The Number of This is the number of VLANs configured on the AAM1212 VLAN Page X of X This identifies which page of VLAN status information is displayed and how many total pages of VLAN status information there are The first table displays the names of the fields The subsequent tables show the settings of the VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Name VID The name identifies an individual VLAN The vid is the PVID the Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port 1 12 enet1 enet2 These columns display the VLAN s settings for each port A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows that this VLAN was added to the AAM1212 statically that is added as a permanent entry Chapter 16 VLAN 143 AAM1212 51 53
300. ing to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost as illustrated in the following table Table 48 Path Cost LINK SPEED de rp peer E ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this Integrated Ethernet Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Integrated Ethernet Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol 171 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with RSTP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for the connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in RSTP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops Figure 84 STP Root Ports and Designated Ports Root Bridge pio Designated Port4 Design ated Por
301. ings 13 7 xDSL Port Setup Screen To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup Figure 48 xDSL Port Setup DEHN IV Active Copy Port M Active VC Setup PPVC Setup O Customer Info r Customer Tel E 2 Features x Protile amp Mode IGMP filter security I Frame Type Settings Paste O virtual Channels O Alar rofile O PYID amp Priority r Packet Filter Port Active enabled enabled enabled i 2 3 enabled 4 5 enabled Customer Info Customer Tel Profile Mode Channels DEFYAL 1 DEFVAL DEFYAL DEFVAL 1 1 1 DEFYAL 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 xDSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VC Setup Click VC Setup to open the VC Setup screen where you can configure VC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 9 on page 110 PPVC Setup Click PPVC Setup to open the PPVC Setup screen where you can configure priority PVC settings for the DSL ports see Section 13 11 on page 115 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 103 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 19 xDSL Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Copy Port Do the following to copy settings from one DSL port to another DSL port or ports Paste 1 Select the number of the DSL port from which you want to copy settings 2 Select the settings that you want to copy 3 Click Paste and the following screen appears 4 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use
302. interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR Type the maximum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR Type the minimum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum upstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Target SNR Type the target upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target upstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Up Shift SNR The upstream up shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes above this number the device can attempt to use a higher transfer rate Configure the upstream up shift signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the target upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 25 Port Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Down Shift SNR The upstream down shift signal to noise margin 0 31 dB When the channel s signal to noise margin goes below this number the device shifts to a lower transfer rate Configure the upstream down shift signal to
303. io button Click Copy and then click Paste The following screen appears The following screen appears Figure 29 Select Ports 1 9 10 12 ENET1 select an None ENET2 12Click All and then click Apply The VC Setup screen is updated 66 Chapter 5 Initial Configuration AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 30 VC Setup c OESTE xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Port E Super Channel oO o VCI o VPI DS VC Profile DEFVAL US VC Profile PVID fi 1 4094 Priority 0 x Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port VPI Vcl DS US VC Profile PVID Priority Select 1 10 43 DEFVAL 4 C DEFVAL 2 10 43 1 3 10843 DEFVAL 4 10 43 DEFVAL 5 10 43 nn Index 1selecteg Delete No Channel copied Copy Paste 13Click Config Save Config Save The Config Save screen appears Figure 31 Config Save NwcnirErvrE According to data entries Saving process may take 10 seconds to several minutes Save 14Click Save The following screen should appear Figure 32 Config Save Save Successful Microsoft Internet Explorer Xl AN Save successfully You can now use the device with the other settings set to the defaults to provide service to DSL subscribers See Appendix A on page 423 for information on other default settings Chapter 5 Initial Configuration 67 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 68 Chapter 5 Initial Configuration AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Gui
304. ion 272 Chapter 42 Command Examples AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 90 Log Messages continued LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION Session Begin INFO A console telnet or FTP session has begun see the process field for the type of session Session End INFO A console telnet or FTP session has terminated see the process field for the type of session Sync with timeserver WARN The device was not able to synchronize the time with the time server at the ip failed listed IP address Sync with timeserver INFO The device synchronized the time with the time server at the listed IP ip successful address Received File file INFO A file was uploaded to the AAM1212 by FTP file received file s name Received Firmware WARN Achecksum error was detected during an attempted FTP firmware upload Checksum Error Received Firmware WARN Someone attempted to upload a firmware file with a wrong identity via FTP Invalid Received Firmware Size WAR The file size was too large with an attempted FTP firmware upload too large THERMO LOW VOLTAGE WAR The device s voltage went above the accepted operating range dev id limit id 121 2 V 221 8 V 323 3 V 4218 V yg uua valus threshold voltage limit lt gt Peake lt voltage gt
305. ion ATPR in decibels dB that is permitted in a L2 power reduction The system can gradually decrease the DSL line transmission power while it is in the L2 power mode This is the largest individual power reduction allowed in the L2 power mode The range is 0 15 dB Set the maximum Aggregate Transmit Power Reduction Total ATPRT in decibels dB that is permitted in the L2 power mode This is the total transmit power decrease that is allowed to occur in the L2 power mode The range is 0 15 dB Set the maximum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 Set the minimum transfer rate in Kilobits per second that is permitted while the port is in the L2 power mode The supported range is 32 4096 Kbps in 4 Kbps increments If you enter a number that is not a multiple of 4 the system uses the next lower multiple of 4 If you enter 39 for example the system will use 36 Set the down stream transfer rate in Kilobits per second that serves as the threshold for whether the port is to use the LO or the L2 power mode The system changes from LO mode to L2 mode when the downstream transfer rate stays below this threshold for LO Time The system changes back from L2 mode to LO mode when
306. ion speed is set to match that of the port on the peer Ethernet device Check the Ethernet cable and connections between the LAN port and the peer Ethernet device Make sure that the peer Ethernet device is functioning properly If the Ethernet cable and peer Ethernet device are both OK and the LEDs still stay off there may be a problem with the port Contact the distributor 55 4 LAN Port Data Transmission The LAN port s LED is on but data cannot be transmitted Table 102 Troubleshooting Data Transmission STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure that the LAN port has the appropriate mode setting Make sure that the AAM1212 s IP settings are properly configured Check the VLAN configuration Ping the AAM1212 from a computer behind the peer Ethernet device oJ j o0 N If you cannot ping check the Ethernet cable and connections between the Ethernet port and the Ethernet switch or router Check the switch mode In daisychain mode if you have a loop topology and enable RSTP it is possible for RSTP to disable Ethernet port 1 the uplink port Note It is not recommended to use daisychain mode in a loop topology 414 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 55 5 DSL Data Transmission The DSL link is up but data cannot be transmitted Table 103 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check th
307. is section to look at a summary of all static routes in the AAM1212 Previous Page Click this to display the preceding page of static route entries Next Page Click this to display the following page of static route entries Index This field displays the index number of the route Name This field displays the name of this static route Destination Address This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway Address This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your device that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column 230 Chapter 35 Static Routing AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 36 Alarm This chapter shows you how to display the alarms sets the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s and set port alarm severity level threshold settings 36 1 Alarm The AAMI212 monitors for equipment DSL and system alarms and can report them via SNMP or syslog You can specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s
308. isplay history alarm L alarm all lt condition gt all sdate all edate all for rev detail show severity all Display current alarm L L lt alarm gt all lt condition gt all sdate all edate all for rev detail port show severity all Display xDSL port threshold of L L severity which will issue an alarm port set all enetl enet2 p SetxDSL port threshold of severity M L ort severity which will issue an alarm tablelist lt alarm gt all Display system alarm table L L lt severity gt all lt fac gt all lt target gt lt target 2 lt condition gt all switch igmpsnoop show Displays the IGMP snooping M L setting igmpsnoop enable lt proxy snooping gt Sets IGMP snooping mode H H igmpsnoop disable Turns off IGMP snooping H H 260 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P igmpsnoop bandwidth bandwidth Set default bandwidth for multicast M H default IP channels igmpsnoop bandwidth lt index gt Delete an entry of bandwidth M H delete budget setting specified in lt index gt field igmpsnoop bandwidth lt portlist gt Disable bandwidth budget control M H port disable for a port igmpsnoop bandwidth lt portlist gt Enable bandwidth budget control L H port enable for a port igmpsnoop ban
309. isplays in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard Use the information to analyze problems with the physical ADSL line Note ToneDiag is faster than the LDM test but displays less information Chapter 38 Diagnostic 245 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 246 Chapter 38 Diagnostic AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 39 MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table 39 1 Introduction to MAC Table The MAC table lists device MAC addresses that are dynamically learned by the AAMI212 The table shows the following for each MAC address the port upon which Ethernet frames were received from the device to which VLAN groups the device belongs if any and to which channel it is connected for devices connected to DSL ports The device uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure Figure 132 MAC Table Filtering Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC table Forward to all ports except the incoming one Is outgoing port different from incoming port Fitter this frame Forward to outgoing port 1 The device examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The device checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table Ifthe device has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port Ifthe dev
310. istat erra breton an Ropa ra UE pk ad SE apa ERR 145 Chapter 17 IOMP 149 rese nee ER 149 17 2 IP Multicast BAP SS SES 12er ket Lp bua anaana Eua EMI ada EH PR RR PEE ERR vaa 149 eed USE ueris e cR PUE 149 T722 IOMP POR 149 TE oo GMP Sieus SHOP ONN ero eite eotisk ssa tO Pbri oe pua HL ERpA E POE Ern CEN ot Gs eaa E HA TERR dO 150 UE e zds ls subsit 152 17 4 1 Bandwidth Port Setup Screen uisus ibo arr ri ERR tekidir naine aoa da 153 1T SIP Sap SOFBBIY c escis tr o HERE EHE iSo bed EN ena e matr E nd 154 17 6 IGMP Filter Setup BORG eT 155 FECE ONP CaUum Sorea TT m T 155 TO IGMP xviii NE SOT 1 TITIO 156 TO IGMP Pon Group Saraan esce t oz te o in nto o pa RR a t o ect eda 157 12 Table of Contents AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Sanc MURGAS i iasrbta ra pink ERE aE AS EEAR FR EQR FDA MAREA YE LENS ERE E FTEER A CETE 159 181 Static MUTI Dai carbs eie te aaia eee dios epa xa a cade pc ndi et 159 18 2 Static Multicast GOFBOll 2ssctcietencecies ubt ei EC aeree erp pert e EeEbE Ira EE CFL E Lee Cea Max Eor dade 159 Chapter 19 Mullicast VLAN ac isis y Esa R IER RI RMFTERSEKRNSEEKRE RAI UI ARRA a A RR ERRSENARMERERR URS YNNR RETOUR MEE 161 19 1 Multicast VLAN ONOFVIOM isi ieseeaszzk ear tak at i Rn x rk ean nk 161 19 2 MVLAN Sta
311. iussis aca cio rentena tik tbi bn ak ka 102 12 5 Dota SUING Lnsicassediessit N IQ MEPI PITE EFE C erHE PS ND R RAE 103 137 XDSL Pon Sem OERBBPT usen pd eor ER b a eut LA P E A 103 13 7 1 XDSL Port Setting Sreo 12s eda rirusun naiai da dali 105 13 8 Virtual Channels m 109 Te ce gU PCIE EAA 109 o ANE rame 110 Dur ei ed D T 110 13 8 4 Virtual Channel Profile o eranc inaaianei EE Re ERE Ro dd 110 Tot VO Se SSOPBBIY ducite cie vise b VII EA in Ia MM 110 1310 Proniy based age q 114 T2 TI PPYG priscam I T T TIT S 115 1311 1 PPVC Setup Members Sree ca sssaicdscaspssaseniootscecssssnviasaaseccomiaroacs 116 Chapter 14 XDSL Profiles SOU sis ssessitesivtacrsiicaisssriscionpstecistharsasisinieiielavavindussstuasisaiioiavisticwwls 119 TAA Fort Profe Seree uic srt Ern nte ES a PI A dE Fe o bti 119 TALS ALIM IIS iusinssbrivcdes emp ihn ed aii Hec qi e lbe ien rin ec dc HH dn vire Ped sme ERR 121 LESMICUII DM a 122 T4301 PTI GRANGE CIBSSES 1er terret tip e ER aa Edo tad eov dpt Feind d de 122 14 2 5 1 Constant Bil Rate CBR serenando na 122 14 3 1 2 Variable Bit Rate VBR serra hd REEF ES sissa 122 124 3 1 3 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR aera iive ink Ebr ert ERE Heap bia iania iaa 122 TA Sik Draffic Parameters eoscusiepease spi vll ctv ovis V Pen ca bE Eni an 122 Table of Contents 11 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 14 3 2 1 Peak tell Rate PG 52i Ph Ep S bI ai 123
312. ksn paese tv Hus Eee nomen 373 52 2 12 lone Diagnostics 992 3 Command cca ien canet cut t ten petri 373 52 3 Alam Profile COITPabddS 212i duree inean E Enaadbad yx erb iaaa E Saad UE EN eRdx 375 52 3 1 Alarm Profile Show Command L1 rrr tto rrrpr isiin inknn 375 52 3 2 Alarm Profile Sel Command 1 ioci prt tta e ete a petenda 376 52 3 3 Alarm Profile Delete Command eese 378 52 341 Alarm Prone Map Command 2uuvuiiie sesvncissixE Ero rbi rrt ber ass d e anini 378 52 3 5 Alam Profile Showmap Command sosisini tante Eod aa 378 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management uueeeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeene nennen nnne nnns 381 53 1 Virtual Channel Management Overview eeeseeeeeeeeseenenenn nnne 381 53 2 Virtual Channel Profile Commands uiuis rre opi a Rc eren iun 381 53 2 1 Show Virtual Channel Profile Command sse 381 53 2 2 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command 0000000eceeeeresererensnenees 381 Table of Contents 21 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Chapter 54 53 2 3 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command seen 383 aou PVC CBE os oan ned pd utr Ete E oa hb EESE 383 odd TPUC Show COMMA uoc eres E UMP vh Dur teeta i Crue 384 53 9 2 PYCO Set COMMON 225 uoa o hd d a ee t donated aaa d n 384 53 2 2 PVC Delete Command sarrerari EE EE HE RAER KE KaEE 385 TUM Pron based M e 385 5341 PFPVYC Got COMMANA ii
313. l destination Routing Address is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your device that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your device Chapter 35 Static Routing 229 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 79 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to save the new rule to the AAM1212 s volatile memory It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Use th
314. lated based on the PCR or SCR The following figure illustrates the relationship between TAT CDVT and BT If a cell arrives at time A then according to PCR or SCR the next cell is expected to arrive at time B If the next cell arrives earlier than time C it is discarded or tagged for not complying with the TAT Time C is calculated based on the CDVT or BT Figure 59 TAT CDVT and BT in Traffic Shaping Ep B CDVT BT 14 4 Upstream Policing Upstream policing is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission coming from the subscriber s device to the AAMI212 Note Upstream policing controls incoming upstream traffic not outgoing downstream The ATM traffic classes and parameters are identical with downstream shaping Upstream policing can control the upstream incoming traffic rate on specific PVCs Upstream ATM cell traffic that violates the policing profile will be discarded Traffic shaping must also be enabled on the subscriber s device in order to use upstream policing If a subscriber attempts to enlarge his device s PVC shaping parameters in order to get more upstream traffic bandwidth it will violate the AAMI212 s upstream policing profile and the traffic will be discarded Operators can use this feature to prevent subscribers from changing their device settings 124 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51
315. lay DHCP statistics for a port L L clear dhcp snoop lt portlist gt Display snooping L L rmon stats history Display uplink subtending link M L enetl enet2 RMON information rstp M L vlan vlanlist Displays current VLANs M L mac Displays current MAC address M L forwarding table port lt portlist gt lt vpi gt This command displays and or M L lt vci gt clear erases port statistics dot1x portlist M L enet Displays Ethernet port settings M L and statistics ip Displays a Management port s M status and performance data config show sys sw adsllip st Displays the device s M L at all nopause configuration save Saves the current configuration H H restore Reloads the factory default H H configuration exit Ends the console or telnet L L session Chapter 41 Commands 269 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 270 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 42 Command Examples This chapter gives some examples of commands 42 1 Command Examples Overview These are commands that you may use frequently in configuring and maintaining your AAM1212 See Chapter 45 on page 295 for commands that deal with the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 42 2 Sys Commands These are the commonly used commands that belong to the sys system group of commands 42 2 1 Log Show Command Syntax ras sys log show This command displays the system error log An example is shown next Figure 135 Log Show Comma
316. led VPI 0 VCI 33 VC Profile DEFVAL factory default Default VC Profile Settings DEFVAL Profile Settings Encapsulation RFC 1483 RFC 2684 Multiplexing LLC based Traffic Class UBR PCR 300000 cells second CDVT 0 DEFVAL VC Profile Settings Encapsulation RFC 1483 RFC 2684 Multiplexing VC based Traffic Class UBR PCR 300000 cells second CDVT 0 Default IGMP Filter Profile Settings The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all of the DSL ports by default It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 a The AAM1212 DSL ports PVCs use ATM Adaptation Layer AAL 5 424 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide APPENDIX B AAM1212 Specifications This chapter provides the specifications for the AAMI212 Table 113 Device Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits User Name admin Default Password 1234 Dimensions 166 8 mm W x 296 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight 1 234 kg Power Specification 15V DC 25Watts Interface One Telco 50 connector 12 ADSL2 Ports Pin 1 12 and 26 37 for CO Pin 14 25 and 39 50 for USER Onemini RJ11 console port for local management Two 10 100BASE T Ethernet ports for uplink MAC Address Table Up to 9 5K entries ARP Table Up to 500 entries Operation Temperature 09 C 50 C S
317. liG osnsoscissi basim Y rasaan 336 Table 94 Line Performance Counters ice ee ERR EERREMEBEMEEREREEDRERERE MIND URER P PINE SAERR MINER 365 Table 95 15 Minute Performance Counters iiec erret ener terrre 366 Table 96 Line Diagnostics Get Command eeeesssssesseeee nennen nnne 369 Table 97 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command sesenta nnns 371 Table 99 Tone Ding LONE 1 iieri Rete LIS Rr LES MAL Ki EL a RR RPEL da 374 Table 99 SYS LED Troubleshooting userxccuiciesusatuk bna ecu bP E ti dept nda e PE HIA danse 413 Table 100 ALM LED Troubleshooting iusccsss cesso oec ptor Ere saints 413 Table 101 10 100 LED Troubleshooting imsisexccietrernostidbesen dieses o sre i donas 414 Table 102 Troubleshooting Data Transmission essere 414 Table 103 DSL Data Transmission Troubleshooting eeseeeese 415 Table 104 DSL Voice Troubleshooting iiec terr nenne d RR Pb d Reo tt cii cc 415 Tole To VEL ect 416 Table 106 Testing In house Wiring susceciaisiesseiiss rete dabi isiksi s apes easiness 417 Table 107 Troubleshooting a Local Server 417 Table 108 Troubleshooting the SYNGC rate reete tnnc 418 Table 109 Troubleshooting the AAM1212 s Configured Settings 418 Table 110 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server eese nennen 419 Table 111 Troubleshooting Telnet ausieisissi sce cress iere rer rir cd d etaed re caos 419 Table 112 Default SUAS eec M 423
318. lications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note that a VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic 16 2 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the device on which they were created The VLANS can be created statically by hand or configured dynamically using GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero
319. like video or Internet Protocol television IPTV IGMP count can limit how many channels IGMP groups the subscriber connected to a DSL port can use at a time If each channel requires 4 5 Mbps of download bandwidth and the subscriber s connection supports 11 Mbps you can use IGMP count to limit the subscriber to using just 2 channels at a time This also effectively limits the subscriber to using only two IPTVs with the DSL connection IGMP Count Disable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns off the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port s The following command turns off the IGMP count limit for port 4 316 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 182 IGMP Count Disable Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount disable 4 47 6 2 IGMP Count Enable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop igmpcount enable portlist where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns on the IGMP count limit for the specified DSL port s The following command turns on the IGMP count l
320. locall V V critical 18 eqpt 10003 hw mon fail locall V V critical 19 eqpt 10004 cold start locali V V info SNIP 43 7 Log Format The following table describes the columns in the list Table 92 Log Format LABEL DESCRIPTION no This is the index number of the alarm entry in this list display alarm This is the category of alarms eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms sys represents system alarms 282 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 92 Log Format continued LABEL DESCRIPTION condition There is a condition code number for the specific alarm message and a text description for the condition under which the alarm applies facility This is the log facility local1 local7 on the syslog server where the system is to log this alarm This is for alarms that send alarms to a syslog server snmp This displays V if the system is to send this alarm to an SNMP server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to an SNMP server syslog This displays V if the system is to send this alarm to a syslog server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to a syslog server severity This is the alarm severity level critical major minor or info clearable This displays V if the alarm clear command removes the alarm from the a system It displays
321. m traffic Each ACL profile consists of a rule and an action and you assign ACL profiles to PVCs 31 1 1 ACL Profile Rules Each ACL profile uses one of 14 rules to classify upstream traffic These rules are listed below by rule number 1 etype lt etype gt vlan lt vid gt 2 etype lt etype gt smac lt mac gt 3 etype lt etype gt dmac lt mac gt 4 vlan vid smac mac 5 vlan vid dmac mac 6 smac mac dmac mac 7 vlan vid priority lt priority gt 8 etype lt etype gt 9 vlan lt vid gt 10smac lt mac gt 11dmac lt mac gt 12priority lt priority gt 13protocol lt protocol gt 14 srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt tos lt stos gt lt etos gt srcport lt sport gt lt eport gt dstport sport lt eport gt The input values for these values have the following ranges vid 1 4094 e priority 1 7 lt etype gt 0 65535 Chapter 31 ACL 211 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide e lt protocol gt tcp udp ospf igmp ip gre icmp lt ptype gt lt ptype gt 0 255 mask 0 32 tos 0 255 port 0 65535 If you apply multiple profiles to a PVC the AAM1212 checks the profiles by rule number The lower the rule number the higher the priority the rule and profile has For example there are two ACL profiles assigned to a PVC Profilel is for VLAN ID 100 rule number 9 traffic and Profile2 is for IEEE 802 1p priori
322. me Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your device You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Enter the name of the person in charge of this device You can use up to 31 Name ASCII characters spaces are allowed Chapter 8 General Setup 85 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 12 General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Model This field displays your device type Use Time Server When Bootup Select the time service protocol that the timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the device the time and date will be reset to 2000 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The device searches for the timeserver
323. mitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min ES seconds This field sets the limit for the number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min SES This field sets the limit for the number of Severely Errored seconds that are seconds permitted to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min UAS This field sets the limit for the number of UnAvailable seconds that are permitted seconds to occur within 15 minutes 15 Min Failed Fast Retrain This field sets the limit for the number of failed fast retrains that are permitted within 15 minutes Init Failure Trap Select Active to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap Fast Rate Up bps Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent Fast Rate Down bps Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent Interleave Rate Up bps Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent Interleave Rate Down bps Specify a rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s upstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent Alarm pr
324. mmands 303 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 46 2 2 MAC Filter Enable Command Syntax ras switch mac filter enable portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns on the MAC filtering feature on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example turns on the MAC filtering feature on DSL port 5 Figure 164 MAC Filter Enable Command Example ras gt switch mac filter enable 5 46 2 3 MAC Filter Disable Command Syntax ras gt switch mac filter disable portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command turns off the MAC filtering feature on the specified DSL port s or on all DSL ports if no port is specified The following example turns off the MAC filtering feature on DSL port 5 Figure 165 MAC Filter Disable Command Example ras gt switch mac filter disable 5 46 2 4 MAC Filter Mode Command Syntax ras gt switch mac filter mode lt port gt lt accept deny gt 304 Chapter 46 MAC Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where accept deny accept Only allow frames from MAC addresses that you specify an
325. n each port 30 1 Transparent LAN Service TLS Overview Transparent LAN Service also known as VLAN stacking or Q in Q allows a service provider to distinguish multiple customers VLANS even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use TLS to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different services based on specific VLANS for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags to traffic The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate Before the AAMI212 sends the frames from the customers the VLAN ID is added to the frames When packets intended for specific customers are received on the AAMI212 the outer VLAN tag is removed before the traffic is sent 30 1 1 TLS Network Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VL
326. n 163 Figure ST IUE V Grou 164 26 List of Figures AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide zi icudu uc 4l 167 Fowo oq MAG FINOT Mee 169 Figure 84 STP Root Ports and Designated Ports eeeeeseseeeeeee 172 Figure 85 Spanning Tree Protocol Status oct in reet nera tirer d YR 173 Figure 26 Spanning Tre Prolotol cus erri e x rESE E iinan FREE PR REE PEE ai 175 Figure 87 SCR EE FT M 177 Figos SS RADIUS T EE EAA EEEE AdAS AAA 178 Fe Ia Manana 179 Figure DU FOI Seo eaa o 181 Fowo ST oelet POG senaia Mop Gaal bab Cud a BAD EE EE op ELA NA TEDdaS 182 Figure 92 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format n se 183 Figure 93 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub option Format 184 Fane 94 DHOP ROI auna i o FE Fe NM EPERQ pA VERTU EE PE LO XME EPA EO UREROSIRD EM brksDMS 184 Figure d DHCP SNOOP secs cette cantatas id ach CI dodi sand qc codd d daret dior peus dd dock t bdad 187 Figure 96 DHCP Snoop Status 1 cuoi p ucts alia chapeau kidd uda E pic Ez Erea 188 Figure o7 DHCP Cone axccdiqudsepiissitbeeteasi toni v rr pE nane herede Up brbeud a Ran MR 189 Figure 98 2684 Routed Mode Example eese nein nnne 192 Figure 99 2684 Routed PYG 22 ireciccicepunde doni korea Rua tbea CER AL EEEN A C QUIE KM ba cU RUN cud 193 Figure 100 2064 Routed DOMAIN i2 iicuiior reiecit tertii deerit acer dado ke enda 194 Figure TOT FEM ADT
327. n Scenaro B Liisescccccrseseecc cor eese oerte tke ta tan sanninna sania 51 Figure 15 Two Separate MDFs for End user and CO Connections 52 oU ixleWni i nsgEeecg ple c m 53 Foue TT LOGI e UE 56 Foue TO RETO soa proe meer re eR GRE HEINE ERA OR Eh RO ED 56 Figure 19 User ACCOUNT T 59 Foue 20 Usor ACCOUN siisii 60 Fane 1 LOG eec c 61 Figure 22 IP DEU asirasi i aE 63 Figure 23 XDSL POIT Setup iussi edad abusu Dind enea ia bail ood deb d od 64 Fiche 2 d Pe gt mm Y 64 Figure 25 VC Setup Dl e Looiu suec ossd elsi Se RI aa LEN UAM TEES PARU 65 Foure 20 Salett PONS eraran egi sia EE REO ER EENM EEE nde LEID d EL EMI dba EU RA 65 Figure 27 VO DOUP M 65 Figur 29 VE Oel uddsstioddmdeeetitiniiespea dd did adii cO ud RR RD d 66 opuIacbe 0 8 PONS mcer TN 66 Figure 30 WO GOLUD 67 RAMI A CSUN SN itd acts TN 67 Figure 32 Config Save Save Successful sassiesinidicescennsdecasceiplolnmabaniaiemeannaingannnnide 67 FOURS o HIN VS asec vhectani pediaiewl a anettaieripresutndd mteenigaendiwed mene etawituiaaips 69 Figure 34 Port Statistics Ethemet iius eret ha eda n op than ha nob habi ei tennis 1 Figure 35 Port Statisties DSL sereins eniinn tuere sock tret eh orte Let X ark E ELISd 74 Figure 36 Port Statistics RMON iiis essct toph PPP EHE EER ELI SERERE EE PH EE Rec 76 Figure 37 Port Statistics RMON ISIN auisperciusrbet d e PERI QUE FERE UE FFES UU
328. n look at or clear the current DHCP snooping table on each port see Section 26 3 on page 188 DHCP Counter Click DHCP Counter to open the screen where you can look at a summary of the DHCP packets on each port see Section 26 4 on page 189 Port This field displays each DSL port number Active This field displays whether DHCP snooping is active V or inactive on this port Chapter 26 DHCP Snoop 187 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 56 DHCP Snoop continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Select this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the DHCP snooping on this port Active Click this to enable DHCP snooping on the selected ports Inactive Click this to disable DHCP snooping on the selected ports All Click this to select all entries in the table None Click this to un select all entries in the table 26 3 DHCP Snoop Status Screen Use this screen to look at or to clear the DHCP snooping table on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status Figure 96 DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Snoop DHCP Counter Show Port fail Port Overflow 1 0 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 DHCP Snoop Status LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Snoop Click DHCP Snoop to open the screen where you can activate or deactivate
329. n specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows the line bit allocation of a DSL port Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into tones This command displays the number of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support DSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist See the ITU T G 992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 upstream carrier load displays the number of bits transmitted per DMT tone for the upstream channel from the subscriber s DSL modem or router to the AAMI212 downstream carrier load displays the number of bits received per DMT tone for the downstream channel from the AAM1212 to the subscriber s DSL modem or router The bit allocation contents are only valid when the link is up In the following example the upstream channel is carried on tones 7 to 39 and the downstream channel is carried on tones 53 to 259 space is left between the channels to avoid interference Figure 244 Linedata Command Exam
330. nce the subscriber s device will not send out a MAC address after the AAMI212 reassembles the Ethernet packets from the AAL5 ATM cells the AAM1212 will append the routed mode gateway s MAC address and the AAM1212 s MAC address as the destination source MAC address 6 For downstream traffic When the AAMI212 sees the destination IP address is specified in the RPVC or RPVC domain the AAMI212 will strip out the MAC header and send them to the corresponding RPVC 390 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 7 1 2684 Routed Mode Example The following figure shows an example RFC 2684 formerly RFC 1483 routed mode set up The gateway server uses IP address 192 168 10 102 and is in VLAN 1 The AAMI212 uses IP address 192 168 20 101 The subscriber s device the CPE is connected to DSL port 1 on the AAM1212 and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 and VCI 35 The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 The routed domain is the LAN IP addresses behind the CPE device The CPE device s LAN IP address is 10 10 10 10 and the LAN computer s IP address is 10 10 10 1 This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Figure 271 2684 Routed Mode Example Ej IP 192 168 10 102 m VLAN 1 IP 192 168 20 101 PVC 8 35 WAN IP 192 168 10 200 LAN IP 10 10 10 10 m s IP 10 10 10 1 Note the following The CPE devi
331. nd DSL service User with telephone service only 3 1 9 2 1 Procedure To Connect To MDFs 1 Connect the Telco 50 connector end of the cable to the Telco 50 connector 2 Connect the USER wiring on the other end of the Telco 50 cable to the upper ports of MDF 3 using a punch down tool 3 Connect the telephone wiring from the end user s DSL modem s to the lower ports of MDF 3 4 Connect the CO wiring of the Telco 50 cable to the lower ports of MDF 2 using a punch down tool 5 Connect the upper ports of MDF 2 to the lower ports of MDF 1 using telephone wires 6 Connect the upper ports of MDF 1 to the telephone company 7 Telephone subscribers only non DSL subscribers retain connections to the lower ports of MDF 1 8 Change the wiring from MDF 1 to MDF 3 for telephone subscribers who want DSL service Chapter 3 Front Panel 51 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 3 1 9 3 Installation Scenario C Phone service is also available but there are two MDFs one for end user telephone line connections and the other one for CO telephone wiring connections see the following figure Note Users A and B have telephone only service Figure 15 Two Separate MDFs for End user and CO Connections MDF2 User B This installation scenario requires four MDFs Please refer to the following figure for the DSL connection schema e MDFs 1 and 2 are the two original MDFs MDFs3 and A a
332. nd Example sss 366 Figure 248 1Day Performance Command Example 2 2 5 2 ecran tans 367 Figure 249 Line Diagnostics Set Command Example ssesuss 368 Figure 250 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example eeiam anite atat Roe phan 369 Figure 251 Line Diagnostics Get 992 3 Command Example 371 Figure 252 SELT Diagnostic Set Command Example suus 373 Figure 253 Line Diagnostics Get Command Example carre etm t enta te 373 30 List of Figures AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 254 Tone Diagnostics Command Example sess 374 Figure 255 Alarm Profile Show Command Example esses 376 Figure 256 Alarm Profile Set Command EXample 2325 errat oerte titia 377 Figure 257 Alarm Profile Delete Command Example neret tenue 378 Figure 258 Alarm Profile Map Command Example ssssssesssss 378 Figure 259 Alarm Profile Showmap Command Example suus 379 Figure 260 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 1 382 Figure 261 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 2 382 Figure 262 Set Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 3 383 Figure 263 Delete Virtual Channel Profile Command Example 383 Figure 204 PYC Se
333. nd Example ras sys log show 1 Wed Aug 11 20 37 11 2004 telnetd INFO Session Begin 2 Wed Aug 11 20 37 05 2004 telnetd INFO Session Begin 3 Wed Aug 11 20 36 56 2004 telnetd INFO Session Begin 42 3 Log Format The common format of the system logs is item no time process type log message Table 89 Log Format LABEL DESCRIPTION item no This is the index number of the log entry time This is the time and date when the log was created Chapter 42 Command Examples 271 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 89 Log Format continued LABEL DESCRIPTION process This is the process that created the log type This identifies what kind of log it is INFO identifies an information log WARN identifies a warning log log message This is the log s detailed information see Table 90 on page 272 42 3 1 Log Messages The following table lists and describes the system log messages Table 90 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION ADSL port Link INFO An ADSL port established a connection Up SN lt seq no ds port 2 port number rate gt lt us rate gt lt seq no gt sequence number of the connection or met aes paci aes lt ds rate gt downstream rate NM us NM us rate upstream rate us NM upstream noise margin ds NM
334. nd VCI identify a channel on this port PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Hellotime This field displays the timeout for the PPPoE session in seconds DS US VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one Access Concentrator Name This field displays the name of the specified remote access concentrator if any Service Name This field displays the name of the service that uses this PVC on the remote access concentrator Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE 201 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 28 3 PPPoA to PPPoE Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current status of each PPPoA to PPPoE conversion To open this screen click Advanced Application PPPoA to PPPoE and then click an index number Figure 105 PPPoA to PPPoE Status D PPPoA to PPPoE Status d PPPoA to PPPoE PVC 1 0 33 Session Status Session State Session ID Session Up
335. nd password ite 192 158 1 1 Site Realm 44M1212 51 at Thu Jan 01 18 18 52 1970 User Name admin Password Save this password in your password list Cancel 2 Type admin in the User Name field and your password default 1234 in the Password field Click OK The main screen appears This is the web configurator s main screen Figure 18 Home DONED Home amp Logout Advanced Application System Up Time O days 19 25 49 B Routing Protocol ENET Status Port Name ia Duplex Up eneti 100copper full duplex 19 25 37 z Down enet2 M xDSL Status Mode Up Down stream Interleave Fast Up Time Down f Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Ko Joo I Je Jc i deo de d lo I Pollinterval s 40 Set Interval Stop Port a Y Clear Counter Reset A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window See Section 4 4 on page 57 for more information B Click this to open the Home screen This is the same screen that is displayed above See Chapter 6 on page 69 for more information C Click this to log out of the web configurator 56 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 4 4 Navigation Panel In the navigation panel click a menu item to reveal a list of submenu links Click a submenu link to go to the corresponding
336. nd the VLAN ID tag to add See RFC 2684 for details on routed mode traffic carried over AAL type 5 over ATM Use the 2684 Routed PVC Screen to configure PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic Use the 2684 Routed Domain Screen to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE or Customer Premises Equipment This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers Use the RPVC Arp Proxy Screen to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them Use the 2684 Routed Gateway Screen to configure gateway settings For upstream traffic Since the subscriber s device will not send out a MAC address after the AAMI212 reassembles the Ethernet packets from the AAL5 ATM cells the AAM1212 will append the routed mode gateway s MAC address and the AAM1212 s MAC address as the destination source MAC address For downstream traffic When the AAMI212 sees the destination IP address is specified in the RPVC or RPVC domain the AAMI212 will strip out the MAC header and send them to the corresponding RPVC 27 1 1 2684 Routed Mode Example The following figure shows an example 2684 routed mode set up The gateway server uses IP address 192 168 10 102 and is in VLAN 1 The AAMI212 uses IP address 192 168 20 101 The subscriber s device the
337. nediag getselt 1 port inprogress cableType loopEstimateLength id DONE 24AWG O m 0 00 kFt Tone Diagnostics 992 3 Command Syntax ras adsl linediag toneDiag port number Use this command to display the tone diagnostics for a port in the format defined in the ITU T G 992 3 standard You do not need to use the line diagnostics set command first Use the tone diagnostics to analyze problems with the physical DSL line Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 373 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the tone diagnostics results for DSL port 8 Figure 254 Tone Diagnostics Command Example ras ad lined toneD 1 port 1 number of subcarries 512 32 latn 24 1 AST satn 24 1 61 3 snrm 30 2 25 0 attndr 28008000 1248000 farEndActatp 31 0 12 9 i log dB OLN dBm SNR dB 0 N A A A 1 N A A A 2 N A A A 3 N A A A 4 N A A A 5 N A A A 6 21 1 219545 13755 7 T529 124 0 26 0 8 9 9 1235 0 31 55 09 9 z5V 120 5 38 0 Seno gt SSeS Sees nlipe ce e c c2oc ceecnoclcnec 509 6 0 124 0 29 510 6 0 124 0 29 0 511 6 0 123 0 26 9 The following table lists the tone diagnostic parameters See the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 98 ToneDiag Command LABEL DESCRIPTION number of Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub subcarries carriers sub channels of
338. nex I Disable Command This command is available for the AAMI212 51 Syntax ras adsl annexi disable lt portlist gt 360 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command turns off the Annex I all digital mode feature on the specified ADSL2 2 port s The following example turns off the Annex I feature for port 5 Figure 242 Annex Disable Command Example ras adsl annexi disable 5 52 2 DSL Port Statistics Commands Use these commands to display DSL port statistics 52 2 1 DSL Port Show Command Syntax ras statistics adsl show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays DSL port connection statistics including the status V for enabled for disabled operational mode upstream and downstream maximum rates up time and the number of errored seconds The following example displays connection statistics for DSL port 1 Figure 243 DSL Port Show Command Example ras statistics adsl show 1 port status mode up downstream up time error second 15M 24H 1 V ads12 512 9089 00000 00 04 59 15 15 52 2 2 Linedata Command Syntax ras gt statistics adsl linedata lt portlist gt Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 361 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt You ca
339. ng LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click VLAN Status to see which of the AAM1212 s ports are members of which VLANs see Section 16 3 on page 142 VLAN Port Setting Click VLAN Port Setting to specify Port VLAN IDs PVIDs See Section 16 5 on page 145 VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Select the check boxes of the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button You cannot delete a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN You cannot disable a VLAN if any PVIDs are set to use the VLAN or the VLAN is the CPU management VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name for this VLAN group for identification purposes Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static VLAN entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port numbers identify the AAM1212 s ports Control Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Use the Select All button to include every port Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Us
340. nk on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 34 Access Control 227 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 228 Chapter 34 Access Control AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 35 Static Routing This chapter shows you how to configure the static routing function Static routes tell the AAM1212 how to forward the AAMI212 s own IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually This is generally useful for allowing management of the device from a device with an IP address on a different subnet from that of the device s IP address remote management To open this screen click Routing Protocol Static Routing Figure 120 Static Routing Xin n Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Add Cancel Page 1of 1 Previous Page Next Page Destination Gateway index Name Subnet Mask Metric Delete Address Address Default 192 168 1 254 n l 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 1 r1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this section to create a new static route Name Type a name to identify this static route Use up to 31 ASCII characters Spaces and tabs are not allowed Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the fina
341. nnecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem IP Pass through Internet Protocol The underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks ARP Pass through Address Resolution Protocol is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical computer address that is recognized in the local network NetBios Pass through NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to find other computers DHCP Pass through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addresses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems EAPOL Pass through EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 over LAN EAP is used with IEEE 802 1x to allow additional authentication methods besides RADIUS to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients IGMP Pass through Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts Add Click Add or Apply to save the filter settings The settings then display in the Apply
342. nopause 43 4 Alarm Port Show Command Syntax ras alarm port show severity all This command displays port alarm severity level thresholds The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold 280 Chapter 43 Alarm Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the port alarm thresholds for all ports ifindex identifies the interface Figure 141 Alarm Port Show Command Example ras alarm port show no ifindex severity 01 01 minor 02 02 minor 03 03 minor 04 04 minor 05 05 minor SNIP Press any key to continue e to exit n for nopause 43 5 Alarm Port Set Command Syntax ras alarm port set alllenetl enet2 port severity where all enetl enet Ports on the AAMI212 2 port This command sets the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s The system reports an alarm on a port if the alarm has a severity equal to or higher than the port s threshold The following example has the AAM1212 only record critical alarms on DSL port 7 Figure 142 Alarm Port Set Command Example ras alarm port set 7 critical 43 6 Alarm Tablelist Command Syntax ras alarm tablelist alarm all lt severity gt all fac all target target condition all Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 281 AAM1212 51 53 Series U
343. ns 331 49 3 4 Route Delete COMMA 2 25 2 oim cioe iee ieu pb pie CH a OEISPabIV aie P EIE ebsSC PE iR 331 49 3 5 Route Show Command ies cos pepe i da ti on RR eet daa 331 49 3 5 ARP Show Command uus opt pee a rre e ERRRE HE ERU TERM ERE DRQEFER ED IRAE RR HRUME 332 28 3 7 ARP Flush CONIIGHWI crases oeisio e a i EV ana adea a aad 332 a9 SratsiGs P Command iecit dad E dd aX ae e pni bote bo educa cx 332 Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 335 50 1 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Overview ss 335 520 2 Filename C onvebliol po e ord ox d ds e RE Oe Ropa eus 335 930 2 Editable Configuration ENSE aiit es Ses RI ERES Gu Fou ra ella Fk RR S 336 50 3 1 Editable Configuration File Backup eee 336 50 3 2 Edit Configuration File 2setsapeetededdguxenedies ta bag Ud bua deett entina REV EAR PIE EAS 337 50 3 3 Editable Configuration File Upload 152r erri Eterna bEErh ds 338 aiias c4ias cd ves huts nts eactnn usu tenkiovesd saanenodaysnaapunsaiameannns aiexkadesss 339 Chapter 51 MGI DPAD chucatdicirsbitistivietiussdicasstisviglansebinissierislaasecd siistisisginndixeiatinas Asahi isin 341 20 4 SNMP EOI NUNN Se assequi sa pad atii Ext bti S dati E Rp dana ka db RA B RE en AN EA 341 51 14 Get Community COMMON vicio eror riesen tbt Idee ive cbr Eb x rdiet zb Eee pd da 341 51 1 2 Set Community Command 1 22 aot cpi Eur p EDU REP EAM gaia annene
344. nslate PPPoA frames to PPPoE packets and vise versa When PPPoA packets are received from the CPE the ATM headers are removed and the AAM1212 adds PPPoE and Ethernet headers before sending the packets to the BRAS When the AAM1212 receives PPPoE packets from the BRAS PPPoE and Ethernet headers are stripped and necessary PVC information such as encapsulation type is added before forwarding to the designated CPE 28 2 PPPoA to PPPoE Screen Use this screen to set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port This conversion is set up by creating a PAE PVC See Chapter 13 on page 101 for background information about creating PVCs To open this screen click Advanced Application PPPoA to PPPoE Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE 199 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 104 PPPoA to PPPoE VPI DS VC Profile US VC Profile PVID AC Name Service Name Hellotime Show Port A11 o DEFVAL B in 1 4094 Priority o v mE RN uu eoo sec 0 600 Apply Cancel Index Port VPI CI PYID Priority Hellotime S 7 US YC Profile select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 PPPoA to PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions This field is read only once you click on a port number below VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for a channel on this port VCI
345. nstream Carrier Command Example 1 355 Figure 230 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Display Example 355 Figure 231 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 2 355 Figure 232 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 1 356 Figure 233 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 2 356 Figure 234 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Display Example 356 Figure 235 PMM Parameters Command Example 1 ien rta kaena 358 Figure 236 Impulse Noise Protection Command Example sss 358 Figure 237 Annex L Enable Command EXample 2 ore tate iseuet etia bar ein tiae to 359 Figure 238 Annex L Disable Command Example ert tht ttn nne 359 Figure 239 Annex M Enable Command ExXarple seriinin 359 Figure 240 Annex M Disable Command Example sese 360 Figure 241 Annex Enable Command Example sess 360 Figure 242 Annex Disable Command Example ccsccccceeesecceereeeeenaneeeeeeee 361 Figure 243 DSL Port Show Command Example sse 361 Figure 244 Linedata Command Example ceeeeeeeseeeecessse seen eene nna 362 Figure 245 Lineiato Command EXeITIDIB sssri rtis aet eru hi bir oci nni inii 363 Figure 246 Lineperf Command Example sssssssseeenne 364 Figure 247 15 Minute Performance Comma
346. nt information feature sub option 2 This feature applies regardless of whether or not the DHCP relay is on 44 3 1 Option 82 Sub option 2 Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay opt82sub2 enable 290 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command turns on the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 2 feature 44 3 2 Option 82 Sub option 2 Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay opt82sub2 disable This command turns off the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 Sub option 2 feature 44 3 3 Option 82 Sub option 2 Set Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay opt82sub2 set lt relay info gt where lt relay info gt Upto 23 ASCII characters of additional information for the AAM1212 to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the name of the AAM1212 or the ISP This command adds the specified information for the relay agent 44 4 DHCP Snoop Commands Use these commands to configure or show DHCP snooping settings on the subscriber ports The system gets the client MAC IP address information in the reply from a DHCP server and stores it in the DHCP snooping table The system only forwards packets from the clients whose MAC IP address is in the DHCP snooping table Packets from unknown IP address es are not forwarded dropped This feature prevents clients from assigning their own static IP a
347. o include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet enet2 gt This command displays the port s IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag settings The following example shows the settings for DSL port 1 Figure 152 VLAN Port Show Command Example ras gt switch vlan portshow 3 port pvid priority frametype 45 4 2 VLAN PVID Command Syntax ras gt switch vlan pvid lt portlist gt lt pvid gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet enet2 gt lt pvid gt The VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 This command sets a default VLAN ID for all untagged packets that come in through the specified port 296 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example sets the default VID of port 1 to 200 Figure 153 VLAN PVID Command Example ras switch vlan pvid 1 200 45 4 3 VLAN Priority Command Syntax ras switch vlan priority portlist priority where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt you can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enetl enet2 gt lt priority gt This is the priority value 0 to 7 to use for incoming frames with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag This command sets the priority of incoming frames with an IEEE
348. o manage the AAM1212 The following example sets VLAN ID 2 to be the CPU management VLAN Figure 157 VLAN CPU Set Command Example ras switch vlan cpu set 2 45 4 7 VLAN CPU Set Command Syntax ras switch vlan cpu set vid where vid The VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 This command sets the management VLAN CPU You can only use ports that are members of this management VLAN in order to manage the AAMI212 The following example sets VLAN ID 2 to be the CPU management VLAN Figure 158 VLAN CPU Set Command Example ras switch vlan cpu set 2 45 4 8 Configuring Management VLAN Example Note After the following example configuration you must connect to the first Ethernet port through a VLAN aware device that is using the proper VLAN ID in order to perform management By default the AAMI212 s DSL ports are members of the management VLAN VID 1 The following procedure shows you how to configure a tagged VLAN that limits management access to just one Ethernet port Note Use the console port to configure the AAM1212 if you misconfigure the management VLAN and lock yourself out 1 Usethe switch vlan set command to configure a VLAN ID VID 3 in this example for managing the AAM1212 the management or CPU VLAN Figure 159 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example ras switch vlan set 3 enet1 FT 300 Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN C
349. o save PPVC settings for a port In order to change a port s PPVC settings just select the port from the Port drop down list box and then configure the settings you want These settings replace the port s old settings when you click Add Modify Clicking Add Modify saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select the number of an ADSL port for which to display PPVC settings or display all of them Index This field displays the number of the PPVC Port This field displays the number of the ADSL port on which the PPVC is configured VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port The AAM1212 uses this PVC channel internally This PVC is not needed on the subscriber s device Encap This field displays the PPVC s type of encapsulation llc or vc PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel Priority This is the priority value 0 to 7 added to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Members This field displays how man
350. oduct has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products 6 ZyXEL Limited Warranty AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information rea
351. ofiles with o After you add an alarm profile you can click a port number s symbol to map xDSL port mapping the xDSL port to that alarm profile The port s V symbol in the alarm profile where it was previously mapped changes to Modify Click Modify to edit a profile Delete Click Delete to remove a profile 128 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 14 7 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can limit the multicast channel number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the device to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 14 8 IGMP Filter Profile Screen You can use the IGMP filter profiles to control access to a service that uses a specific multicast group like a SIP server for example Configure an IGMP filter profile that allows access to that multicast group Then assign the IGMP filter profile to ADSL ports that are allowed to use the service The DEFVAL IGMP filter profile is assigned to all of the ADSL ports by default It allows a port to join all multicast IP addresses 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 If you want to allow an ADSL subscriber access to only specif
352. og this alarm This is for alarms that send alarms to a syslog server SNMP This field displays V if the system is to send this alarm to an SNMP server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to an SNMP server Syslog This field displays V if the system is to send this alarm to a syslog server It displays if the system does not send this alarm to a syslog server Severity This field displays the alarm severity level critical major minor or info Clearable This displays V if the alarm clear command removes the alarm from the amp d system It displays if the alarm clear command does not remove the alarm from the system 36 4 1 Edit Alarm Event Setup Screen Use this screen to specify the severity level of an alarm s and where the system is to send the alarm s To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Status Then click an alarm s index number Figure 123 Alarm Event Setup Edit Alarm Condition Code Condition Facility SNMP Sysiog Severity Clearable dsl 5000 line up Local 1 v IV Iv Into X DL The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Alarm Event Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm This field displays the alarm category to which the alarm belongs eqpt represents equipment alarms dsl represents Digital Subscriber Line DSL alarms enet represents Ethernet alarms Sys represents system alarms Condition Code This fi
353. ome continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Media This field displays the type of media that this Ethernet port is using for a connection displays when the port is disabled or not connected Duplex This field displays whether the port is using half or full duplex communication displays when the port is disabled or not connected Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port s connection has been up displays when the port is disabled or not connected The following fields are related to the xDSL ports xDSL This identifies the xDSL port Click a port number to display that port s statistics screen The DSL Port Statistics Screen appears See Section 6 1 2 on page 73 Status This field shows whether the port is connected Up or not Down Mode This field shows which ADSL operational mode the port is set to use displays when the port is not connected Up Down stream This field shows the number of kilobits per second that a port is set to transmit and receive Interleave Fast This field shows the port s ADSL latency mode fast or interleave Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port s connection has been up displays when the port is not connected The following fields and buttons apply to the whole screen Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in secon
354. ommands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 2 Use the switch vlanlg vlan cpu command to set VID 3 as the management VLAN Figure 160 Deleting Default VLAN Example ras switch vlan cpu set 3 45 4 9 VLAN Delete Command Syntax ras switch vlan delete vlanlist where lt vlanlist gt You can specify a single VID lt 1 gt all VIDs lt gt a list of VIDs lt 1 3 gt you can also include a range of VIDs lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table Figure 161 VLAN Delete Command Example ras gt switch vlan delete 2 45 5 VLAN Enable Syntax ras gt switch vlan enable lt vid gt This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 45 6 VLAN Disable Syntax ras gt switch vlan disable lt vid gt This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 301 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 45 6 1 VLAN Show Command Syntax ras switch vlan show vlanlist where lt vlanlist gt You can specify a single VID lt 1 gt all VIDs lt gt a list of VIDs lt 1 3 gt you can also include a range of VIDs lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command shows information about the specified port s VLAN settings The following example shows the settings for all VIDs
355. on The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Make sure that the routed PVC s subnet does not include the AAMI212 s IP address The IP address of the gateway to which you want to send the traffic that the system receives from this PVC Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation This command adds a PVC to handle 2684 routed mode traffic Note You must use the rpvc gateway set command to configure the gateway s settings before you use the rpvc set command The following example adds a PVC for 2684 routed mode traffic It is for DSL port 1 VPI 8 VCI 35 It sets the DEFVAL profile for downstream traffic shaping and for upstream traffic policing The CPE device s WAN IP address is 192 168 10 200 with a netmask of 32 and the gateway s IP address is 192 168 10 102 Figure 276 RPVC Set Command Example ras adsl rpvc set 1 8 35 DEFVAL DEFVAL 192 168 10 200 32 192 168 10 102 53 7 6 RPVC Show Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc show lt portlist gt 394 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt The port s for which you want to display the RPVCs You can s
356. on Example 300 Figure 160 Deleting Default VLAN Example eeeeeeeeeeeene nennen 301 Figure 161 VLAN Delete Command Example eneereneeee creen seni nhnn nnn 301 Figure 162 VLAN Show Command Example ecco inert tuere 302 Figure 163 MAC Filter Show Command Example eeeeeeseeeeeeeee 303 Figure 164 MAC Filter Enable Command Example eee 304 Figure 165 MAC Filter Disable Command Example eee 304 Figure 166 MAC Filter Mode Command Example sse 305 Figure 167 MAC Filter Set Command Example 305 28 List of Figures AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 168 MAC Filter Delete Command Example 1 contre neta 306 Figure 169 MAC Count Show Command Example esses 306 Figure 170 MAC Count Enable Command Example 1 2 erecta kd at 307 Figure 171 MAC Count Disable Command Example sss 307 Figure 172 MAC Count Set Command Example tette trn benennen 308 Figure 173 IGMP Snoop Show Command Example sssssssssss 309 Figure 174 IGMP Snoop Enable Command Example ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 310 Figure 175 IGMP Snoop Disable Command Example cc cecceceeeeeeteeeeeees 310 Figure 176 IGMP Filter Show Command Example ccccccceeescccnereseeeceeeeeees 311 Figure 177 IGMP Filter Se
357. on listed VLAN 44 1 5 Server Delete Command Syntax ras gt switch dhcprelay server delete lt vid gt lt primary server gt where lt vid gt The ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP server s lt primary The IP address of one DHCP server server gt This command deletes all information about DHCP servers for the specified VLAN Afterwards the specified VLAN can uses the default DHCP server s set up for VLAN ID 0 if any 288 Chapter 44 DHCP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 44 1 6 Server Active Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay server active vid active server where vid The ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP server s lt active server gt The primary DHCP server is active 2 The secondary DHCP server is active This command has no effect if the relaymode is both If the relaymode is auto this command specifies to which DHCP server the primary one or the secondary one the AAM1212 should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN 44 1 7 Relaymode Command Syntax ras gt switch dhcprelay relaymode lt mode gt where lt mode gt relay process mode it controls to which DHCP server s the AAM1212 relays DHCP requests auto the AAM1212 relays DHCP requests to the active server for each VLAN both the AAM1212 relays DHCP requests to the primary and secondary server for each VLAN regardless of which one is active This comm
358. on the line the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers using the Edit Profile screen the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64K bps Regardless of a profile s configured upstream and downstream rates the AAM1212 automatically limits the actual rates for each individual port to the maximum speeds supported by the port s ADSL operational mode For example if you configure a profile with a maximum downstream rate of 25000 Kbps and apply it to a port set to use Gdmt the AAM1212 automatically uses a maximum downstream rate of 8160 Kbps This means that if you configure a profile with very high rates you can still use it with any port See Table 18 on page 101 for a list of the maximum rates supported by the different ADSL standards 102 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 13 6 Default Settings The default profile always exists and all of the ADSL ports use the default profile settings when the AAMI212 is shipped The default profile s name is set to DEFVAL MAX See Appendix A on page 423 for the settings of the default profile and ADSL port default sett
359. onfiguration file upgrade is done during operation run time Note Do not turn off the power to the AAM1212 during the file transfer process as it may permanently damage your AAM1212 Note The AAM1212 automatically restarts when the upgrade process is complete 50 2 Filename Conventions The configuration file called config 0 contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password IP address VLANs and so on The configuration file arrives with a rom filename extension The OS Operating System firmware sometimes referred to as the ras file has a bin filename extension With many FTP and clients the filenames are similar to those shown next Figure 201 FTP Put Configuration File Example ftp put firmware bin ras This is a sample from a FTP session to transfer the computer file irmware bin to the AAMI212 Figure 202 FTP Get Configuration File Example ftp get config 0 config txt Chapter 50 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 335 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This is a sample from a FTP session to transfer the AAM1212 s current configuration file including the configuration files of all the AAM1212 to the computer file con ig txt If your FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the AAM1212 only recognizes config 0 and ras Be sure you keep unaltered
360. or V 4 dsl 5003 ad perf lof thresh local1 V V minor V 5 dsl 5004 ad perf los thres local1 V V minor V h 6 dsl 5005 ad perf lop thres local1 V V minor V h 7 dsl 5006 ad perf es thresh local1 V V minor 8 dsl 5007 ad perf ses thres local1 V V minor V h 9 dsl 5008 ad perf uas thres local1 V V minor V h 232 Chapter 36 Alarm AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 81 Alarm Descriptions continued NO ALARM CONDITION FACILITY SNMP SYSLOG SEVERITY ache 10 dsl 5009 ad_atuc_loftrap local1 V V minor 11 dsl 5010 ad atuc lostrap local1 V V minor 12 dsl 5011 ad atur loftrap local1 V V minor 13 dsl 5012 ad atur lostrap local1 V V minor 14 dsl 5013 ad atur lprtrap local1 V V minor 15 eqpt 10000 vol err local1 V V critical 16 eqpt 10001 temp err local1 V V critical 17 eqpt 10002 hw rtc fail local1 V V critical 18 eqpt 10003 hw mon fail local1 V V critical 19 eqpt 10004 cold start local1 V V info 20 eqpt 10005 warm start local1 V V info 21 Sys 15000 reboot local1 V V info 22 Sys 15001 aco local1 V V info 23 Sys 15002 alm clear local1 V V info 24 Sys 15003 login fail local1 V V minor V 25 Sys 15004 anti spoofing local1 V V minor V 26 enet 20000 up local1 V V info 27 enet 20001 down local1 V V major V 36 4 Alarm Event Setup Screen This screen lists the alarms that the system can generate along with the se
361. or secondary server Maximum 32 entries can be configured Default empty list dhcprelay server lt vid gt lt primary Delete DHCP server for 1 VLAN M H delete server gt dhcprelay server vid lt active Activate primary or secondary M H active server gt DHCP server for 1 VLAN dhcprelay relaymode lt mode gt DHCP relay mode auto both M H dhcprelay option82 Turns on the DHCP relay agent M H enable information Option 82 feature dhcprelay option82 Turns off the DHCP relay agent M H disable information Option 82 feature dhcprelay option82 relay info Adds the specified information for M H set the relay agent dhcprelay opt82sub2 Turns on option 82 sub option 2 M H enable dhcprelay opt82sub2 Turns off option 82 sub option 2 M H disable dhcprelay opt82sub2 relay info Adds the specified information for M H set sub option 2 acl profile delet name delete an acl profile M H Chapter 41 Commands 263 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P acl profile set lt name gt lt rule gt Create modify a acl profile M H lt action gt rule lt I2 gt lt I3_protocol gt lt mfc gt 2 Layer 2 match fields listed in priority sequence match etype lt etype gt vian lt vid gt etype lt etype gt smac lt mac gt etype lt etype gt dmac lt mac gt vlan vid smac mac vlan vid dmac mac smac mac dmac mac vlan vid p
362. ortlist gt lt bandwidth gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt bandwidth gt 1 100000 in units of kbps This command sets the bandwidth allowed for multicast traffic on the specified port s It does not automatically enable it however 47 5 4 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port show lt portlist gt Chapter 47 IGMP Commands 315 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the multicast bandwidth setting on the specified port s and whether or not this setting is active The following example displays the bandwidth budget for port 1 Figure 181 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop bandwidth port show 1 port enable bandwidth 47 6 IGMP Count Limit Commands 47 6 1 Use these commands to limit the number of IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription IGMP count is useful for ensuring the service quality of high bandwidth services
363. orwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to allow a channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment One port can have only one super channel Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 109 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 13 8 2 LLC LLC is a type of encapsulation where one VC Virtual Circuit carries multiple protocols with each packet header containing protocol identifying information Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 13 8 3 VC Mux VC Mux is a type of encapsulation where by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP VC2 carries IPX and so on VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 13 8 4 Virtual Channel Profile Virtual channel profiles allow you to configure the virtual channels efficiently You can configure all ofthe virtual channels with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the virtual channels one by one You can also change an individual
364. otal number of CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check alignment errors on this port 76 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 8 Port Statistics RMON continued LABEL DESCRIPTION EtherStatsUndersizePkts This field displays the total number of packets that were too small received transmitted on this port EtherStatsOversizePkts This field displays the total number of packets that were too big received transmitted on this port EtherStatsFragments This is the number of frames received transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths EtherStatsJabbers This is the number of frames received transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors EtherStatsCollisions This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset EtherStats64Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 64 octets or less in length this includes FCS octets but excludes framing bits EtherStats65to127Octets This is the number of frames received transmitted including bad frames that were 65 to 127 octets in length this includes FC
365. otherboard IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly Safety Warnings 5 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product 1s free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the pr
366. ound information on VLANs 45 2 IEEE 802 1Q Tagging Types There are two kinds of tagging Explicit Tagging A VLAN identifier is added to the frame header that identifies the source VLAN Implicit Tagging The MAC Media Access Control number the port or other information is used to identify the source of a VLAN frame The IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN uses both explicit and implicit tagging It is important for the AAMI212 to determine what devices are VLAN aware and VLAN unaware so that it can decide whether to forward a tagged frame to a VLAN aware device or first strip the tag from a frame and then forward it to a VLAN unaware device 45 3 Filtering Databases A filtering database stores and organizes VLAN registration information useful for switching frames to and from the AAMI212 A filtering database consists of static entries Static VLAN or SVLAN table 45 3 1 Static Entries SVLAN Table Static entry registration information is added modified and removed by administrators only Chapter 45 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 295 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 45 4 IEEE VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands These switch commands allow you to configure and monitor the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 45 4 1 VLAN Port Show Command Syntax ras switch vlan portshow portlist where portlist You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can als
367. own list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Note Upstream traffic policing should be used in conjunction with the ATM shaping feature on the subscriber s device If the subscriber s device does not apply the appropriate ATM shaping all upstream traffic will be discarded due to upstream traffic policing VID Type a VLAN ID to assign to frames received on this channel Note Make sure the VID is not already used for PPPoA to PPPoE conversions Priority Use the drop down list box to select the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Apply Click this to add or save channel settings on the selected port This saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Chapter 30 TLS PVC 209 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 67 TLS PVC continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again Show Port Select which DSL port s for which to display TLS
368. pecified ADSL ports a range of ADSL ports or all ADSL ports MAC example 01005E010203 Chapter 41 Commands 267 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P smcast delete lt mac gt Removes a static multicast filter H H entry by deleting the associated MAC address isolation show Displays the subscriber isolation M L feature s current setting isolation enable Turns the subscriber isolation H H feature on isolation disable Turns the subscriber isolation H H feature off isolation Set switch mode to daisychain H H daisychain mode isolation Set switch mode to standalone H H standalone mode ip show inband outband Displays the Management IP M L address settings arp show Displays the device s IP Address M L Resolution Protocol ARP table arp flush Clears the device s IP Address H H Resolution Protocol ARP table set lt ip gt netmask Sets the Management IP address H H and subnet mask gateway lt gateway ip gt Sets the IP address of the device s H H default gateway route show Displays the routing table M L route set dst ip gt netmask Adds a routing table entry H H lt gateway ip metric lt name gt route set default lt gateway Sets the device s default route H H ip gt lt metric gt route delete lt dst ip gt netmask Removes a
369. pecify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command lists the PVCs for handling 2684 routed mode traffic RP VCs The following example displays the RPVCs for DSL port 1 Figure 277 RPVC Show Command Example ras gt adsl rpvc show 1 port vpi vci ip netmask gateway ip DS US vcprofile 1 8 35 192 168 10 200 32 192 168 10 102 DEFVAL DEFVAL 53 7 7 RPVC Delete Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt vci where lt portlist gt The port s of the RPVC You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC vci The VCI of the RPVC This command removes a PVC for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example removes a PVC for 2684 routed mode traffic It is for DSL port 1 VPI 8 VCI 35 Figure 278 RPVC Delete Command Example ras adsl rpvc delete 1 8 35 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 395 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 7 8 RPVC Route Set Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc route set port number vpi vci lt ip gt lt netmask gt where port number The port of the RPVC Specify a single DSL port lt I gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC vci The VCI of the RPVC lt
370. plays the configured alarm profiles Figure 61 Alarm Profile uc rc Port Profile VC Profile IGMP Filter Profile Name m Cancel Threshold Threshold ATU C ATU R 16 Min LOF 15 Min LOS 15 Min LOL 15 Min LPR 15 Min ES seconds 15 Min SES seconds Init Failure Trap Active 7 Fast Rate Up bps bo p Fast Rate Down bps bo p Interleave Rate Up bps bo p Interleave Rate Down bps o bh i PREE 15 Min UAS seconds TT b b b b b b b 15 Min Failed Fast Retrain Alarm profiles with xDSL port mapping Please click the to mapping a xDSL port to a new alarm profile Index Name DEFVAL The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Alarm Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Profile Click Port Profile to open the Port Profile screen see Section 14 1 on page 119 Use the Port Profile screen to configure profiles of ADSL port settings such as the transfer rate interleave delay and signal to noise ratio settings VC Profile Click VC Profile to open the VC Profile screen where you can configure virtual channel profiles see Section 14 5 on page 125 IGMP Filter Profile Click IGMP Filter Profile to open the IGMP Filter Profile screen where you can configure IGMP multicast filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 129 Name This field is read only if you click Modify to edit a port profile Type a name to identify the alarm profile you cannot change the name
371. ple ras statistics adsl linedata 1 port 1 up stream carrier load number of bits per symbol tone tone 0 19 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 03 04 05 06 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 08 tone 20 39 08 08 07 08 08 07 07 06 06 05 04 03 down stream carrier load number of bits per symbol tone tone 0 19 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 tone 20 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 tone 40 59 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 tone 60 79 02 02 02 02 00 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 80 99 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 100 119 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 120 139 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 140 159 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 160 179 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 180 199 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 200 219 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 220 239 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 tone 240 259 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 362 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 2 3 Lineinfo Command Syntax ras statistics adsl lineinfo portlist
372. ply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 SysLog LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Unix Syslog Select this check box to activate syslog system logging and then configure the syslog parameters described in the following fields Syslog Server IP Enter the IP address of the syslog server The log facility is specified in Alarm gt Alarm Event Setup See Section 36 4 on page 233 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 33 Syslog 219 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 220 Chapter 33 Syslog AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 34 Access Control This chapter describes how to configure access control 34 1 Access Control Screen Use this screen to configure SNMP and enable disable remote service access To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Figure 115 Access Control D Access Control d SNMP Click here Service Access Control Click here Secured Client Click here 34 2 Access Control Overview A console port or Telnet session can coexist with one FTP session a web configurator session and or limitless SNMP acc
373. ply Gateway setting to save your changes to the device s IP address setting and or subnet mask to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Chapter 11 IP Setup 97 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 98 Chapter 11 IP Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 12 ENET Port Setup The ENET Port Setup screen allows you to configure settings for the Ethernet ports To open this screen click Basic Setting ENET Port Setup Figure 47 ENET Port Setup Name Speed Mode Duplex ENET1 v Jeneti auto Full Duplex ENET2 v enet2 auto Full Duplex Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 ENET Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Active Select the check box to turn on the port Clear it to disable the port Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can use up to 31 ASCII characters spaces are allowed Speed Mode Select the type of Ethernet connection for this port When you don t use auto negotiation you must make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect Select Auto auto negotiation to have t
374. port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assign different priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them Use the following commands to define channels Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 383 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 3 1 PVC Show Command 53 3 2 PVC Set Command Syntax ras adsl pvc show portlist lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC This command allows you to display the PVC parameters of the specified DSL port s or all of the DSL ports if you do not specify any Syntax ras gt adsl pvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt super vid 1 4094 lt priority gt gt DS vcprofile US vcprofile gt where lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt super vid You can specify a single DSL port 17 all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt The VPI setting can be 0 to 255 The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 i
375. portNo lt max nominal psd gt where max nominal 400 40 unit of measure is 0 1dBm Hz psd This command displays or sets the upstream maximum nominal transmit PSD Power Spectral Density The following example sets the upstream maximum nominal transmit PSD for port 7 to 10 dBm Hz Figure 225 DSL Port Upstream PSD Command Example ras adsl usnompsd 7 100 352 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 1 12 52 1 13 DSL Port Downstream PSD Command Syntax ras adsl dsnompsd portNo lt max nominal psd gt where max nominal 400 40 unit of measure is 0 1dBm Hz psd This command displays or sets the downstream maximum nominal transmit PSD Power Spectral Density The following example sets the downstream maximum nominal transmit PSD for port 7 to 10 dBm Hz Figure 226 DSL Port Downstream PSD Command Example ras adsl dsnompsd 7 100 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Syntax ras adsl uscarrier portNo m0 lt m1 gt where m0 m1 The upstream subcarriers to be masked disabled Each lt mx gt can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits 00000000 ffffffff Each lt mx gt represents 32 carrier tones each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones m0 tones 0 31 m1 tones 32 63 The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turn
376. ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command lists the domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The following example displays the domains for 2684 routed mode traffic for devices connected to DSL ports and 2 Figure 280 RPVC Route Show Command Example ras adsl rpvc route show 1 2 port vpi vci ip netmask 1 8 35 10 10 10 0 24 2 8 35 10 10 11 0 24 53 7 10 RPVC Route Delete Command Syntax ras adsl rpvc route delete port number vpi vci lt ip gt lt netmask gt where port number The port of the RPVC Specify a single DSL port 17 lt vpi gt The VPI of the RPVC vci The VCI of the RPVC lt ip gt The subscriber s CPE LAN IP address in dotted decimal notation lt netmask gt The bit number of the subnet mask of the subscriber s IP address To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 This command removes a domain for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain includes the subscriber s LAN IP addresses Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 397 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 53 7 11 53 7 12 The following example removes a domain for a CPE device is connected to DSL port 1 on the AAM1212 and the 2684 routed mode traffic is to use the PVC identified by VPI 8 an
377. pter 3 Front Panel AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 12 Installation Scenario A MDF DSL Modem 3 1 9 1 1 Procedure To Connect To An MDF 1 Connect the Telco 50 connector end of the cable to the Telco 50 connector 2 Connect the USER wiring on the other end of the Telco 50 cable to the upper ports of the MDF using a punch down tool 3 Connect the telephone wiring from each end user s DSL modem to the lower ports of the MDF 3 1 9 2 Installation Scenario B Phone service is available There is one MDF from which end users CO connections are made see next figure Chapter 3 Front Panel 49 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 13 One MDF for End user and CO Connections This installation scenario requires three MDFs Please refer to the following figure for the connection schema MDF 1 is the original MDF used for telephone connections only MDF 2 is used for telephone connections only e MDF 3 is for ADSL service connections Note Change the wiring in the following figure from MDF 1 to MDF 3 for telephone subscribers who want ADSL service 50 Chapter 3 Front Panel AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 14 Installation Scenario B r a congo aN onee LZ Y pammmmm ammmmmmm L reeprone i i i i i i BERR eee cables MDF 2 POTS MDF 3 splitter DSL modem User with telephone a
378. r example economy standard and premium Assign the appropriate profile to an ADSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port s configuration maximum and minimum transfer rates You still get to individually enable or disable each port as well as configure its channels and operational mode 13 4 Interleave Delay Interleave delay is the wait in milliseconds that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved assembled and then transmitted Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line The bigger the delay the bigger the data block size allowing better error correction to be performed Reed Solomon codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications The Reed Solomon encoder takes a block of digital data and adds extra redundant bits The Reed Solomon decoder processes each block and attempts to correct errors and recover the original data 13 4 1 Fast Mode Fast mode means no interleaving takes place and transmission is faster a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary 13 5 Configured Versus Actual Rate You configure the maximum rate of an individual ADSL port by modifying its profile see Chapter 14 on page 119 or assigning the port to a different profile see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 However due to noise and other factors
379. re two additional MDFs you need Note User A still has telephone service only User B now has telephone and DSL service see the following figure 52 Chapter 3 Front Panel AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 16 Installation Scenario C CO N E HE HN Nm SS BEE eee E EH EH Nm SS Hm Em EENENEN Telephone MDF4 MDF S cables MDF 2 POTS splitter Q User with User with telephone telephone service only and DSL service 3 1 9 3 1 Procedure To Connect To MDFs 1 Connect the Telco 50 connector end of the cable to the Telco 50 connector 2 Connect the USER wiring on the other end of the Telco 50 cable to the upper ports of MDF 3 using a punch down tool 3 Connect the lower ports of MDF 3 to the upper ports of MDF 2 for those users that want DSL service Users who want telephone service only retain the original connection from the top port of MDF 2 to the bottom port of MDF 1 4 Connect the telephone wiring from the end user s DSL equipment to the lower ports of MDF 2 5 Connect the CO wiring of the Telco 50 cable to the lower ports of MDF 4 using a punch down tool 6 Connect the top ports of MDF 4 to the bottom ports of MDF 1 using telephone wires 7 Connect the top ports of MDF 1 to the telephone company Chapter 3 Front Panel 53 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 54 Chapter 3 Front Panel AAM1212 51 53 Series U
380. receive multicast traffic There should only be one upstream interface also known as the query port for one query VLAN on the AAMI212 A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host such as a computer The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1 2 and 3 are the receivers In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface Figure 70 IGMP Proxy Network Example The AAMI212 will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface The AAM1212 only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface The AAM1212 sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN The AAMI212 only sends an IGMP leave messages via the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group In daisychain mode Ethernet interface 1 1s set as the upstream interface and Ethernet interface 2 and the DSL ports are set as downstream interfaces 17 3 IGMP Status Screen Use this screen to view current IGMP information To open this screen click Advanced Application IGMP 150 Chapter 17 IGMP AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 71 IGMP Status Bandwidth Setup IGMP Setup Filter Setup Count Setup IGMP Port Info IGMP Port Group Query Report Leave Number of IGMP Groups Page 0 of 0 Index VID Previous Reload Next IP Address 172 3 41 5 6 F
381. rence statement 4 filtering databases 295 firmware upgrade 239 335 file names 335 using FTP 335 when unable to use FTP 421 firmware version 82 front panel 43 FTP 242 335 full duplex 99 G GARP 91 GARP timer 94 GARP timer setup 91 General Setup 85 Generic Attribute Registration Protocol See GARP H hardware installation 41 Home screen 56 69 host name 85 IEEE 802 1D See STP IEEE 802 1Q See VLAN IEEE 802 1w See RSTP IEEE 802 1x 177 179 IEEE 802 1x See also RADIUS IGMP 168 leave packets 151 modes 155 query packets 151 report packets 151 IGMP Filter Profile Screen 129 IGMP snooping 149 initial configuration 63 interleave delay 102 120 interleave mode 120 Internet Explorer 55 63 Internet Group Multicast Protocol See IGMP Internet Protocol See IP IP 168 ip commands 329 IP Setup 97 L LAN LED 432 Index AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide troubleshooting 414 latency mode 120 LDM test 244 Line Data 137 line operating values 133 Line Performance 135 line type 136 LLC 110 location 85 log format 271 282 log messages 272 logging out 60 Login screen 56 loopback test 244 MAC address 82 MAC address learning 94 MAC filter 169 Management Information Base MIB 222 Maximum Burst Size MBS 123 Media Access Control See MAC address metric 230 model 86 multicast MAC address 160 Multicast VLAN See MVLAN MVLAN 161 N Near End Block Errors NEBE 13
382. rformance Click Line Performance to display an ADSL port s line performance counters see Section 15 2 on page 135 Port Use this drop down list box to select a port for which you wish to view information Refresh Click Refresh to display updated information 138 Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 31 xDSL Line Data continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Name This section displays the name of the port Bit Allocation DS carrier load displays the number of bits transmitted per DMT tone for the downstream channel from the AAM1212 to the subscriber s DSL modem or router US carrier load displays the number of bits received per DMT tone for the upstream channel from the subscriber s DSL modem or router to the AAM1212 Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data 139 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 140 Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 16 VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANs 16 1 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit app
383. rgin is 6 dB Figure 218 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 1 ras adsl profile set gold fast 1200 24000 5 0 30 128 5 0 30 256 0 6606 This next example creates a similar premium profile named goldi except it sets an interleave delay of 16 ms for both upstream and downstream traffic Figure 219 DSL Port Profile Set Command Example 2 ras adsl profile set goldi interleave 16 16 1200 24000 5 0 30 128 5 0 30 256 0606 After you create a DSL profile you can assign it to any of the DSL ports on the AAM1212 52 1 6 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Syntax ras adsl profile delete profile where profile A profile name This command allows you to delete an individual DSL profile by its name You cannot delete a profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports in the AAM1212 Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile The following example deletes the gold DSL profile Figure 220 DSL Port Profile Delete Command Example ras adsl profile delete gold 52 1 7 DSL Port Profile Map Command Syntax AAM1212 51 ras adsl profile map lt portlist gt profile gt glite gdmt ti1413 autolads12 adsl2 4 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 349 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Syntax AAM1212 53 ras adsl profile map portlist profile gt lt gdmt etsi auto adsl2 ads12 gt
384. riority priority etype lt etype gt vlan vid smac mac dmac mac priority priority protocol protocol priority 077 lt etype gt 0 65535 lt protocol gt tcp udp ospfligmplip gre icmp lt pty pe gt lt ptype gt 0 65535 Note multiple field rules position independent MFC rules srcip lt ip gt lt mask gt dstip lt ip gt lt mask gt tos lt tos gt srcport lt port gt dstport lt port gt lt mask gt 0 32 lt tos gt 0 255 lt port gt 0 65535 lt action gt rate lt rate gt rvian lt rvian gt rpri rpri deny lt rate gt 1 65535 in unit of kbps lt rvian gt replaced vlan 1 4094 lt rpri gt replaced priority 0 7 acl profile show lt name gt Display an acl profile L L acl profile showmap name Display acl profile reference L L acl delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Remove an acl profile from PVC M H lt vci gt lt profile gt lt profile gt string32 up to 8 profiles if only one PVC has profiles 264 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P acl set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt Apply an acl profile to a PVC M H lt vci gt lt profile gt Max 8 profiles per port acl show portlist lt vpi gt Show acl profile setting for a PVC
385. rleaveRateDown bps 0 0 InitFailureTrap l enable 2 disable 2 hreshl5MinFailedFastRetrain 0 Lc hreshli5MinSes sec 0 0 hreshi5MinUas sec 0 0 52 3 2 Alarm Profile Set Command Syntax ras adsl alarmprofile set profile lt atuc lofs gt atur lofs gt atuc loss atur loss atuc lols gt atuc lprs atur lprs gt atuc ess atur ess atuc fast rateup atur fast rateup gt lt atuc interleave rateup atur interleave rateup atuc fast ratedown atur fast ratedown atuc interleave ratedown atur interleave ratedown init fail enable atuc fail fast atuc ses atur ses atuc uas atur uas gt where profile atuc atur lt atuc lofs gt lt atur lofs gt s atuc loss atur Loss gt lt atuc lols gt lt atuc lprs lt atur lprs gt A name for the alarm profile up to 31 ASCII characters Upstream These parameters are for the connection or traffic coming from the subscriber s device to the AAM1212 Downstream These parameters are for the connection or traffic going from the AAM1212 to the subscriber s device The number of Loss Of Frame seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Loss Of Signal seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Loss Of Link seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Loss of Power seconds that are permitted to occ
386. router during negotiation provisioning message interchanges This information can help in identifying the subscriber s ADSL modem or router The Info Atuc fields show data acquired from the ATUC ADSL Termination Unit Central in this case AAM1212 during negotiation provisioning message interchanges The vendor ID vendor version number and product serial number are obtained from vendor ID fields see ITU T G 994 1 or R MSGS1 see T1 413 a At the time of writing the AAM1212 always uses Trellis coding 134 Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 15 2 xDSL Performance Screen These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started The definitions of near end far end are always relative to the ATU C ADSL Termination Unit Central Office ATU C refers to downstream traffic from the AAMI212 ATU R ADSL Termination Unit Remote refers to upstream traffic from the subscriber To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Line Performance Figure 64 xDSL Performance OFS SSO Line Rate Line Data Port 2 7 Port Name Performance Refresh Line Type Fast and Interleave Init 0 ATUC ATUR ES 0 0 ATUC ATUR SES 0 0 ATUC ATUR UAS 0 0 Fast FEBE 0 Far End CRC Fast NEBE 0 Near End CRC Fast FEFEC 0 Far End Corrected FEC Fast NEFEC 0 Near End Corrected FEC Interleaved FEBE 0 Far End CRC Interleaved NEBE 0 N
387. rt Security screen see Chapter 24 on page 181 Frame Type Select this check box to copy this port s allowed frame type This is configured in the Static VLAN Setting screen see Chapter 22 on page 171 Virtual Channels Select this check box to copy this port s virtual channel settings These are configured in the VC Setup screen see Section 13 9 on page 110 Alarm Profile Select this check box to copy this port s alarm profile This is configured in the Alarm Profile Setup screen see Section 14 6 on page 127 PVID amp Priority Select this check box to copy this port s PVID and priority settings These are configured in the VLAN Port Setting screen see Chapter 22 on page 171 Packet Filter Select this check box to copy this port s packet filter settings These are configured in the Packet Filtering screen see Chapter 20 on page 167 Paste See Copy Port 104 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 19 xDSL Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field shows each ADSL port number Active This field shows the active status of this port The port may be enabled or disabled This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Customer Info This field shows the customer information provided for this port This is configured in the xDSL Port Setting screen see Section 13 7 1 on page 105 Customer Tel
388. rt number Enable Select this check box to turn on IEEE 802 1x authentication on this port Control Select AUTO to authenticate all subscribers before they can access the network through this port Select FORCE AUTHORIZED to allow all connected users to access the network through this port without authentication Select FORCE UNAUTHORIZED to deny all subscribers access to the network through this port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to Period s stay connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 180 Chapter 23 Port Authentication AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 24 Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 24 1 Port Security Overview Port security allows you to restrict the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port 24 2 Port Security Screen To open this screen click Advanced Application Port Security Figure 90 Port Security Port Security g Port Enable
389. rtlist Displays MAC filter settings M L mac filter enable portlist Turns on the MAC filter H H mac filter disable portlist Turns off the MAC filter H H mac filter mode lt port gt Sets the MAC filter to accept or H H accept deny gt deny mac filter set lt port gt lt mac gt lt mac gt Adds a MAC filter MAC entry on H H mac an ADSL port s mac filter delete port mac lt mac gt Removes a MAC filter MAC entry H H mac on an ADSL port s pktfilter show portlist Display packet filter settings M L pktfilter set set lt portlist gt Set packet filter for port H H lt filter gt pktfilter pppoeonly pppoeonly Set packet filter to pppoe only for H H portlist port dotix show portlist Display dot1x settings M L dotlx enable Turn on dot1x H H 266 Chapter 41 Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P dotlx disable Turn off dot1x H H dotix auth lt profile radius gt Set authentication method to H H profile or radius dotlx port enable lt portlist gt Turn on dot1x on port H H dotlx port disable lt portlist gt Turn off dot1x on port H H dotlx port control lt portlist gt Set port authentication status H H auto auth unauth dotlx port reauth lt portlist gt on off Turn on or turn off port to do H H
390. rtlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt clear where lt portlist gt You can specify a single port lt 1 gt all ports lt gt or a list of ports lt 1 3 enetl gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 enet enet2 gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt The VPI and VCI of an individual PVC clear Use clear to have the AAM1212 set the specified port s or PVC s counters back to zero This command displays and or erases port statistics 276 Chapter 42 Command Examples AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays port statistics for DSL port 1 Figure 139 Statistics Port Command Example ras statistics port 1 adsl port 1 tx packets 20 rx packets 0 tx uni packets HE rx uni packets 0 tx nonuni packets 19 rx nonuni packets 0 tx discard packets 0 rx discard packets 0 errors 0 tx rate bytes s 0 rx rate bytes s 128 tx bytes 5904 rx bytes 0 where tx uni packets rx uni packets tx nonuni packets rx nonuni packets This field shows the number of unicast packets transmitted on this port This field shows the number of unicast packets received on this port This field shows the number of non unicast broadcast and multicast packets transmitted on this port This field shows the number of non unicast broadcast and multicast packets received on this port See Chapter 6 on page 69 for details on the other port statistics fields C
391. ry depending on what the subscriber s device supports the line conditions and the connection distance Table 18 ADSL Standards Maximum Transfer Rates STANDARD MAXIMUM DOWNSTREAM X MAXIMUM UPSTREAM G dmt AAM1212 51 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps G dmt Annex B AAM1212 53 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps ETSI AAM1212 53 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps ANSI T1 413 issue 2 AAM1212 51 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps ADSL2 12000 Kbps 1200 Kbps ADSL2 Annex M AAM1212 51 12000 Kbps 2400 Kbps ADSL2 25000 Kbps 1200 Kbps ADSL2 Annex M AAM1212 51 25000 Kbps 2400 Kbps 13 2 Downstream and Upstream Downstream refers to traffic going out from the AAMI212 to the subscriber s ADSL modem or router Upstream refers to traffic coming into the AAMI212 from the subscriber s ADSL modem or router 13 3 Profiles A profile is a table that contains a list of pre configured ADSL settings Each ADSL port has one and only one profile assigned to it at any given time You can configure multiple profiles including profiles for troubleshooting Profiles allow you to configure ADSL ports efficiently You can configure all of the ADSL ports with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the ADSL ports one by one You can also change an individual ADSL port by assigning it a different profile Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 101 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide For example you could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts fo
392. s Check the connection from the MDF s to the telephone company or the PBX o Check the telephone wire mapping on the MDF s Make sure the in house wiring works and is connected properly Repeat the steps above using a different DSL port 55 7 Testing Wiring Use the following tests if there is no voice Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 415 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Systematically test wiring using a functioning telephone to determine if there is a wiring problem If the connection is good the telephone will return a dial tone Letters in the figure shown next indicate the systematic tests to be done Suppose you re using installation scenario B as shown in the chapter on MDF connections The logic for other scenarios should be similar Use steps A D if there is no voice but you can transmit data Use all of the steps if there is no voice and you cannot transmit data Table 105 Wiring Tests TEST DESCRIPTION A Test A determines if there is a wiring problem between the TELCO telephone company and MDF 1 B Test B determines if there is a wiring problem between MDF 1 and MDF 2 C Test C determines if there is a wiring problem between MDF 2 and your device D Test D determines if there is a problem with your device s internal splitter E Test E determines if there is a wiring problem between your device and MDF 3 F Test F determine
393. s 1 12 26 37 to the telephone company for subscribers respectively 3 1 2 LEDs The following table describes the LED indicators on the AAM1212 Table 2 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally Chapter 3 Front Panel 43 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 2 LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning LAN 10 100 Green On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is down Yellow On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is down 1 12 Green On The DSL link is up Blinking The AAM1212 is initializing the DSL line Off The DSL link is down 3 1 3 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port ofthe AAMI212 Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 1 3 1 Default Ethernet Settings
394. s Guide Table 55 DHCP Relay continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Secondary Server IP This field displays the IP address of a second DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests This field is 0 0 0 0 if the primary server is the only DHCP relay Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the Server List Select None Click this to un select all entries in the Server List 186 Chapter 25 DHCP Relay AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 26 DHCP Snoop This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP snooping settings on the subscriber ports 26 1 DHCP Snoop Overview DHCP snooping prevents clients from assigning their own IP addresses The AAMI212 can store every DSL port MAC address IP address tuple offered by the DHCP server Then it only forwards packets from clients whose MAC address and IP address are recorded Packets from unknown IP addresses are dropped 26 2 DHCP Snoop Screen Use this screen to activate or deactivate DHCP snooping on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DHCP Snoop Figure 95 DHCP Snoop DHCP Snoop Status DHCP Counter Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 DHCP Snoop LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Snoop Status Click DHCP Snoop Status to open the screen where you ca
395. s if there is a building wiring problem between the subscriber s wall jack and MDF 3 Figure 296 Testing In house Wiring is A 3 Tm wo im gt O co USER e RPaEE EE HERE Telephone id NE NN NN i i UN BEREEE cables IDES j L o piter BEEREEEE DSL Fr oO m EJ EJ modem User with User with telephone telephone and DSL service only service User with telephone service only 416 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 106 Testing In house Wiring STEP TEST A Connect a standard telephone to MDF 1 If there is no dial tone then a problem with the wire or wire connections between MDF 1 and the TELCO exists Contact your telephone company for troubleshooting Connect a telephone to the upper port of MDF 2 If there is no dial tone then the problem is between MDF 1 and MDF 2 Check the telephone wire and connections between MDFs 1 and 2 Disconnect the telephone wire from CO Connect a telephone to the telephone wire If there is no dial tone then the problem is between your device and MDF 2 Check the telephone wire s pin assignments see Appendix C on page 449 for the proper pin assignments Replace the telephone wire if the pin assignments are OK and there is still no dial tone Reconnect the telephone wire to CO Disconnect the telephone wire from USER Connect a telephone to USER see Appendix C on page 449 for the proper pin assignments If
396. s it off so the system does not send data on it The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it This command displays or sets masks for upstream carrier tones from 0 to 63 Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the specified DSL port Use this command to have the system not use a DSL line s tones that are known to have a high noise level The most significant bit defines the lowest tone number in a mask Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 353 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The most significant bit defines the first tone sequentially For example in m0 0x00000001 means tone 31 For example you could use Oxffff0000 for lt m0 gt to disable upstream carrier tones 0 15 and leave tones 16 31 enabled The following example disables upstream carrier tones 0 15 for DSL port 5 Figure 227 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Example ras adsl uscarrier 5 ffff0000 00000000 The following example displays the results Figure 228 DSL Port Upstream Carrier Command Display Example ras adsl uscarrier 5 us carrier port mo m1 Bru aeea jen 5 FFFF0000 00000000 Tone m0 0 31 m1 32 63 52 1 14 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Syntax ras adsl dscarrier0 port number ml m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 lt m7 gt where ml m7 The down
397. s or auto to have the AAM1212 automatically determine the mode to use See Table 18 on page 101 for information on the individual ADSL modes 106 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 20 xDSL Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Alarm Profile Select the port s alarm profile The alarm profile defines alarm thresholds for the ADSL port The AAM1212 sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded see Section 14 6 on page 127 IGMP Filter Profile The IGMP filter profile defines which multicast groups a port can join Select a profile of IGMP filter settings to assign to this port Use the IGMP Filter Profile screen to configure IGMP filter profiles see Section 14 8 on page 129 ADSL2 2 feature These are features available with ADSL2 2 The subscriber s ADSL device must also support the individual features in order to use them At the time of writing these features have not been fully tested and their performance and interoperability cannot be guaranteed Annex L This field is not available for the AAM1212 53 Enable Annex L to use reach extended ADSL2 This allows increased connection distances Annex M This field is not available for the AAM1212 53 Enable Annex M to use double upstream mode This has the upstream connection use tones 6 to 63 Annex This field is not available for th
398. s received on this port packets Tx discard packets This field shows the number of outgoing packets that were dropped on this port The Tx discard packets counter always displays 0 because the AAM1212 does not discard packets that it sends 74 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 7 Port Statistics DSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx discard packets This field shows the number of received packets that were dropped on this port Some of the possible reasons for the discarding of received rx packets are The packet filter is enabled and the packets matched a packet filter The MAC filter is enabled and the AAM1212 dropped the packets according to the MAC filter s configuration The packets contained frames with an invalid VLAN ID Errors This field shows the number of AAL5 frames received with CRC errors Tx rate This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx rate This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Tx bytes This field shows the number of bytes that have been transmitted on this port Rx bytes This field shows the number of bytes that have been received on this port VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI of channels on this port Tx Packets This field
399. s uses Trellis coding Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 363 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream and upstream transmissions are listed The total output power ofthe transceiver varies with the length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s DSL modem or router is or the more interference there 1s on the line the higher the power will be DS refers to the power output of the AAMI212 US refers to the power output of the subscriber s DSL modem or router Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information The atuc information fields show data acquired from the ATUC ADSL Termination Unit Central in this case AAM1212 during negotiation provisioning message interchanges The atur information fields show data acquired from the ATUR ADSL Termination Unit Remote in this case the subscriber s DSL modem or router during negotiation provisioning message interchanges This information can help in identifying the subscriber s DSL modem or router The vendor ID vendor version number and product serial number are obtained from vendor ID fields see ITU T G 994 1 or R MSGSI see T1 413 52 2 4 Lineperf Command Syntax ras statistics adsl lineperf portlist where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt
400. s with all of the ATM traffic classes Type the CDVT here SCR The Sustained Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR SCR applies with the VBR traffic classes You can type a number of ATM cells per second in the first field or type a number of kilobytes per second in the second field to have the system automatically compute the number of ATM cells per second BT Burst Tolerance BT sets a maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards Type the BT here BT applies with the VBR traffic classes Add Click Add to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 126 Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 14 6 Alarm Profile Screen Alarm profiles define ADSL port alarm thresholds The AAM1212 sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Profiles Setup Alarm Profile Use the top part of the screen with the Add and Cancel buttons to add or edit alarm profiles The rest of the screen dis
401. sable downstream carrier tone 307 Use 0x0000f000 in Mask1 to disable downstream carrier tones 304 to 307 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 13 8 Virtual Channels Defining virtual channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs allows you to set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assign different priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them For example you want to give high priority to voice service on one of the ADSL ports Use the Edit Static VLAN screen to configure a static VLAN on the AAMI212 for voice on the port Use the ADSL Edit Port Channel Setup screen to Configure a channel on the port for voice service Set the channel to use the PVID ofthe static VLAN you configured Assign the channel a high priority 13 8 1 Super Channel The AAM1212 f
402. screen Table 3 Navigation Panel Submenu Links BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION ROUTING PROTOCOL ALARM MANAGEMENT CONFIG SAVE The following table briefly describes the functions of the screens that you open by clicking the navigation panel s sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Setting System Information Use this screen to display general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup Use this screen to configure general identification information about the device and the time and date settings Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 57 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 4 Web Configurator Screens continued LABEL DESCRIPTION User Account Use this screen to configure system administrator accounts Switch Setup Use this screen to set up system wide parameters such as MAC address learning and priority queues IP Setup Use this screen to configure the system and management IP addresses and subnet masks ENET Port Setup Use this screen to configure settings for the Ethernet ports xDSL Port Setup Use these screens for configuring settings for individual DSL ports xDSL Profiles Setup Use these screens for configuring profiles for the DSL ports xDSL Line Data Use these screens for viewing DSL line operating values bit allocation and performance counters
403. se MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 74 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations 222 Chapter 34 Access Control AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 74 SNMP Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 34 3 1 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance See Appendix B on page 425 for the list of MIBs the AAMI212 supports 34 3 2 SNMP Traps The AAM1212 can send the following SNMP traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs ATUC refers to the downstream channel for traffic going from the AAM1212 to the subscriber ATUR refers to the upstream channel for traffic coming from the subscriber to
404. sed may have a problem Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 417 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 55 9 Data Rate The SYNC rate is not the same as the configured rate Table 108 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Connect the DSL modem or router directly to the DSL port using a different telephone wire 2 If the rates match the quality of the telephone wiring that connects the subscriber to the DSL port may be limiting the speed to a certain rate If they do not match when a good wire is used contact the distributor 55 10 Configured Settings The configured settings do not take effect Table 109 Troubleshooting the AAM1212 s Configured Settings CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the config save command after you finish configuring to save the AAM1212 s settings 55 11 Password If you forget your password you will need to use the console port to reload the factory default configuration file see Section 55 15 on page 419 55 12 System Lockout Any of the following could also lock you and others out from using in band management managing through the data ports 1 Deleting the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Incorrectly configuring the CPU VLAN 3 Incorrectly configuring the access control settings 4 Disabling all ports Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the system If you lock yourself and others out of the system you can try using
405. ser s Guide where lt fac gt The log facility 10ca11 10ca17 that has the device log the syslog messages to different files in the syslog server See your syslog program s documentation for details target snmp syslog all The type of alarm messages that the device is to send SNMP syslog or all This command lists alarm settings The following example displays the supported minor level alarms for all alarm categories facilities types of alarm messages and conditions Figure 143 Alarm Tablelist Command Example ras alarm table no alarm condition facility snmp syslog severity clearable 1 ds 5000 1ine up locall V V info 2 ds 5001 1ine down locall V V minor V 3 ds 5002 ad perf lol thresh locall V V minor V 4 ds 5003 ad perf lof thresh locall V V minor V 5 dsl 5004 ad perf los thresh locall V V minor V 6 dsl 5005 ad perf lop thresh locall V V minor V 7 dsl 5006 ad perf es thresh locall V V minor V 8 dsl 5007 ad perf ses thresh locall V V minor V 9 dsl 5008 ad perf uas thresh locall V V minor V 10 ds 5009 ad atuc loftrap locall V V minor 11 ds 5010 ad atuc lostrap locall V V minor 1 2 ds 5011 ad atur loftrap locall V V minor 13 ds 5012 ad atur lostrap locall V V minor 14 dsl 5013 ad atur lprtrap locall V V minor 15 eqpt 10000 vol err locall V V critical 16 eqpt 10001 temp err locall V V critical 17 eqpt 10002 hw rtc fail
406. ser s Guide CHAPTER 4 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter tells how to access and navigate the web configurator 4 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator allows you to use a web browser to manage the AAM1212 4 2 Screen Privilege Levels There is a high or low privilege level for each screen High privilege screens are only available to administrators with high privilege access High privilege screens include things like creating administrator accounts restarting the system saving changes to the nonvolatile memory and resetting to factory defaults Nonvolatile memory refers to the AAM1212 s storage that remains even if the AAMI212 s power is turned off Administrators with high privilege access can use all screens including the lower privilege screens Administrators with the low privilege level are restricted to using only low privilege screens Low privilege screens are read only 4 3 Accessing the Web Configurator Use Internet Explorer 6 and later versions with JavaScript enabled Use the following instructions to log on to the web configurator 1 Launch your web browser and enter the IP address of the AAMI212 default 192 168 1 1 is the factory default in the Location or Address field Press Enter The Login screen appears Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 55 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 17 Login Enter Network Password 2 xl qe Please type your user name a
407. ses the web configurator for initial configuration See the CLI chapters for information on the commands Use Internet Explorer 6 and later versions with JavaScript enabled 1 Log in to the web configurator See Section 4 3 on page 55 for instructions 2 In the navigation panel click Basic Setting IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears Figure 22 IP Setup fisz 168 1 1 IP mask 255 255 255 0 Apply IP setting Cancel Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Apply Gateway setting Cancel 3 Use this screen to change the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP address for your network Apply the settings Note If you change the IP address of the AAM1212 after you click Apply IP setting you have to use the new IP address to log into the web configurator again 4 If your subscribers use VPI 0 and VCI 33 the default for all of the DSL ports go to step 13 Otherwise use the following steps to change the VPI and VCI settings for all of the DSL ports Chapter 5 Initial Configuration 63 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide First you will delete the default virtual channel from all of the DSL ports You cannot edit it Then you will configure a new virtual channel for a port and copy it to the other DSL ports Adding another virtual channel without deleting the default virtual channel is not recommended since you cannot set the new channel to be the port s super channel The super channel can forward frames belonging
408. shold gt value lt id gt 1 1 2v 2 1 8v 3 3 3v 4 24v lt voltage gt lt threshold gt voltage limit lt voltage gt voltage of the DC power when logged THERMO OVER VOLTAGE INFO The device s voltage is back inside the accepted operating range released nominal nominal voltage of the DC power voltage voltage of the DC power when logged 42 3 2 Log Clear Command Syntax ras sys log clear This command clears the system error log Note If you clear a log using the log clear command you cannot view it again 42 3 3 Info Show Command Syntax ras sys info show This command shows general system settings the BIN firmware version system uptime and bootbase version An example is shown next Figure 136 Info Show Example ras sys info show Hostname Location Contact Model ZyNOS version F W size MAC address System up time Bootbase version F W build date DSP code version Hardware version Serial number AAM1212 51 V3 52 ABA 0 07 07 2006 2747672 00 13 49 DE 00 AD O days 22 31 49 V1 03 AAM1212 51 02 18 2005 Jul 7 2006 10 00 31 6 04 0003 274 Chapter 42 Command Examples AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 42 4 Isolation Commands Turn on port isolation to block communications between subscriber ports When you enable port isolation you do not need to configure the VLAN to isolate subscribers 42 4 1 Isolation Show Command
409. shows the number of packets transmitted on each channel Rx Packets This field shows the number of packets received on each channel Tx rate This field shows the number of bytes per second transmitted on each channel Rx rate This field shows the number of bytes per second received on each channel Tx cells This field shows the number of ATM cells transmitted on each channel Rx cells This field shows the number of ATM cells received on each channel Errors This field shows the number of error packets on each channel Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may Set Interval change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Port Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to Clear Counter erase the recorded statistical information for that port Reset Click this to set the Poll Interval s and Port fields to their default values and to refresh the screen 6 1 3 RMON Statistics Screen Use this screen to display RMON statistics about a port To open this screen click RMON in the DSL Port Statistics screen or Ethernet Port Statistics screen Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens 75 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 36 Port Statistics RMON RMON etherStatsDropEvents etherStatsOctets etherStatsP kts etherStatsBroadcastPk
410. smission targets attndr This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEndActatp This is the upstream and downstream Far End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power in dBm This is the index number of the DMT sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the real part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number This is the imaginary part of the complex number used in producing the channel characteristics function for this sub carrier log This is a format for providing channel characteristics It provides magnitude values in a logarithmic scale It is measured in dB This can be used in analyzing the physical condition of the DSL line OLN The Quiet Line Noise for a DMT sub carrier is the rms root mean square level of the noise present on the line when no DSL signals are present It is measured in dBm The QLN can be used in analyzing crosstalk SNR This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The SNR can be used in analyzing time dependent changes in crosstalk levels and line attenuation such as t
411. stream carrier tones to be masked disabled Each lt mx gt can use up to 8 hexadecimal digits 0 ffffffff Each lt mx gt represents 32 carrier tones each hexadecimal digit represents 4 tones m1 tones 32 63 m2 tones 64 95 m3 tones 96 127 m4 tones 128 159 m5 tones 160 191 m6 tones 192 223 m7 tones 224 255 The hexadecimal digit is converted to binary and a 1 masks disables the corresponding tone Disabling a carrier tone turns it off so the system does not send data on it 354 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command displays or sets masks for downstream carrier tones from 33 to 255 Masking a carrier tone disables the use of that tone on the specified DSL port The most significant bit defines the lowest tone number in a mask The following example disables downstream carrier tone 71 for DSL port 5 Figure 229 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Example 1 ras adsl dscarrier0 5 0 01000000 0 00 0 0 The following example displays the results Figure 230 DSL Port Downstream Carrier Command Display Example ras adsl dscarrier0 5 ds carrier port mi m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 Sass epean fRSRSeas Hass 799 9252 2T7258 52 2 Ams 229 265 5 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tone m1 32 63 m2 64 95 m3 96 127 m4 128 159 m5 160 191 m6 192 223 m7 224 255 This example disables downstream carr
412. subscriber s device must create this PVC VC Profile This shows which VC profile this channel uses for downstream traffic shaping The VC profile for upstream policing also displays if the channel is configured to use one Level This field displays the number of the member PVC s priority queue Delete Click Delete to remove a member PVC from the PPVC Clicking Delete saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Add Use this section of the screen to add or modify a member PVC VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this member PVC VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this member PPVC This PVC cannot overlap with any existing PVC s on this port DS VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s downstream traffic shaping US VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to use for this channel s upstream traffic The AAM1212 does not perform upstream traffic policing if you do not specify an upstream VC profile Level Use the drop down list box to select the priority queue 0 to 7 to add to use for the PVC 7 is the highest level Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup 117 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 24 PPVC Setup E
413. t for Bridge 1 for Brida D iscarding 3 r eda Design ated Port Design amp ed Port Designated Port ras ridges for Bridge 3 for Brida Bridge 3 Bridge 4 Bridge 5 RSTP aware devices exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed In RSTP the devices send BPDUs every Hello Time If an RSTP aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after three Hello Times pass or the Max Age the device assumes that the link to the neighboring bridge is down This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology In STP once a stable network topology has been established all devices listen for Hello BPDUs transmitted from the root bridge If an STP aware device does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the device assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This device then initiates negotiations with other devices to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology RSTP assigns three port states to eliminate packet looping while STP assigns five see Table 49 on page 172 A device port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 49 RSTP Port States RSTP PORT STATE STP PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Discarding Disabled RSTP or STP is disabled default Discarding Blo
414. t t1413 port s ADSL mode auto ads12 ads12 gt profile map lt portlist gt AAM1212 53 Assigns a specific H H lt profile gt profile to a port s and sets the gdmt etsi auto ad port s ADSL mode sl2 ads12 gt name lt portlist gt lt name gt Sets the name of a port s M L tel lt portlist gt lt tel gt Records an ADSL port s M L subscriber s telephone number loopback lt portlist gt f5 Performs an OAMF5 loopback H H vpi vci test vcprofile show vcprofile Shows a virtual channel profile s L L contents vcprofile set vcprofile Creates a UBR or CBR virtual H H vc llc ubr cbr channel profile with pcr lt cdvt gt encapsulation vcprofile set vcprofile Creates a VBR virtual channel H H vc llc vbr rt profile with encapsulation vbr nrt vbr pcr lt cdvt gt scr mcr bt nrm gt Chapter 41 Commands 255 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION vcprofile delete vcprofile Removes a virtual channel profile H H pvc show portlist vci lt vpi gt Displays PVC settings M L pvc set lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt super vid 1 4094 lt priority gt gt DS vcprofile US vcprofile Creates or modifies a PVC setting H H pvc delete lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Removes a PVC setting H H ppvc show
415. t 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI setting can be 0 to 255 vci The VCI setting can be 32 to 65535 if the vpi is 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi is not 0 This PVC channel is for internal use The operator does not need to create this PVC on the subscriber s device the CPE lt encap gt The type of encapsulation llc vemux lt pvid gt Type a PVID Port VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this PPVC lt priority gt This is the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag This command creates a PPVC The following example creates a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 The PPVC uses llc encapsulation and default VID 25 Any frames received without an IEEE 802 1p priority tag will be assigned a priority of 3 The AAM1212 uses this PVC channel internally This PVC is not needed on the subscriber s device Figure 265 PPVC Set Command Example ras adsl ppvc set 5 8 35 llc 25 3 53 4 2 PPVC Member Set Command Syntax ras adsl ppvc member set portlist vpi vci member vpi member vci DS vcprofile US vcprofile level 386 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide where lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt member vpi gt lt member vci gt DS vcprofile US vcprofile level The port s of the
416. t 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PPVC lt vci gt The VCI of the PPVC This command removes a PPVC Removing a PPVC also deletes all of the member PVCs The following example removes a PPVC with VPI 8 and VCI 35 for port 5 Figure 270 PPVC Delete Command Example ras adsl ppvc delete 5 8 35 53 7 2684 Routed Mode Commands Use the 2684 routed mode to have the AAM1212 add MAC address headers to 2684 routed mode traffic from a PVC that connects to a subscriber device that uses 2684 routed mode You can also specify the gateway to which the AAM1212 sends the traffic and the VLAN ID tag to add See RFC 2684 for details on routed mode traffic carried over AAL type 5 over ATM Use the commands in the following order to set up a 2684 routed mode PVC 1 Usethe adsl rpvc gateway commands to configure gateway settings 2 Use the adsl rpvc set command to configure RPVCs 2684 routed mode PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic 3 Use the adsl rpvc route set command to configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic The domain is the range of IP addresses behind the subscriber s device the CPE or Customer Premises Equipment This includes the CPE device s LAN IP addresses and the IP addresses of the LAN computers 4 Usethe adsl rpvc arp commands to view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them 5 For upstream traffic Si
417. t Command Example eeeeeee seen 311 Figure 178 IGMP Filter Profile Set Command Example 1 eiie rtt keen 312 Figure 179 IGMP Filter Profile Delete Command Example 312 Figure 180 IGMP Filter Show Command Example eee 313 Figure 181 IGMP Bandwidth Port Show Command Example 316 Figure 182 IGMP Count Disable Command Example ssesusss 317 Figure 183 IGMP Count Enable Command Example sess 317 Figure 164 IGMP Count Set Command Example niin e rr ttr ennt 318 Figure 185 IGMP Count Show Command Example 5 seeker tad 318 Figure 186 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command Example 319 Figure 187 IGMP Group Statistics Command Example sssssss 319 Figure 188 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command Example ss 320 Figure 189 IGMP Port Group Statistics Command Example 320 Figure 190 Multicast VLAN Disable Command Example sss 322 Figure 191 Multicast VLAN Show Command Example esses 322 Figure 192 Multicast VLAN Group Set Command Example 323 Figure 193 Packet Filter Show Command Example eessesuses 325 Figure 194 Packet Filter Set Command Exemple 1 perte tnt sett nee
418. t Gomimand Example 2 rime koci e eec oniinn ee Fnit tie eee bdo 385 Figure 265 PPVC Set Command Exempli 2er ptr tU rotto pela 386 Figure 266 PPVC Member Set Command Exarmple erri terni Rhen R Re rne dn 387 Figure 267 PPYC Member Delete Command Example ta titia 388 Figure 268 PPVC Member Show Command Example suus 389 Figure 269 PP YC Show Command Example itt ER II EERR Free Pe Reta kenn 389 Figure 270 PPVC Delete Command Example 22 2 5 ice eerte np i a re ERE nea 390 Figure 271 2684 Routed Mode Example 11 ie eeceeca eh orae tenau hh tta ako kd koh 391 Figure 272 2684 Routed Mode Commands Example sss 392 Figure 273 RPVC Gateway Set Command Example 1 tentata 392 Figure 274 RPVC Gateway Show Command Example eee 393 Figure 275 RPVC Gateway Delete Command Example 125 393 Figure 276 REVO Set Command EukMple 2a cetexeccnba ximo Det Kk 394 Figure 277 RPYC Show Commasngd EXaEDBIB sei ee eral a s be bRt er Ebr ecu R 395 Figure 278 RPVU Delete Command Example 12211 rrt e ntn Ec arte ege un 395 Figure 279 RPVC Route Set Command EXAmple 2 5 k dic n 396 Figure 280 RPVC Route Show Command Example 5 seien tne tirncrte 397 Figure 281 RPVC Route Delete Command Example enne 398 Figure 282 RPVC ARP Agingtime Command Example eere 398 Figure 283 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command Example
419. t mode is enabled see Section 46 2 on page 303 the AAM1212 ignores the MAC count setting and accepts all of the MAC addresses listed for the port in the MAC filter settings The following example turns on the MAC count filter on DSL port 4 Figure 170 MAC Count Enable Command Example ras gt switch mac count enable 4 46 3 3 MAC Count Disable Command Syntax ras gt switch mac count disable lt portlist gt where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command disables the MAC filtering feature on the specified DSL port s The following example turns off the MAC count filter on DSL port 4 Figure 171 MAC Count Disable Command Example ras gt switch mac count disable 4 Chapter 46 MAC Commands 307 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 46 3 4 MAC Count Set Command Syntax ras switch mac count set lt portlist gt count where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt count gt Set the limit for how many MAC addresses that a port may dynamically learn For example if you are configuring port 2 and you set this field to 5 then only five devices with dynamically learned MAC addresses may access port 2
420. t parameters that display see the ITU T s G 992 3 for more information Table 96 Line Diagnostics Get Command LABEL DESCRIPTION number of Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub subcarries carriers sub channels of 4 3125 kHz each The first number is the total number of DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using The second number indicates how many upstream DMT sub carriers the DSL connection is using hlinScale The channel characteristics function is represented in linear format by a scale factor and a complex number These are the maximum upstream and downstream scale factors used in producing the channel characteristics function latn This is the upstream and downstream Line Attenuation in 1 dB satn This is the upstream and downstream Signal Attenuation in 1 dB Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 369 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 96 Line Diagnostics Get Command continued LABEL DESCRIPTION snrm This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio Margin in 1 dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the AAM1212 still being able to meet its transmission targets attndr This is the upstream and downstream Attainable Net Data Rate in bit s farEnd
421. te and the following screen appears 3 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 4 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 91 Select Ports 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 s pnpnmpnpnnpnnmn 10 12 C ENET1 select Au None ENET2 Apply Cancel 182 Chapter 24 Port Security AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 25 DHCP Relay This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP relays for each VLAN 25 1 DHCP Relay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a DHCP server You can configure the AAM1212 to relay DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers and the server s responses back to the clients You can specify default DHCP servers for all VLAN and you can specify DHCP servers for each VLAN 25 2 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Option 82 The AAM1212 can add information to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the AAM1212 to add to the DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please see RFC 3046 for more details 25 2 1 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Formats The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP head
422. ted on the ATUC adslAturLos This trap is sent when a Loss Of Signal is detected on the ATUR adslAturLpr This trap is sent when a Loss Of Power is detected on the ATUR adslAtucLofClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Frame detected on the ATUC is over Chapter 34 Access Control 223 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 75 SNMPv2 Traps continued TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION adslAturLofClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Frame detected on the ATUR is over adslAtucLosClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Signal detected on the ATUC is over adslAturLosClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Signal detected on the ATUR is over adslAturLprClear This trap is sent when the Loss Of Power detected on the ATUR is over adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred
423. tegory or alarm condition Chapter 43 Alarm Commands 279 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays the current critical level alarms for all alarm categories and conditions The source is where the alarm originated This is either a DSL port number one of the Ethernet ports enet 1 or 2 or eqpt for the system itself Figure 140 Alarm Show Command Example ras alarm tablelist no alarm condition facility snmp syslog severity clearable 1 ds 5000 1ine up locall V V info 2 ds 5001 1ine down locali V V minor V 3 dsl 5002 ad perf lol thresh locall V V minor V 4 dsl 5003 ad perf lof thresh locall V V minor V 5 dsl 5004 ad perf los thresh locall V V minor V 6 dsl 5005 ad perf lop thresh locall V V minor V 7 dsl 5006 ad perf es thresh locall V V minor V 8 dsl 5007 ad perf ses thresh locall V V minor V 9 dsl 5008 ad perf uas thresh locall V V minor V 10 ds 5009 ad atuc loftrap locall V V minor 11 ds 5010 ad atuc lostrap locall V V minor 12 ds 5011 ad atur loftrap locall V V minor 13 ds 5012 ad atur lostrap locall V V minor 14 dsl 5013 ad atur lprtrap locall V V minor 15 eqpt 10000 vol err locall V V critical 16 eqpt 10001 temp err locall V V critical 17 eqpt 10002 hw rtc fail locall V V critical 18 eqpt 10003 hw mon fail locall V V critical 19 eqpt 10004 cold start locall V V info Press any key to continue e to exit n for
424. telephone number The following example records the telephone number 12345678 for DSL port 5 Figure 223 DSL Port Tel Command Example ras gt adsl tel 5 12345678 52 1 10 DSL Port Loopback Command Syntax ras gt adsl loopback lt portlist gt lt 5 gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 351 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 1 11 where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt 5 gt Use f5 to perform an OAMFS loopback test on the specified DSL port An Operational Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices First the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test lt vpi gt lt vci gt When you perform an OAMFS loopback test specify a VPI VCI This command has the AAM1212 perform an OAMFS loopback test on the specified DSL port s The following example has the AAM1212 perform an OAMFS loopback test on DSL port 1 s PVC at VPI 0 and VCI 33 Figure 224 DSL Port Loopback Command Example ras adsl loopback 1 5 0 33 port 1 OAM F5 loopback test failed DSL Port Upstream PSD Command Syntax ras adsl usnompsd
425. th Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning EENE BERRA EE ERA ER BRERA TESTMEBIR T ASS ee KES AISR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a
426. the IP address of one DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Secondary Server IP Enter the IP address of a second DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Enter 0 0 0 0 if there is only one DHCP relay for the selected VLAN Active Server This field has no effect if the Relay Mode is Both If the Relay Mode is Auto select which DHCP server the primary one or the secondary one to which the AAM1212 should relay DHCP requests for the selected VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Server List This section lists the DHCP servers that are already set up for each VLAN An asterisk in parentheses indicates which DHCP server is active for each VLAN Index This is a sequential value and it is not associated with any entry The entries are sorted by VLAN ID VLAN ID This field displays the ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP relay s Primary Server IP This field displays the IP address of one DHCP server to which the switch should relay DHCP requests Chapter 25 DHCP Relay 185 AAM1212 51 53 Series User
427. the console port to reconfigure the system See Section 55 15 on page 419 418 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 55 13 SNMP The SNMP manager server cannot get information from the AAMI212 Table 110 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Ping the AAM1212 from the SNMP server If you cannot check the cable connections and IP configuration Check to see that the community or trusted host in the AAM1212 matches the SNMP server s community Make sure that your computer s IP address matches a configured trusted host IP address if configured Incorrectly configuring the access control settings may lock you out from using in band management Try using the console port to reconfigure the system 55 14 Telnet I cannot telnet into the AAMI212 Table 111 Troubleshooting Telnet STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure that the number of current telnet sessions does not exceed the maximum allowed number You cannot have more than five telnet sessions at one time Make sure that your computer s IP address matches a configured secured client IP address if configured The AAM1212 immediately disconnects the telnet session if secured host IP addresses are configured and your computer s IP address does not match one of them Make sure that you have not disabled the Telnet service or changed the server port number that the A
428. the downstream transfer rate goes above this threshold This rate must be less than or equal to one half of the Min L2 Rate and at least 16 Kbps Use this command to display or set Power ManageMent PMM parameters for the specified DSL port s The following example sets DSL port 5 to use the following PMM settings Chapter 52 ADSL Commands 357 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 52 1 17 52 1 18 Stay in the LO power mode for 180 seconds before a change to the L2 power mode is permitted Once in L2 power mode wait for 90 seconds before further reducing the transmission power Each L2 power mode power reduction can only be 2 dB or less The total power reduction allowed in the L2 power mode is 40 dB Figure 235 PMM Parameters Command Example ras adsl pmm param 5 180 90 2 40 Impulse Noise Protection Command Syntax ras adsl inp lt portlist gt lt usINP gt lt dsINP gt where lt usINP gt Sets the minimum upstream us impulse noise protection setting Use 0 3 to define a number of DMT symbols 0 0 DMT symbols 1 0 5 DMT symbols 2 1 DMT symbols 3 2 DMT symbols lt dsINP gt Sets the minimum downstream ds impulse noise protection setting Use 0 3 to define a number of DMT symbols 0 0 DMT symbols 1 0 5 DMT symbols 2 1 DMT symbols 3 2 DMT symbols This command sets the upstream us and downstream ds impulse noise protection minimum setting on the sp
429. the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 420 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 2 Waitforthe Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 3 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen Figure 298 Example Xmodem Upload Ee 00i Folder C Product Filename C Product config rom f Protocol 1K Xmodem Send Close Cancel Type the configuration file s location or click Browse to search for it Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Then click Send 4 After a successful configuration file upload type atgo to restart the AAMI212 The AAM1212 is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 55 16 Recovering the Firmware Usually you should use FTP or the web configurator to upload the AAM1212 s firmware If the AAM1212 will not start up the firmware may be lost or corrupted Use the following procedure to upload firmware to the AAM1212 only when you are unable to upload firmware through FTP Note This procedure is for emergency situations only 1 Obtain the firmware file unzip it and save it in a
430. the link is up To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Line Data Line Data In the screen shown the downstream channel is carried on tones 48 to 255 and the upstream channel is carried on tones 16 to 31 space is left between the channels to avoid interference Chapter 15 xDSL Line Data 137 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 65 xDSL Line Data ESESSDDPECHENEED Pot 2 Z Port Name Bit Allocation DS carrier load tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone tone 000 015 016 031 032 047 048 063 064 079 080 095 096 111 112 127 128 143 144 158 160 175 176 191 192 207 208 223 224 239 240 255 256 271 272 287 288 303 304 319 320 335 336 351 352 367 368 383 384 399 400 415 416 431 432 447 448 463 464 479 480 495 496 511 00 oo 00 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 US carrier load tone 000 015 00 tone 016 031 08 number of bits 00 oo 00 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 00 oo 00 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 ol 00 oo 00 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03
431. the specified port s pmm show lt portlist gt Displays the Power Management M L feature setting for the specified port s pmm set lt portlist gt L0 L2 Sets the Power Management H H mode pmm param lt portlist gt Displays or sets the Power H H lt l0time gt 12time Management parameter l2atpr l2atprt max 12 rate min l2rate 10tol2 rate dsbcast enable port number Enable downstream broadcast on H H vlanlist xDSL port Chapter 41 Commands 259 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 88 Commands continued CLASS COMMAND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION P dsbcast disable lt port number gt Disable downstream broadcast on H H lt vlanlist gt xDSL port dsbcast show lt portlist gt Show downstream broadcast on M L xDSL port reset lt portlist gt Reset xDSL port H H inp lt portlist gt lt usINP gt Displays or sets the upstream us H H lt dsINP gt and downstream ds Impulse Noise Protection minimum setting 0 3 alarm clear Clear current alarm M L cutoff Alarm cutoff M xedit alarm all Edit system alarm table M L lt cond gt lt condcode gt lt severity gt lt fac gt lt target gt lt target gt clearable history clear lt alarm gt all Clear history alarm M lt condition gt all history clear lt severity gt Clear history alarm M history show severity all D
432. tic Screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform loopback tests To open this screen click Management Diagnostic Figure 131 Diagnostic OLE Tei Syslog Event Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ping fr Times 1 10 Loopback Test Pot 1i vei o vcio OAMFS5Loopback LDM Test Port 1 v SetLDM Port Get LDM Data raw Get LDM Data 992 3 SELT Pot i v SetsELT Port Get SELT Data PMM Pont i 7 mode L0 v Set PMM Mode Get PMM Mode ToneDiag Pot 1 Get ToneDiag data Chapter 38 Diagnostic 243 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Event Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the log IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection In the field to the right specify the number of times that you want to ping the IP address Click Ping to have the device ping the IP address in the field to the left Loopback Test Select a port number from the Port drop down list box and enter a VPI VCI to specify a PVC Click OAM F5 Loopback to perform an OAMF5 loopback test on the specified DSL port An Operational Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices
433. tics commands to display current IGMP settings and statistics 47 7 1 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics igmpsnoop info clear This command displays the current IGMP settings and the number of IGMP related packets received The following figure shows an example 318 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 186 IGMP Snoop Info Statistics Command Example ras statistics igmpsnoop info IGMP Snooping Proxy is Disable number of query 0 number of report 0 number of leav 0 number of groups 0 47 7 2 IGMP Group Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics igmpsnoop group lt vid gt lt mcast_ip gt where lt vid gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 The multicast IP address lt mcast_ip gt This command displays the information about IGMP groups learned on the system specified VLAN or specified multicast address on the specified VLAN s Figure 187 IGMP Group Statistics Command Example ras gt statistics igmpsnoop group group info group vid port 47 7 3 IGMP Port Info Statistics Command Syntax ras gt statistics igmpsnoop port info portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays the number of IGMP related packets received on the specified port s
434. tienes 327 Figure 195 Packet Filter PPPoE Only Command Example 327 Figure 196 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Commands 329 Figure 197 IP Settings and Default Gateway Address Command Example 330 Figure 198 Route Show Command Example ccccessseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseneeeeee 332 Figure 199 ARP Show Command Example 125r rene Sopra n Eoo brin ER Ee PU Rn AER er Y dn 332 Figure 200 Statistics IP Command Example sssrinin 333 Figure 201 FIP Put Configuration File EXample 1e ta t tt ek 335 Figure 202 FTP Get Configuration File Example icio oec dep Ent root id tdt 335 Figure 203 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the AAM1212 336 Figure 204 Example Enter the Management Password ueusssss 337 Figure 205 Example Get the Configuration File config O ssssssss 337 Figure 206 Exemple Close FTP Client 2i ise esatta eene tak assa Eh n tna ehh nine tik 337 Figure 207 Comiauravion File EXAIple ise berto ER Ee be tea REPE andes 338 Figure 208 Example Use an FTP Client to Connect to the AAM1212 338 Figure 209 Example Enter the Management Password susssss 339 Figure 210 Example Upload the Configuration File config O 339 List of Figures 29 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 211 Example Close FTP CI
435. time AC Name Service Name Counter Status PPP LCP Config Request PPP LCP Echo Request PPP LCP Echo Reply PPPoE PADI PPPoE PADO PPPoE PADR PPPoE PADS PPPoE PADT PPPoE Service Name Error PPPoE AC System Error PPPoE Generic Error The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 PPPoA to PPPoE Status LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoA to PPPoE Click PPPoA to PPPoE to open the screen where you can set up PPPoA to PPPoE conversions on each port see Section 28 2 on page 199 PVC This field displays the port number VPI and VCI of the PVC Session Status Session State This field displays whether or not the current session is Up or Down Session ID This field displays the ID of the current session It displays 0 if there is no current session Session Uptime This field displays how long the current session has been up 202 Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 64 PPPoA to PPPoE Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION AC Name This field displays the hostname of the remote access concentrator if there are two access concentrators or BRAS on the network or if you want to allow PAE translation to the specified access concentrator Service Name This field specifies the name of the service that uses this PVC Counter Status Tx Rx The values in these columns are for packets transmitted tx or received rx by the A
436. tination IP address of packets that this static route is to route netmask The destination subnet mask of packets that this static route is to route lt gateway ip gt The IP address of the gateway that you want to send the packets through metric The metric hop count of this static route name A name to identify this static route Up to 31 ASCII characters Spaces and tabs are not allowed default Use this to configure the AAMI212 s default route This command defines a new static IP forwarding route or edits an existing one 49 3 4 Route Delete Command Syntax ras ip route delete dst ip gt netmask where dst ip The destination IP address of packets to which this static route applies netmask The destination subnet mask of packets to which this static route applies This command removes a static IP forwarding route 49 3 5 Route Show Command Syntax ras ip route show This command displays the AAM1212 s routing table Chapter 49 IP Commands 331 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide An example is shown next Figure 198 Route Show Command Example ras gt ip route show index dest gateway metric name 1 192 168 1 0 24 192 168 1 1 1 2 default 192 168 1 254 1 49 3 6 ARP Show Command Syntax ras ip arp show This command displays the AAM1212 s IP Address Resolution Protocol table This is the list of IP addresses and matching MAC addresses that
437. tion such as sample time on history samples To open this screen click any port number in the RMON Statistics screen Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens 77 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 37 Port Statistics RMON History ED RMON Histo m NP Enet1 Index Interval 1 30 Seconds Apply Refresh Sample Index Interval Start Pkts BroadcastPkts MulticastPkts Utilization 16 13 15 45 45 15 12 45 85 85 WA NA NL UA Ne ZI S NP NP RA I SS P S PI SPI SI oe n ut at atat a gl Nien fle fl ff On 15 49 45 44 44 i D 15 48 15 52 15 48 45 50 50 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Port Statistics RMON History LABEL DESCRIPTION Index Interval Select the index of the sample interval and the desired data sampling time in seconds Apply Click this to use the selected data sampling time Refresh Click this to update this screen Sample Index This field display the sample number Interval Start This field displays the data sampling time Pkts This field displays the number of packets received or transmitted since the last sample time BroadcastPkts This field displays the number of broadcast packets received or transmitted since the last sample time MulticastPkts This field displays the number of multicast packets received transmitted since the last sample time Utilization This field displays the port utilization status 6 1 5
438. tion IP The AAMI212 s management IP address also should not be in the same subnet as the one defined by the LAN IP address and netmask of the subscriber s device Make sure you assign the IP addresses properly e In general deployment the computer must set the CPE device s LAN IP address 10 10 10 10 in this example as its default gateway The subnet range of any RPVC and RPVC domain must be unique 27 2 2684 Routed PVC Screen Use this screen to configure PVCs for 2684 routed mode traffic To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode 192 Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 99 2684 Routed PVC CE eI Routed PVE RN E b DEFVAL EI DS VC Profile US VC Profile Index Port VPI VCI Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Routed Gateway Gateway IP 0 0 0 0 VCI 0 NetMask o 022 DS US VC Profile NetMask Gateway IP Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 2684 Routed PVC LABEL DESCRIPTION Routed Domain Click Routed Domain to open this screen where you can configure domains for 2684 routed mode traffic see Section 27 3 on page 194 RPVC ARP Proxy Click RPVC ARP Proxy to go to the screen where you can view the Address Resolution Protocol table of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode and configure how long the device is to store them see Section 27 4 on page 195 Routed G
439. tiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64K bps The DSL up down shift noise margins define the threshold that triggers rate adaptation For example The target SNR is 6 and the up down shift noise margins are 9 3 If the signal becomes better and the SNR is higher than 9 rate adaptation is triggered and the line rate becomes higher If the signal becomes bad and the SNR is lower than 3 rate adaptation is triggered and the line rate becomes lower The following example creates a premium profile named gold for providing subscribers with very high connection speeds and no interleave delay It also sets the upstream target signal noise margin to 5 db the upstream minimum acceptable signal noise margin to 0 db the upstream maximum acceptable signal noise margin to 30 db the upstream minimum DSL transmission rate to 128 Kbps the downstream target signal noise margin to 5 db the downstream minimum acceptable signal noise margin to 0 db the downstream maximum acceptable signal noise margin to 30 db and the downstream minimum DSL transmission rate to 256Kbps 348 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The upstream down shift noise margin is 0 dB The upstream up shift noise margin is 6 dB The downstream down shift noise margin is 0 dB The downstream up shift noise ma
440. to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels A channel that is not the super channel can only forward frames with a single VLAN ID that is configured on that channel In this case the AAMI212 drops any frames received from the subscriber that are tagged with another VLAN ID 5 In the navigation panel click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup The xDSL Port Setup screen appears Figure 23 xDSL Port Setup OFS SES aD VC Setup PPVC Setup Vv Active O Customer Info O Customer Tel O 2 Features Copy Port n ho Protle amp Mode Micmptiter O security Frame Type settings Paste O virtual Channels O Alarm Profile r PYID amp Priority r Packet Filter D a Active Customer Info Customer Tel Profile Mode Channels enabled DEFYAL enabled DEFYAL enabled DEFYAL enabled DEFYAL DEFYAL 6 Click VC Setup The following screen appears Figure 24 VC Setup xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Super Channel VPI VCI o DS VC Profile US VC Profile PVID Priority o Add Cancel Show Port ALL Index Port VPI VCI DS US VC Profile PVID Priority Select 1 0 33 DEFVAL 2 p 2 0 33 DEFVAL a 7 0 33 DEFVAL 0i 33 DEFVAL 0 33 laid Index 1 selected Delete No Channel copied Copy Paste 64 Chapter 5 Initial Configuration AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 7 Select any virtual channel s Select radio button and click Delete The following screen appears Figure 25 VC Setup Delete
441. torage Temperature 40 C 85 C Operation Humidity 10 95 RH non condensing Storage Humidity 5 95 RH non condensing Certifications Safety UL1950 CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1 EN41003 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A EN55022 Class A System Management Embedded Web Configurator HTTP CLI Command Line Interpreter Remote Management via Telnet or Web SNMP manageable Firmware Upgrade web configurator FTP 425 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 113 Device Specifications continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION Other Features MAC filtering MAC count limiting Access Control List Hardware based multicasting IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging e GVRP IEEE 802 1p CoS with priority queuing IEEE 802 1w RSTP IGMP v1 amp v 2 snooping DHCP relay option82 IEEE 802 1x Port based Authentication SNMP v1 amp v2c MIBs MIB II IF MIB Q MIB P MIB e ADSL line MIB e ZyXEL proprietary MIBs Per ADSL port limitations Number of MAC filter 10 Number of PVC 8 Number of PPVC 2 Number of PPVC member 8 Number of RPVC 8 Number of TLSPVC 8 Number of PAEPVC 8 Number of VLAN 16 IGMP maximum group per DSL port is 16 IGMP maximum host IPs per DSL port is 16 IGMP maximum host IPs per Ethernet port is 1024 Number of DHCP snooping 32 Maximum joined MVLAN 4 Maximum ACL profile mapping 8 System limitations Number of VL
442. traffic flow Chapter 14 xDSL Profiles Setup 121 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 14 3 Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Note Traffic shaping controls outgoing downstream traffic not incoming upstream 14 3 1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification 14 3 1 1 Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR is an ATM traffic class that provides fixed bandwidth CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice 14 3 1 2 Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time rt VBR or non real time nrt VBR connections The rt VBR real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation An example of an rt VBR connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requir
443. ts etherStatsMulticastP kts etherStatsCRCAlignErrors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers etherStatsCollisions etherStats64Octets etherStats65to1 27 Octets etherStats128t02550ctets etherStats255t05110ctets etherStats512to10230ctets etherStats1024to15180ctets Port Statistics Enet1 Enet2 0 0 7529467 1461837 26003 14852 14740 14605 1106 100 14193 3896 2939 1290 391 3294 Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Port 1 Clear Counter Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Port Statistics RMON LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Statistics Click this to go back to the previous screen Enet1 Click this to look at the RMON history for this port Enet2 Click this to look at the RMON history for this port EtherStatsDropEvents This field displays the total number of packets that were dropped on this port EtherStatsOctets This field displays the total number of octets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsPkts This field displays the total number of good packets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsBroadcastPkts This field displays the total number of broadcast packets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsMulticastPkts This field displays the total number of multicast packets received transmitted on this port EtherStatsCRCAlignErrors This field displays the t
444. ts lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC vci The VCI of the PAE PVC This command displays the status of PPPoA to PPPoE PVC sessions on the specified port s or PVCs The following example displays the settings for port 1 Chapter 53 Virtual Channel Management 401 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 287 PAE PVC Session Command Example ras adsl paepvc session 1 pvc 1 1 33 Session state down session id PANO session uptime 0 secs acname srvcname 53 8 5 PAE PVC Counter Command Syntax ras adsl paepvc counter lt portlist gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt portlist gt The port number of the PAE PVC You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt vpi gt The VPI of the PAE PVC vci The VCI of the PAE PVC This command displays statistics about PPPoA to PPPoE PVC activity The following example displays the statistics for port 1 Figure 288 PAE PVC Counter Command Example ras adsl paepvc counter 1 pvc 1 1 33 tx rx ppp lcp config request 0 ppp lcp echo request A 0 ppp lcp echo reply 0 pppoe padi 0 x pppoe pado 0 pppoe padr 0 i pppoe pads 0 pppoe padt 0 0 pppoe srvcname error ES 0 pppoe ac system error B 0 pppoe gen
445. ttings 2 Click Paste and the following screen appears 3 Select to which ports you want to copy the settings Use All to select every port Use None to clear all of the check boxes 4 Click Apply to paste the settings Figure 69 Select Ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 1 9 DDnpmpnnpnmnmr 19 12 OOC ENET1 select All None ENET2 Apply Cancel a At the time of writing the VLAN Acceptable Frame Type field is read only for the Ethernet ports The AAM1212 accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames on the Ethernet ports Chapter 16 VLAN 147 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 148 Chapter 16 VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 17 IGMP This chapter describes the IGMP screens 17 1 IGMP Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data See RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively 17 2 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different sub network A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individ
446. tus SO BOLD iaeckrssi nivei occi dust exterabee ieri andr E eco E pex teu DIUI Fest dU ENa 161 19 3 MV LAN Soup SS CESEBET res d rapett b EE te pet ERI Pt Li a teta ur Pu IER PEU Eras Pond 162 TO MYLAN Group Sreo ett 164 Chapter 20 aii 167 201 Packet Filler BONBON TTE 167 Chapter 21 MAC FIEL isbutite PERRO UEM aakhan Aaaah ea Landa d REX TEN 169 21 4 MAC Filter Introduction usus ecd cente i cadi cic C dod i ada e addi ead 169 2 III TTE ETT 169 Chapter 22 Spanning Tree Protocol iiseesenxoniukixauo ea n pta atu y43RRKQuRAKKNS Na ARSRu XAR Una NRN SRAnAR Nr A oRGCA 171 221 RU UNA S Ib e cried adapt dana atc iracu bait omia orat ene ada ola 171 22 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status SOIBBI iiie cese tha isen attt tosta etr onte 173 22 2 Spamming Tres Protocol SOFBBE 1r rrr it pr LIES PE HISE eeki in rasanan 175 Chapter 23 Porn Authentic BD DE dco ata pt el V asco e Eo RR NGA REQUE ARE A AE LEA RAT RARE RR LE 177 23 1 Iniroduction to Atben CAO 12 repre Eoo EE SE EE RENE Ee Eb eo S REEEREUEIS 177 CRANE COME 177 23 1 2 Introduction to Local User Database 2 eese nana 177 ence crm Ner IB D TET 177 25 BUS TX SOS Lei oce i o e Co ene tle aer oie e Fea s La d dev b tela APO EP 179 Chapter 24 EGIT Seb uius E E E E E MUS IN MERI M E MUN IURE RE E 181 Vo MEZ E c VERI m 181 242 Pod Secum SEIS adress DU pna ee ERES 181 Chapter 25 DCE REP anseres unis Hikia EXTR CES RE INEIN REO FS MERC QE CHDUROR LUE CRURA NE
447. ty 0 traffic rule number 12 The AAMI212 checks Profile first If the traffic is VLAN ID 100 the AAMI212 follows the action in Profilel and does not check Profile2 You cannot assign profiles that have the same rule numbers to the same PVC 31 1 2 ACL Profile Actions The AAM1212 can perform the following actions after it classifies upstream traffic e rate rate change the rate to the specified value 1 65535 kbps rvlan lt rvlan gt change the VLAN ID to the specified value 1 4094 rpri lt rpri gt change the IEEE 802 1p priority to the specified value 0 7 deny do not forward the packet The AAM1212 can apply more than one action to a packet unless you select deny If you select the rvlan action the AAM1212 replaces the VLAN ID before it compares the VLAN ID of the packet to the VID of the PVC As a result it is suggested that you replace VLAN ID on super channels not normal PVC since super channels accept any tagged traffic If you replace the VLAN ID for a normal PVC the AAM1212 drops the traffic because the new VLAN ID does not match the VID of the PVC This is illustrated in the following scenario There is a normal PVC and its PVID is 900 You create an ACL rule to replace the VLAN ID with 901 Initially the traffic for the PVC belongs to VLAN 900 Then the AAMI212 checks the ACL rule and changes the traffic to VLAN 901 When the AAM1212 finally compares the VLAN ID ofthe traffic 901 to the VID of the PVC
448. ual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 17 2 1 IGMP Snooping A layer 2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the AAM1212 to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The AAM1212 forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group The AAM1212 discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device 17 2 2 IGMP Proxy To allow better network performance you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology Chapter 17 IGMP 149 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide In IGMP proxy an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source or the root of the multicast tree and is able to
449. ue The sequence in this table is not important Click this to edit the associated ACL profile in the section above ACL Profile This field displays the name of this ACL profile Select Select the check box in the Select column for an entry and click Delete to Delete remove the entry Select All Click this to select all entries in the table Select None Click this to un select all entries in the table Chapter 31 ACL 215 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 31 4 ACL Profile Map Screen Use this screen to look at all the ACL profiles and the PVCs to which each one is assigned To open this screen click Advanced Application ACL ACL Profile Map Figure 112 ACL Profile Map HET ACL Setup ACL Profile Setup ACL Profile List All Index Profile VPINCI 1 example 0 33 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 ACL Profile Map LABEL DESCRIPTION ACL Setup Click ACL Setup to open the screen where you can assign ACL profiles to PVCs see Section 31 2 on page 212 ACL Profile Setup Click ACL Profile Setup to open the screen where you can set up ACL profiles see Section 31 3 on page 214 ACL Profile Select the ACL profile s for which you want to see which PVCs are assigned to it Index This field displays the number of an entry Profile This field shows the ACL profile assigned to this PVC Port This field displays the DSL port number on which the
450. uide The following example sets the device to use IGMP proxy Figure 174 IGMP Snoop Enable Command Example ras gt switch igmpsnoop enable proxy 47 2 3 IGMP Snoop Disable Command Syntax ras switch igmpsnoop disable This command turns off IGMP proxy or snooping The following example sets the device to not use IGMP proxy or snooping Figure 175 IGMP Snoop Disable Command Example ras switch igmpsnoop disable 47 3 IGMP Filter Commands Use the IGMP filter commands to define IGMP filter profiles and assign them to DSL ports IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups You can have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service like a SIP server for example Then you can assign the IGMP filter profile to DSL ports that are allowed to use the service 47 3 1 IGMP Filter Show Command Syntax ras switch igmpfilter show portlist where portlist You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt ora list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt This command displays which IGMP filter profile a DSL port s is using 310 Chapter 47 IGMP Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example displays which IGMP filter profile DSL port 5 is using Figure 176 IGMP Filter Show
451. ur on the ATUR within 15 minutes 376 Chapter 52 ADSL Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide atuc 6885 Satur essc lt atuc fast rateup atur fast rateup gt atuc interleave rateup atur interleave rateup lt atuc fast ratedown atur fast ratedown atuc interleave ratedown atur interleave ratedown init fail enable atuc fail fast lt atuc ses gt atur ses gt atuc uas atur uas The number of Errored Seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes A rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent A rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s upstream transmission rate increases by more than this number then a trap is sent A rate in kilobits per second kbps If a fast mode connection s downstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent A rate in kilobits per second kbps If an interleave mode connection s upstream transmission rate decreases by more than this number then a trap is sent 1 sets the profile to trigger an alarm for an initialization failures trap 2 sets the profile to not trigger an alarm for an initialization failures trap The number of failed fast retrains that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes The number of Severely Errored Se
452. ure 118 Service Access Control Service Access Contro Return Services Telnet FTP WEB ICMP Server Port 23 1 655345 zi 1 655535 eo 1 65535 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Return Click Return to go back to the previous screen Services Services you may use to access the AAM 1212 are listed here Active Select the Active check boxes for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the AAM1212 Server Port For Telnet FTP or web services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 34 6 Remote Management Screen Use this screen to configure the IP address ranges of trusted computers that may manage the AAMI212 To open this screen click Advanced Application Access Control Secured Client 226 Chapter 34 Access Control AAM1212 51 53 S
453. ure reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 40 2 ARP Table Screen The ARP table can hold up to 500 entries To open this screen click Management ARP Table Chapter 40 ARP Table 249 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 134 ARP Table CARP Table Flush Total 1 ARP entries Page 1 of 1 Index 1 IP Address MAC Address 192 168 1 33 00 50 8d 48 59 1 Previous Page Next Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table Total X ARP Entries This displays the number of entries in the ARP table Page X of X This identifies which page of information is displayed and the total number of pages of information Index This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address Previous Page Click one of these buttons to show the preceding or following screen if the Next Page information cannot be displayed in one screen 250 Chapter 40 ARP Table AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 41 Commands This chapter introduces the command line interface and lists the available commands 41 1 Command Line Interface Overview Note See the previous chapters for background information
454. us sannin acia i at d tha E bu Y E daa 386 53 4 2 PPVC Member Set Command eintreten ran 386 53 5 PPVC Member Delete Command 12 tar perna optat I esee aa 387 53 0 PPVC Member Show Command 1 5 5 uccisi eret Ek Ran aaa an aa a 388 agb PPVC Show COMMING nunca seercct aeea ena hast Pater eo E Bc Lr 389 53 0 2 PPVC Delete COMMANA 22 x trn Ert ER toI SU EAEN ERAAN 389 53 7 2694 Routed Mode Commands 15 eter rrt tret operan neta rnb ep PUR TREE epu TIRE 390 53 7 1 2584 Routed Mods EXeImiple 1 errore aeta cde teens aha saved CE ra siae 391 53 7 2 RPVC Gateway Set Command 1 eis de renta etn ena aae ea c 392 52 1 2 RPVC Gateway Show Command 2er eerte rete eto ret doe reb bebua 392 53 7 4 RPVC Gateway Delete Command eere nnne nnns 393 DO do REVOSECOMI uacua pet ires casio niles cia Faut UR ED EESE 393 53 AO REVO Show COIIIEOELiicicop d acide idees Fe be dite aoa 394 Ba r7 RPYC Delete Command uos ior Letti i o Ra ert e edd 395 53 7 8 RPVC Route Set Command 1 netto pert rr ep IR arrer In EXER Oke AREA REA PERR 396 Sor SRP VC Route Show CO WIE uuuuce iiic aie eacss eU corra dtes ee EE Pere cba DR atii 396 53 7 10 RPVC Route Delete Command assirinassi kk raa atu kenne 397 53 7 11 RPVC ARP Aging me Set Command 5 reto ret ha E RrEa 398 53 7 12 RPVC ARP Agingtime Show Command sseseeeee 398 53 7 13 RPVC ARP Show COmmMmand 11 eiscete aed rena nk XR habc Ra aaa 399 Bote RPVC ARP Flush Coral cen
455. vated which relay mode the AAMI212 is using the current list of DHCP servers by VLAN the status of the DHCP relay agent info option 82 feature and the information configured for it Figure 147 Show Command Example ras switch dhcprelay show DHCP relay status disable DHCP relay mode auto Server list index vid primary server secondary server L 212 212 212 212 213 213 213 213 2 2 214 214 214 214 215 215 215 251 option82 sub optl info Circuit ID 44 1 2 Enable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay enable Chapter 44 DHCP Commands 287 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide This command turns on the DHCP relay feature 44 1 3 Disable Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay disable This command turns off the DHCP relay feature 44 1 4 Server Set Command Syntax ras switch dhcprelay server set vid lt primary server gt lt secondary server where vid The ID of the VLAN served by the specified DHCP server s lt primary The IP address of one DHCP server server gt The IP address of a second DHCP server lt secondary server gt This command specifies the DHCP server s that serve the specified VLAN The primary server is required the secondary server is optional The AAM1212 routes DHCP requests to the specified DHCP server s according to the relaymode See Section 44 1 7 on page 289 Use VLAN ID 0 to set up the default DHCP server s for all n
456. ved transmitted in the sampling period CRCAlignErrors This field displays the total number of CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check alignment errors in the sampling period UndersizePkts This field displays the total number of packets that were too small received transmitted in the sampling period OversizePkts This field displays the total number of packets that were too big received transmitted in the sampling period Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens 79 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 10 Port Statistics RMON History Detail continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fragments This is the number of frames received transmitted that were less than 64 octets long and contained an invalid FCS including non integral and integral lengths Jabbers This is the number of frames received transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets non VLAN or 1522 octets VLAN and contained an invalid FCS including alignment errors Collisions This is the number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Utilizations This field displays the port utilization status in the sampling period 80 Chapter 6 Home and Port Statistics Screens AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 7 System Information The System Information screen displays g
457. verity levels of the alarms and where the system is to send them To open this screen click Alarm Alarm Event Setup Chapter 36 Alarm 233 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 122 Alarm Event Setup DREMA Alarm Status Alarm Port Setup Index Alarm Condition Code Condition Facility SNMP Syslog Severity Clearable dsl 5000 dsl 5001 dsl 5002 dsl 5003 dsl 5004 dsl 5005 dsl 5006 dsl 5007 dsl 5008 dsl 5008 dsl 5010 dsl 5011 dsl 5012 dsl 5013 eget 10000 eqpt 10001 eqpt 10002 eqpt 10003 eqpt 10004 eqpt 10005 sys 15000 sys 15001 sys 15002 sys 15003 sys 15004 enet 20000 1 2 3 4 5 amp E 8 9 10 11 12 13 44 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 enet 20001 line up local Y v info line down local 1 minor ad perf lol thresh local 1 minor ad perf lof thresh local 1 minor ad perf los thresh local 1 minor ad perf lop thresh local 1 minor ad perf es thresh local 1 minor ad perf ses thresh local 1 minor iciiiqiciqiai lt ad_perf_uas_thresh local 1 minor ad atuc loftrap local 1 minor ad atuc lostrap local 1 minor ad atur loftrap local 1 minor amd stur lostrap local 1 minor ad atur Iprtrap local 1 minor wol err local 1 critical temp err local 1 critical hw rtc fail local 1 critical hw mon fail local 1 critical cold start local 1 warm start local 1 reboot local 1 aco local 1 alm clear local 1 login fail local 1 anti spoofing local 1 local 1 XIXIMIXSININIX
458. versions on each port DSCP Use this screen to set up DSCP on each port and to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values TLS PVC Use this screen to set up Transparent LAN Service VLAN stacking Q in Q on each port ACL Use this screen to set up Access Control Logic profiles and to assign them to each PVC Downstream Use this screen to block downstream broadcast packets from being sent to Broadcast specified VLANs on specified ports SysLog Use this screen to configure the syslog settings Access Control Use this screen to configure service access control and configure SNMP and remote management Routing Protocol 58 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 4 Web Configurator Screens continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Routing Use this screen to configure static routes A static route defines how the AAM1212 should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually Alarm Alarm Status Use these screens to view the alarms that are currently in the system Alarm Event Setup Use these screens to view and set the severity levels of the alarms and where the system is to send them Alarm Port Setup Use this screen to set the alarm severity threshold for recording alarms on an individual port s Management Maintenance Use this screen to perform firmware and configuration file maintenanc
459. vice To open this screen click Management Maintenance Click here Firmware Upgrade Figure 126 Firmware Upgrade c Firmware Upgrade J To upgrade the switch s firmware browse to the location ofthe binary BIN file and click the upgrade button File Path Browse Upgrade Chapter 37 Maintenance 239 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the device in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Upgrade 37 3 Restore Configuration Screen Use this screen to load a configuration file from your computer to the device To open this screen click Management Maintenance Click here Restore Text Configuration Figure 127 Restore Configuration EIAN To restore the device s configuration from a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display a Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore conf 0 is the name of the configuration file on the device so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen Note Warning If you load an invalid configuration file it may corrupt the settings
460. vice s model name ZyNOS F W Version This field displays the version number of the device s current firmware including the date created DSP Code Version This field displays the Digital Signal Processor firmware version number This is the modem code firmware Hardware Version This is the version of the physical device hardware This field may be blank Serial Number This is the individual identification number assigned to the device at the factory This field may be blank Ethernet Address This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the device Hardware Monitor Enable Select this check box to turn the hardware monitor on or clear it to turn the hardware monitor off Temperature Unit Select C to display all temperature measurements in degrees Celsius Select F to display all temperature measurements in degrees Fahrenheit Temperature Each temperature sensor can detect and report the temperature Temperature sensor 1 is near the DSL chipset Temperature sensor 2 is near the central processing unit Temperature sensor 3 is at the hardware monitor chip Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Average This field displays the average temperature measured at this sensor Threshold Low
461. ving Your Configuration Click Apply in a configuration screen when you are done modifying the settings in that screen to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the AAM1212 s power is turned off Click Config Save in the navigation panel to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the AAMI212 s storage that remains even if the AAMI212 s power is turned off Note Use Config Save when you are done with a configuration session 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in any screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so you do not lock out other device administrators 60 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 21 Logout Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 61 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 62 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 5 Initial Configuration This chapter describes initial configuration for the AAMI212 See Appendix A on page 423 for various default settings of the AAMI212 5 1 Initial Configuration Overview This chapter shows what you first need to do to provide service to DSL subscribers 5 2 Initial Configuration This chapter u
462. voltage of the DC power when logged THERMO LOW WARN The temperature was too low at one of the temperature sensors TEMPERATURE dev id id EA sehreshold gt 0 sensor near the ADSL chipset PISE 1 sensor near the CPU value lt temp gt degr C 2 thermal sensor chip threshold temperature limit temp temperature when the entry was logged THERMO OVER WARN The temperature was too high at one of the temperature sensors TEMPERATURE dev id id Ridge d threshold 0 sensor near the ADSL chipset E 1 sensor near the CPU value temp degr C 2 thermal sensor chip threshold temperature limit temp temperature when the entry was logged THERMO OVER INFO The temperature at one of the temperature sensors has come back to TEMPERATURE released normal dev id id threshold lt threshold gt 0 sensor near the ADSL chipset chee 1 sensor near the CPU value lt temp gt degr C 2 thermal sensor chip threshold temperature limit temp temperature when the entry was logged Chapter 42 Command Examples 273 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 90 Log Messages continued va nominal lt nominal gt mV lue lt voltage gt mV LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION THERMO OVER VOLTAGE WARN The voltage at one of the voltage sensors went above the accepted dev lt id gt limit operating range lt thre
463. where lt portlist gt You can specify a single DSL port lt 1 gt all DSL ports lt gt or a list of DSL ports lt 1 3 5 gt You can also include a range of ports lt 1 5 6 10 gt lt profile gt The profile that will define the settings of this port lt glite gdmt ets The ADSL operational mode The AAM1212 51 and the i ti413 auto ad AAM1212 53 have different choices sl2 ads12 gt This command assigns a specific profile to an individual port and sets the port s operational mode or standard The profile defines the maximum and minimum upstream downstream rates the target upstream downstream signal noise margins and the maximum and minimum upstream downstream acceptable noise margins of all the DSL ports to which you assign the profile When set to auto the port follows whatever mode is set on the other end of the line Note When the mode is set to auto the connection rates are governed by the negotiated operational mode regardless of the rates configured in the profile For example if the profile is set to use a rate of 18000 Kbps that speed is only supported if the negotiated operational mode is ADSL 2 Any other operational mode will limit the rate to what is supported by the specific standard When the mode is set to auto in the AAM1212 51 the t1413 mode has been removed from the auto mode selection list When a profile is assigned to a line in auto mode the line will not go to showtime if the modem is configure
464. where you can configure routed PVC settings see Section 27 2 on page 192 Aging Time Enter a number of seconds 10 10000 to set how long the device keeps the Address Resolution Protocol table s entries of IP addresses of CPE devices using 2684 routed mode Enter 0 to disable the aging time Apply Setting Click Apply Setting to save your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Index This field displays the number of the IP address entry Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway to which the device sends the traffic that it receives from this entry s IP address VID This field displays the VLAN Identifier that the device adds to Ethernet frames that it sends to this gateway MAC This field displays the subscriber s MAC Media Access Control address Flush Click Flush to remove all of the entries from the ARP table 27 5 2684 Routed Gateway Screen Use this screen to configure gateway settings To open this screen click Advanced Application 2684 Routed Mode Routed Gateway Chapter 27 2684 Routed Mode AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 102 2684 Routed Gateway OWE Gateway d Routed PVC Routed Domain RPVC ARP Proxy Gateway IP VID Priority Index Gateway IP VID o 0 0 0 o
465. wireless clients igmp Reject IGMP packets Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts none Accept all packets This command sets the packet type filter for the specified DSL port s 326 Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following example sets DSL port 5 to reject ARP PPPoE and IGMP packets Figure 194 Packet Filter Set Command Example ras switch pktfilter set 5 arp pppoe igmp 48 1 3 Packet Filter PPPoE Only Command Syntax ras switch pktfilter pppoeonly lt portlist gt This command sets the AAM1212 to allow only PPPoE traffic on the specified DSL port s The system will drop any non PPPoE packets The following example sets DSL port 1 to accept only PPPoE packets Figure 195 Packet Filter PPPoE Only Command Example ras gt switch pktfilter pppoeonly 1 Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands 327 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 328 Chapter 48 Packet Filter Commands AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 49 IP Commands This chapter shows you how to use the standard shell IP commands to configure the IP Internet Protocol parameters 49 1 IP Commands Introduction Use the AAMI212 s management IP addresses to manage it through the network 49 2 IP Settings and Default Gateway Use the following command sequence to set the AAMI212 s IP settings for the Ethernet 1
466. within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap The number of error seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of error seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Link has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUC has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Link has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Frame has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Signal has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap The number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of times a Loss Of Power has occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap The number of error seconds within 15 minutes for the ATUR has reached the threshold currValue is the number of error seconds that have occurred within the 15 minute interval adslAtucSesLThreshTrap The number of severely errored seconds within 15 minutes
467. y Cancel MYLAN ID s Name example State Disable Entry Index Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP Select 1 224 1 1 0 224 1 1 255 E 164 Chapter 19 Multicast VLAN AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 MVLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN Status Click MVLAN Status to open the MVLAN Status screen where you can view a summary of all multicast VLAN on the AAM1212 see Section 19 2 on page 161 MVLAN Setup Click MVLAN Setup to open the MVLAN Setup screen where you can configure basic settings and port members for each multicast VLAN see Section 19 3 on page 162 MVLAN ID Select the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN for which you want to configure a range of multicast IP addresses Index Select the index number of the multicast VLAN group the range of multicast IP addresses you want to configure for this multicast VLAN If you want to change the current settings select an index number that already exists If you want to add a new multicast VLAN group select an index number that does not exist Start Multicast IP Enter the beginning of the range of multicast IP addresses The IP address must be a valid multicast IP address between 224 0 0 0 and 239 255 255 255 End Multicast IP Enter the end of the range of multicast IP addresses The IP address must be a valid multicast IP address between 224 0 0 0 and 239 255 255 255
468. y PVCs belong to this PPVC has Click the number to open a screen where you can configure the PPVC s member PVCs Delete Click Delete to remove a PPVC Clicking Delete saves your changes to the AAM1212 s volatile memory The AAM1212 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 13 11 1 PPVC Setup Members Screen Use this screen to add and remove member PVCs Note The member PVCs must be created on the subscriber s device To open this screen click Basic Setting xDSL Port Setup PPVC Setup Then click a PPVC s member number to open the PPVC Setup Members screen 116 Chapter 13 xDSL Port Setup AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Figure 56 PPVC Setup Edit OLE ED Port 1 0 32 Index YPI VCI VC Profile DEFVAL DEFVAL DEFVAL DEFVAL Add VPI o VCI o DS VC Profile DEFVAL US VC Profile x Level 0 Add Modify Close The following table describes the labels in this screen 1 1 32 2 1734 Table 24 PPVC Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port for which you are viewing or configuring settings Index This field displays the number of the member PVC VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port The
469. ypes of errors that occur in the PPPoE session between the AAM1212 and the BRAS Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE 203 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide 204 Chapter 28 PPPoA to PPPoE AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 29 DSCP This chapter shows you how to set up DSCP on each port and how to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values 29 1 DSCP Overview DiffServ Code Point DSCP is a field used for packet classification on DiffServ networks The higher the value the higher the priority Lower priority packets may be dropped if the total traffic exceeds the capacity of the network 29 2 DSCP Setup Screen Use this screen to activate or deactivate DSCP on each port To open this screen click Advanced Application DSCP Figure 106 DSCP Setup DSCP Map Select gt r Select All None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 DSCP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Map Click DSCP Map to open the screen where you can set up the mapping between source DSCP priority and IEEE 802 1p priority see Section 29 3 on page 206 Port This field displays each port number Active This field displays whether DSCP is active V or inactive on this port Select ida this and click Active or Inactive to enable or disable the DSCP on this port Chapter 29 DSCP 205 AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide Table 65 DSCP Setup continued
470. yslog 219 System Information 81 system log 244 System up time 69 T Tag Control Information TCI 141 Tag Protocol Identifier TPID 141 tagged VLAN See VLAN telco 50 connector pin assignments 429 temperature 82 terminal emulation 421 Theoretical Arrival Time TAT 124 Time RFC 868 86 time server protocols supported 86 434 Index AAM1212 51 53 Series User s Guide time zone 86 TLS 207 ToneDiag 245 tones 137 trademarks 3 traffic parameters 122 traffic shaping 122 transmission error correction 102 120 Transparent LAN Service See TLS Trellis encoding 134 troubleshooting 413 U UnAvailable Seconds UAS 136 UNIX syslog 219 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR 122 up time 70 upstream traffic 101 User Account 87 V Variable Bit Rate VBR 122 VC 110 VC Mux 110 VC Profile Screen 125 VC Setup 110 vendor information 134 virtual channel 109 downstream profile 111 profile 110 upstream profile 112 Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI Virtual Circuit See VC Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN Virtual Path Identifier VPI VLAN 141 explicit tagging 295 forwarding 142 implicit tagging 295 priority frame 142 registration information 295 VLAN ID 141 VLAN ID maximum number of 141 when VLAN ID is zero 142 VLAN stacking See TLS voltage 82 W warranty 6 note 6 X XMODEM upload 421 422 Index 435

SMG-700 User's Guide V1.00 (Nov 2004)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents